Transcript
3$571(5$FFHVV*XLGH
BTM428J Issue 6 May 2001
Copyright 2001, Avaya Inc. All Rights Reserved
Intellectual property related to this product (including trademarks) and registered to Lucent Technologies Inc. has been transferred or licensed to Avaya Inc. Any reference within the text to Lucent Technologies Inc. or Lucent should be interpreted as references to Avaya Inc. The exception is cross-references to books published prior to April 1, 2001, which may retain their original Lucent titles. Avaya Inc., formed as a result of Lucent’s planned restructuring, designs, builds and delivers voice, converged voice and data, customer relationship management, messaging, multi-service networking and structured cabling products and services. Avaya Labs is the research and development arm for the company.
1RWLFH While reasonable efforts were made to ensure the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya can assume no responsibility for any errors. Changes and corrections to the information contained in this document may be incorporated into future releases. 2UGHULQJ,QIRUPDWLRQ To order additional copies of this PARTNER® Access Guide, call the Avaya University Registration Center at 904-636-3261 and reference document number BTM428J.
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Table of Contents
Table of Contents Processor Modules ........................................................................... Tab 1 Line/Station Modules ........................................................................ Tab 2 Telephones ....................................................................................... Tab 3 Auxiliary Equipment .......................................................................... Tab 4 Voice Messaging Products................................................................ Tab 5 Introduction ................................................................................................. 5-1 Voice Messaging Product Feature Comparison.......................................... 5-2 Security Tips ............................................................................................... 5-8 PARTNER Messaging R1 ........................................................................... 5-9 PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 ................................................................. 5-27 PARTNER Mail VS R5 ................................................................................ 5-36 PARTNER Mail R3...................................................................................... 5-44 Octel 100 Voice Messaging System ........................................................... 5-54 Avaya Web Communications Server .......................................................... 5-58
Capacities ......................................................................................... Tab 6 Equipment Codes ............................................................................. Tab 7 Feature Definitions............................................................................ Tab 8 Feature Compatibility ........................................................................ Tab 9 PARTNER Systems In a Nutshell ..................................................... Tab 10 Testing Power Outlet ........................................................................ Tab 11 Pin Assignments ............................................................................... Tab 12 Installing MLS-CA24 ......................................................................... Tab 13 System Restart (Erase)..................................................................... Tab 14 System Identifier ............................................................................... Tab 15 Model Z300A Filter............................................................................ Tab 16 End User Training Checklist.............................................................. Tab 17 Pooled Operations ............................................................................ Tab 18 Telephone Button Programming ....................................................... Tab 19 Documentation.................................................................................. Tab 20 Training & Support ............................................................................ Tab 21 Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
TOC-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Table of Contents
BTM428J
Programming Quick References ....................................................... Tab 22 PARTNER ACS Programming Quick Reference ........................................ 22-1 PARTNER II and PARTNER Plus Programming Quick Reference ............ 22-17 PARTNER Endeavor Programming Quick Reference ................................ 22-25
Toll Fraud.......................................................................................... Tab 23 PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Installation Guide . Tab 24 PARTNER ACS System Planner ...................................................... Tab 25 Glossary............................................................................................ Tab 26
Avaya - Proprietary TOC-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Processor Modules
PARTNER Advanced Communications System (ACS) 308 Module
Contact Closure Suppor t PARTNER ACS
Grounding Screw
SMDR Port 2 PC Card Slots
Paging Port
Power LED 1
3 CO Line Ports
2 3
Music Source RCA a Jck (volume adjust via system admin.)
10 11 12
8 ETR Station Ports
13 14 15 16 17
Battery Compartment
Locking Latch BTM428J02c.cdr
PARTNER ACS Stand-Alone ACS Processor Module
2-Slot Carrier
5-Slot Carrier
ACS Processor 400 Module Module
ACS 1600 DSL 206 Processor Module Module Module
400 Modules
PFT
4 5
1
Line Jacks
2 3
L
N E
Line Jacks
S
L
6 7
I
N E S
1
10
11 12
11 12
L I N E S
12 13
L I N E S
1
2 3
10
8 9
I
2 3
Line Jacks
Line Jacks
PFT
24 25
E X
10
T
13
Extension Jacks
Extension Jacks
26 27
E N S I
11 12
O
13
6 7
L
28
I N E
29
N S
13
14
14
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
S
14
10 11
L I N E S
14 15
L I N E S
17 fppadsl KLC 121800
Note: A 2-Slot carrier cannot be used with PARTNER.
Extension Jacks BTM428J02h.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
1-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Processor Module
BTM428J
PARTNER II Two Carrier System Primary Carrier
Main Circuit Breaker 400E Modules
206E Modules
Main Circuit Breaker
Expansion Processor Module
Primary Processor Module Grounding Screw
Grounding Screw
Outside Line Jacks PFT
Outside Line Jacks
L I N E
Power Indicators (LEDs)
PFT
S
L I N E S
PFT
AGE P
L I N
SMDR
E
PFT
L
S
I N E
PFT
S
PFT
PAGE Jack SMDR Jack
PROCESSOR MODULE
E
N
X
S
T
I
E
O
N
N
S
S
S PFT
I
206
VOL
MODULE R1.0
206
PFT
MUSIC ON HOLD
O N S
MODULE R1.0 E
PFT
I
400
MODULE R1.0 E
T
PFT
PROCESSOR MODULE
X T
400
E
MODULE R1.0
N S
PFT
I O N S
X
PFT
L I
E
E
N
N
X
E
S
T
S
I
E
O
N
N
S
S
L
S
206
E
I E
E
MODULE R1.0
T
L N
PFT PFT
X
PFT
S
N
S
E
I E
MODULE R1.0
E
PFT
L N
206
N
MODULE R1.0
PFT
L I
206
Extension Jacks - 206 (E) modules only
Expansion Carrier
I O N S
MUSIC ON HOLD Volume Adjustment Screw
Expansion Cable
MUSIC ON HOLD Jack (for RCA phone plug)
Power Indicators (LEDs)
BTM428J01a.cdr
Manufacturing has been discontinued
PARTNER Plus Main Circuit Breaker
206E Modules
Processor Module Outside Line Jacks PFT
L I N E
Power Indicators (LEDs)
PFT
S
L I N E S
PFT
AGE P
L I N
SMDR
E
PFT
L
S
I N E
PFT
S
Extension Jacks (206E modules only)
L I
206
N
MODULE R1.0
E S
206
PFT
MODULE R1.0 E
PFT
X T E
E
N
X
S
T
I
E
O
N
N
S
S
PAGE Jack SMDR Jack
PROCESSOR MODULE
I O N S
206
VOL
MODULE R1.0
206
PFT
MUSIC ON HOLD
MODULE R1.0 E
PFT
X T E
E
N
X
S
T
I
E
O
N
N
S
S
I O N S
MUSIC ON HOLD Volume Adjustment Screw MUSIC ON HOLD Jack (for RCA phono plug) BTM428J01b.cdr
Manufacturing has been discontinued
Avaya - Proprietary 1-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Processor Modules
PARTNER 206E Module
206 Module
Module Connector
PARTNER PARTNER
Two outside line jacks PFT
N L I
PFT
L
N
I
E
N
S
E S
Power Indicator LED
206
MODULE
R1.0
206
MODULE
R1.0
PFT
L I
PFT
N
N
S
E S
L I
PFT
N
N
S
6 extension jacks
E S
L I N E S
L I
E
PFT
L I
E
PFT
PFT
L I N E S
BTM428J02d.cdr
Manufacturing has been discontinued; module connector cannot be used with PARTNER ACS
Endeavor Processor Module - 362
Grounding Screw
PC Card Slot Power LED Outside Line Jacks (3) Music Source RCA Jack (for RCA phono plug) Extension Jacks (6) Combination Jacks Battery Compartment BTM428J02f.cdr
Manufacturing has been discontinued
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
1-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Processor Module
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 1-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Line and Station Modules
Line and Station Modules 206E Module
206 Module
2 outside line jacks
2 outside line jacks
PARTNER
2 outside line jacks
PARTNER
PFT
PFT
I E
S
Power indicator LED
400
MODULE
R1.0
L I N E S L I
S
Power indicator LED
400
MODULE
R1.0
PFT
L I N E S
PFT
L I N
N
400
MODULE
R1.0
PFT
I E S
PFT L
I E S PFT
L I
I
N
E
E
E
S
S
S
6 extension jacks
6 extension jacks
200E Module
L I
N
N
L N
S
S
L N
PFT
E
E
PFT
L N
E
S
PFT
PFT
I N
E
PFT
PARTNER
L
N LI N
Power indicator LED
206EC Module
6 extension jacks
308EC Module
(only with ACS R2 and later)
PARTNER
2 Outside Line Jacks
PFT
3 CO Line Ports
Layer 1 LI N E S
1 2 3
400
MODULE
R1.0
10 11 12
8 ETR Station Ports
13 14 15 16 17
Power LED WA N link LED WA N(SDSL)interface WA N activity LED Ethernet link LED Ethernet interface Ethernet activity LED 3.3 Vdc Power LED Serial interface V.35 link LED V.35 activity LED V.35 interface
ckpadsl KLC 022001
1600 DSL Module
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
2-1
®
Partner Access Guide Line and Station Modules
BTM428J
Line and Station Modules
400E Module
400EC Module
PARTNER
PARTNER
4 Outside Line Jacks
PFT
4 Outside Line Jacks
L I N E
PFT
L I N E S
400
MODULE
S
R1.0
400
MODULE
R1.0
PFT
L I N E S
PFT
L I N E S
362EC Module (only with Endeavor)
Outside Line Jacks (3) Extension Jacks (6) Combination Jacks
1 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
BTM428J03a.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary 2-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Line and Station Modules
Line and Station Modules P ACS Release #
200 R2 200 R3.0 200E R3.0 200E R3.1 206 R1 206 R2 206 R3 206 R4 206E R3 206E R3.1 206E R4.0 206E R 4.1 206EC R3 206EC R3.1 206EC R4.1 308EC R1 308EC R3 400E R3 400E R3.1 400EC R3.1 362EC 1600 DSL
PARTNER Release #
PARTNER Plus Release #
PARTNER II Release #
Endeavor
1.0
1.1
2/3
4.0
1
2
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1
1
2
3
3.1
4.0
4.1
1
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
YU
YU
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y* N
Y* N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y* N
Y
Y
Y* N
Y
Y
Y* N
Y
Y
Y* N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
YU YU YU
YU YU YU YU
YU YU YU YU
YU YU YU YU
YU YU YU YU
YU YU YU
* Second slot only U If two 206 modules of different releases are used in the same PARTNER System, put the newer 206 module in the first slot. This will assure the customer has the most up-to-date feature set.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
2-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Line and Station Modules
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 2-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Telephones
PARTNER Series Telephones Inte
Ext.
rc om
Me Fe a
7
Tra
Fe a
Me A BC
Hol d
M NO
M ic HFA
e
Me A BC
Inte
e
DEF
7
3 M NO
6
TUV
8
WXYZ
9
0
#
#
PARTNER-6 Phone
ssa g
2 5
PQRS
*
9
0
Ext. 1
G HI
4
JKL
M NO
WXYZ
#
rcom
nsfr
Hol d
6
TUV
*
Tra
3
8
ture
C onf
I
Sp kr
DEF
7
9
ssa g
2 JKL
5
PQRS
W XYZ
0
Ext. 1
G HI
4
nsfr
rc om
Inte
rcom
C onf
I
6
TUV
8
Inte
Inte Feat ur e M ic HFA
Sp kr
DEF
3
J KL
5
rc om
I
Ho ld
2
G HI
RS
*
Inte
Sp kr M ic HFA
nsfr
A BC
4 PQ
Inte rcom ssa ge
ture
C onf
Tra
1
PARTNER-18 Phone
PARTNER-18D Phone
rc om
Inte
rc om
Ext. Feat ur e
M ic HFA
Sp kr
C onf
I
Tra
Messa
1 A BC
DEF
3
JKL
5
PQ RS
7
MNO
6
TUV
*
ge
2
G HI
4
nsfr
Ho ld
8
W XYZ
9
0
#
Optional PARTNER-CA-48 Intercom Autodialer. Works with all PARTNER display phones on ext. 10 or 11.
PARTNER-34D Phone
Note: As of the 2nd Quarter, 2001, tray cards are not provided on sets; one User Guide is included in box with telephone.
MLS Series Telephones MLS6
Inte
Inte Inte
Vo lume
5
PQ RS
7
Hold
8 O pe
0
A BC
M e ssa
3
JKL
6
TUV WXY
9
r
Vo lume
rc om
rc om
Ext.
Ext. Spkr
e
Fe a
Spkr Fe a
2
G HI
Inte Inte
Ext. Spe a ke Spkr rphon
1 4
r
om
rc om
rc om
ture
C onf
rTa nsfe
MLS-12 12
Interc
Vo lume
Fe a
MLS-
rc om
Tra nsfe
2
G HI
5
PQ RS
7
Hold
8
Z
O pe
0
#
a ke
rphon
A BC
M e ssa
3
JKL
rTa nsfe
MNO
4
r
5
PQ RS
7
Spe
a ke
rphon
e Mic
HFA I
2
G HI
8
A BC
M e ssa
3
JKL
6
TUV
ge
DEF
M NO
WXYZ
W XYZ
O pe
9
r
0
9
r
#
#
MLS-6 Phone
1
C onf
ge
DEF
Hold
6
TUV
ture
e Mic
HFA I
1 4
r
MNO
Spe
ture
C onf
ge
DEF
MLS-12D Phone
MLS-12 Phone
MLS-12D MLS-34D
Inte rc
om Inte rc
om
Vo lume
Ext.
Spkr Fe a
ture
1
C onf
Tra nsfe
Hold
4
r
5
7
8 O pe
0
Spe a
ke rphon
e
Volume
Feature
Mic
HFA I
2
G HI
PQ RS
A BC
Me
3
JKL
WXY
9
r
1
Conf
ssa ge
2
Spkr
DEF
4
Transfer
GHI
5
Mic PQRS
6
TUV
M NO
Hold
7
8
ABC
Message
3
JKL
6
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
Z
#
MLS-18D Phone
9
Oper
0
#
MLS-34D Phone
Optional MLS-CA24 Intercom Autodialer. Works with all display phones on ext. 10 or 11. P+ R3 or later, all P II, P ACS and P Endeavor
sm1501a_phones.eps
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
3-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Telephones
BTM428J
TransTalk® 9000 Series Wireless Telephones
On/Off Feat/P Conf
Trans Hold
Redial
Mute
1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO
7PQRS
8 TUV 9 WXYZ 0 OPER
SPARE HANDS ET REFRE SH
TransTalk™ Wireless Phones TransTalk Wireless.eps
PARTNER Endeavor Telephones
Endeavor
Endeavor
Endeavor
Endeavor
BTM428J04d.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary 3-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Telephones
PARTNER Endeavor Wall Mount
To LINE Jack BTM428J04b.cdr
BTM428J04c.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
3-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Telephones
BTM428J
System Telephones PARTNER ACS Rel#
PARTNER Release #
PARTNER Plus Release #
PARTNER II Release #.
Endeavor
1 thru 3
4.0
1 & 2
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1
1
2
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1
1
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y N N N N
Y Y Y Y N N
Y Y Y Y N N
Y Y Y Y N N
Y Y Y Y N N
Y Y Y 12 N N
Y Y Y 12 Y N
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y 12D Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y*f
Y Y Y Y Y Y
PARTNER-6 PARTNER-18
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y YU
Y YU
Y YU
Y YU
Y YU
Y Y
Y YU
Y YU
Y YU
Y YU
Y Y
Y Y
PARTNER-18D
Y
Y
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
YU
YU
YU
Y
12D
YU
YU
YU
Y
Y
PARTNER-34D
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
YU Y(
YU Y(
YU Y(
YU Y(
YU Y(
Y
N
YU Y(
Y
Y( Y Y Y Y
YU Y(
Y
Y( Y Y Y Y
12D 12D U U N YU N N
Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y( Y Y Y Y
MLS-6 MLS-12 MLS-12D MLS-18D MLS-34D MLS-CA24
PARTNER-CA48 Endeavor-6 Endeavor-18 Endeavor-18D Endeavor-34D
U
f #
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y( Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
For PARTNER-18D and 34D, 4 extra programmable buttons and 24 character display is not supported. For PARTNER-18, the LEDs for the last 6 buttons will never turn on and features that require LEDs will not be able to be programmed on these buttons. 4 extra programmable buttons and 24 character display not supported (only 16 characters supported). * MLS-CA24 and PARTNER-CA48 both require an electrical outlet. They are not powered by the PARTNER System. Maximum of 2 MLS-CA24’s per PARTNER Plus / PARTNER ACS System. Max. 4 MLS-CA24’s per Maximum of 2 PARTNER-CA48’s per system. PARTNER II System.
(
Avaya - Proprietary 3-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Auxiliary Equipment
Auxiliary Equipment (examples, not a complete listing)
Optional Devices
Optional Devices
(for the control unit)
(for extension jacks)
PARTNER
Serial Printer
PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System PARTNER Messaging
Standard Phone
Paging System
Answering Machine Call Accounting Terminal (Basic or Plus)
Fax Machine
ct NER 3000 PART re Adjun ct Closu Conta
PUSH
PUSH
Contact Closure Adjunct
Alert
POWER PLAY RECORD
Doorphone
Magic on Hold deck PC Cards • Backup/Restore • ASA/DXD (R1.0 or later) • Software upgrade (R2.0 or later) • Remote Access (R3.0 or later) • PARTNER Voice Messaging
Optional Devices - Extension Jacks.eps
Optional Devices - Control Unit.eps
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
4-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Auxiliary Equipment
BTM428J
Auxiliary Equipment Description
Equipment
Description
267F2 Bridging Adapter
Allows a T/R device to be bridged with an any system-series telephone or another T/R device. The 267F2 is built into PARTNER-series telephones.
Alerts
Tip/Ring strobes, chimes, horns or bells that light or ring when a call comes into the system or a system phone. Protects customer against unanswered calls with visual and audio alerts.
Answering Machine
Reduces or eliminates unanswered calls.
Auto Attendant
Answers calls and directs them to a specified extension, Calling Group, or Hunt Group.
CAT Basic
Call accounting terminal to monitor call activity; up to 1250 calls in memory.
CAT Plus
Call accounting terminal to monitor call activity; up to 6500 calls in memory.
CAT Plus Hospitality
Identical to CAT Plus but made for hotels/motels; track up to 80 phone extensions.
Contact Closure
Adjunct with two contact closures to operate devices like an electronic door lock from a subscriber’s extension.
Cordless Phones
Complete cordless system with base station and battery powered handset.
Credit Card Scanner
The credit card verification terminal can be installed as a separate telephone, or can be bridged to an MLS or PARTNER telephone to maximize line usage.
Doorphone
An Avaya proprietary two-way speakerphone that can be wall mounted outside an entrance or lobby. It allows visitors to alert any number of extensions, then carry on a two-way conversation when the extension answers. The unit has a doorbell-like button, speaker and microphone.
Fax Machine
The fax machine can be installed as a separate extension (usually recommended when fax usage is medium to heavy), or bridged to an MLS or PARTNER phone.
Headsets
Can be connected to telephones to provide hands-free operation of the telephone. In-Range-Out-of-Building. Allows the customer to place phones and other devices outside of the main building. Protects telephones and Control Units when they are installed in another building on the same continuous property.
IROBS
Avaya - Proprietary 4-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Auxiliary Equipment
Auxiliary Equipment Description Equipment
Description
Loudspeaker Paging
Allows the broadcasting of a message over a large area. The PARTNER Plus/ACS/II provides a PAGE jack on the processor module for direct connection of an Avaya (or other manufacturer’s) Paging system. R4.0 of the PARTNER Plus/II (as well as the PARTNER ACS) provide simultaneous paging through idle speakerphone sets and the loudspeaker paging system. Helps locate mobile employees and communicate with customers.
Magic-on-Hold
Device that provides customer with recorded production that can play personal selling messages, slogans, advertising themes, etc., while calls are on hold.
Modem
Allows two data communication devices to communicate with each other.
Music-on-Hold or Magic-on-Hold
PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II provide a port on the processor for connecting Music-on-Hold or Magic-on-Hold systems.
Off Premises Range Extender
The OPRE allows the connection of standard Touch-Tone phones beyond 3000 feet on the same continuous property or off-premises with an OL13C circuit from the local telephone company.
PARTNER Attendant
Answers calls with a customized greeting, then routes them to specific departments or extensions.
PARTNER MAIL
A functionally integrated voice mail system for the PARTNER Plus (R3.1 and later), PARTNER II (R3.0 and later), PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER ACS.
PARTNER MAIL VS Affordable, fully integrated basic mail service for PARTNER Plus / PARTNER II R3.1 and later, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER ACS. PARTNER Messaging
Enhanced Voice Messaging system for PARTNER Plus (R3.1 and later), PARTNER II (R3.1 and later), and PARTNER ACS.
PARTNER MultiLine Cordless
A cordless telephone that has 2 intercom buttons and allows for the appearance of 4 lines.
PARTNER Voice Messaging
This functionality is added by inserting the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card into either PC Card slot of a PARTNER ACS R1.1 or later system or PARTNER Endeavor, and leaving it there. Doing so creates a simple, inexpensive voice messaging service, after-hours call depository or receptionist backup.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
4-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Auxiliary Equipment
BTM428J
Auxiliary Equipment Description Equipment
Description
Remote Access PC Card
The new Remote Administration and Maintenance feature available with PARTNER ACS R3 and later will be supported by a PCMCIA card equipped with a V.34 BIS modem and 1MB Flash memory. This card will provide the modem connection for remote administration and maintenance. It will also serve in place of the Software Upgrade Card used with PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier releases, as well as the Backup and Restore Card used with PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier releases.
Remote Administration Unit
Allows customers to program PARTNER Systems from a central location.
Serial Printer
Used to print Call Accounting records.
Standard Phones
Basic and feature phones can be used during power failures.
TransTalk Wireless Phones
Complete wireless system includes a radio module that plugs into an extension port, desktop recharging cradle and battery powered phone.
Uninterruptible Power Supply
An auxiliary power unit for a telephone system that will provide continuous power in the event of an outage for a given period of time.
Avaya - Proprietary 4-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Auxiliary Equipment
Auxiliary Equipment PARTNER ACS Rel. # 1/1.1/ 3 4.0 2
PARTNER Release # 1
2
3.0 3.1
PARTNER Plus Release #
PARTNER II Release #
4.0
4.1
1
2
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1
1
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1
Endeavor
Answering Machines CAT Basic CAT Plus CAT Plus Hospitality Contact Closure Cordless Phones Credit Card Scanners Doorphones External Alerts Fax Machines Headsets Hotline IROBs Loudspeaker Paging Modems Magic-on-Hold
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y N Y Y
Y N N N N Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y N Y Y* Y N
N Y Y Y N Y Y* Y N
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y* Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y* Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y* Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y* Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y* Y Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y
Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Off Premises Range Extender PARTNER MAIL
Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
f Yf
f
f
*
Via a line port and adapter f Or use the Tones-on-Hold option. Requires the Music-on-Hold coupler shipped with the 206 module. Music-on-Hold requires the use of extension 15. # Limited functionality
Avaya – Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
4-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Auxiliary Equipment
BTM428J
Auxiliary Equipment PARTNER ACS 1/1.1/ 3 4.0 2 PARTNER MAIL VS PARTNER Messaging PARTNER Multi-Line Cordless PARTNER Voice Messaging Card PassageWay
1
PARTNER Release # 2 3.0 3.1 4.0 4.1
PARTNER Plus Release # 1 2 3.0 3.1 4.0 4.1
PARTNER II Release # 1 3.0 3.1 4.0 4.1
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
N N
N N
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N/Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
#
Remote Access PC Card Remote Administration Unit SMDR Stand Alone Attendant Standard Phones TransTalk Wireless Phones Uninterruptible Power Supply
Endeavor
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N N
N Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y N
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
N Y*
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y Y
Y** Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
*Only on bottom two-station ports **OR in a power outage
Avaya - Proprietary 4-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Introduction There are five Avaya voice messaging products that can be used with PARTNER communications systems: •
• • •
•
PARTNER® Voice Messaging Release 3 (PVM R3) is the smallest system, designed to serve very basic Call Answer (i.e., message recording) and Automated Attendant needs. PVM R3 is available in two versions (Large and Small); both versions are 2-port systems. PARTNER® Mail VS Release 5 (PMVS R5) provides basic Call Answer, Voice Mail and Automated Attendant voice messaging features. It is available in 2port and 4-port configurations. PARTNER MAIL® Release 3 (PM R3) is a more feature-rich messaging system than PMVS R5. It is available in 2-port, 4-port and 6-port configurations. PARTNER® Messaging Release 1 (PMsg R1) offers the latest voice messaging technology for PARTNER communications systems. It is more feature-rich and provides more storage capacity than PM R3. It also provides four multi-level Automated Attendants, Directory dialing and message addressing, www.messenger for PARTNER Messaging (a visual messaging feature) and a PC-based administration tool. PARTNER Messaging replaces both PMVS R5 and PARTNER MAIL R3 as a product offering. Octel® 100 is a standalone multi-media server that offers up to 16 ports of voice/fax with optional Visual Messaging and Networking capabilities.
The Avaya Web Communications Server (AWCS) can be used in conjunction with PMsg R1. AWCS enables users to access their PMsg R1 voice mail messages through their IMAP4 or SMTP e-mail client. AWCS also provides a gateway for Internet access – it is a web server that provides simultaneous Internet, Intranet and Extranet web site access. AWCS also features a secure electronic catalog. This section of the PARTNER Access Guide is divided into seven sub-sections. The first sub-section provides a comparison between PARTNER Voice Messaging Release 3, PARTNER Mail VS Release 5, PARTNER MAIL Release 3 and PARTNER Messaging Release 1. It also provides a list of security tips applicable to these voice messaging systems. A sub-section for each of these four voice messaging products follows, containing more detailed information. Lastly, there are two sub-sections titled Octel 100 and Avaya Web Communications Server, respectively.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
Voice Messaging Product Feature Comparison This matrix outlines the differences between the PARTNER Messaging Release 1 (PMsg R1), PARTNER Voice Messaging Release 3 (PVM R3), PARTNER Mail VS Release 5 (PMVS R5) and PARTNER MAIL Release 3 (PM R3) products.
System Configurations, Services and Capacities
PMsg R1
PVM R3
2
PMVS R5
Number of Ports
2, 4, or 6
System Services
Auto-Attendant, Auto-Attendant, Auto-Attendant, Auto-Attendant, Call Answer, Voice Mail
2 or 4
PM R3
Call Answer,
Call Answer,
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
1?
2, 4, or 6
Call Answer, Voice Mail 1
Record-A-Call
Record-A-Call
Tutor Choice of Monolingual or Bilingual Operation
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Languages Supported
U.S. English
U.S. English
U.S. English
U.S. English
Can. French
Can. French
Can. French
Latin Amer. Spanish
Latin Amer. Spanish
Latin Amer. Spanish
Yes
Yes
(Any supported language)
(Monolingual =Sys. Language
Choice Of System Administration Prompt Language
Yes (Any supported language)
No
Bilingual =Prim, or Sec. Language)
1
This feature is available in conjunction with PARTNER ACS Release 3 or later communications systems. Avaya - Proprietary 5-2 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
System Configurations, Services and Capacities Mailbox Language
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PMsg R1
Any supported language
PVM R3
US English
PMVS R5
Any supported language
PM R3
Monolingual =Sys. Language
Bilingual =Prim, or Sec. Language Dynamic Port Allocation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fixed Mailbox Dial Plan
No
Yes (10-49)
Yes (10-57)
No
Initial Mailbox Generation (PreCreation of Mailboxes)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Number of Mailboxes
Up to 200
4, 6, 8, 10 or, 12
Up to 48
Up to 100
Maximum Message Storage Per System
100 hours
100 hours Approximately 120 minutes, depending upon system configuration
21 hours
Flexible Maximum Message Length Per Mailbox
Yes (2-60 minutes)
No (Fixed, 2 minutes)
Yes (2-60 minutes)
Limited ( 5, 10, or 30 minutes, based on Class of Service)
Flexible Mailbox Size
Yes (5 -180 minutes)
Mailbox size is determined by the number of mailboxes
Yes
Limited (10 or 60 minutes based on Class of Service)
Programmable Operator Ext.
Yes
No (Oper. = 10) No (Oper. = 10) Yes
Administrable Extension Types
(Call Answer) Mailbox
Mailbox
Auto, Attendant Fax
Mailbox
Mailbox Auto, Attendant Fax Transfer-Only
Transfer-Only
Bulletin Board
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PMsg R1
PVM R3
PMVS R5
PM R3
Multiple Automated Attendants
Yes (4)
No
Yes (4)
Yes (3)
Day & Night AA Menu Structures
Yes
No
No
Yes
Day & Night Main Menu Prompts
Yes
Night=Day
Yes
Yes
Day & Night Main Menus Definition
Yes
Night=Day
Night=Day
Yes
Submenus
Yes
No
No
Yes
Automated Attendant Features
(99 per system)
(99 per system)
Automated Attendant Announcements
Yes (99 per system)
No
Yes (2 per AA)
Yes (99 per system)
Touch-Tone Gate
No
No
No
Yes
Fax Call Detection and Routing
Yes (each AA can have its own Fax Extension)
No
No
Yes (each AA can have its own Fax Extension)
Schedule Controller
Yes
No
No
Yes
Business Schedule
Yes
No
No
Yes
Temporary Opening/Closing
Yes
No
No
Yes
Programmable Dial 0/Timeout Action
Yes
No
Yes
Yes •
Transfer to Extension
Transfer to General Mailbox
•
Transfer to General Mailbox
•
Transfer to Operator
•
Transfer to Operator
•
Transfer to Mailbox
•
Disconnect
•
Disconnect
•
Transfer to Extension
•
•
Transfer to Extension
Transfer Using the System Directory (Dial by Name)
Yes
No
No
Yes
General Mailboxes
Yes (1 per AA)
No
No
Yes (1 per AA)
General Mailbox Owner
Yes (per AA)
N/A
N/A
Yes (per AA)
Avaya - Proprietary 5-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
Voice Mail Features
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PMsg R1
PVM R3
PMVS R5
PM R3
Listen to Messages
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Skip Ahead, Skip Back While Listening to a Message
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Increase/Decrease Message Playback Volume
No
No
Yes
No
Pause and Resume Message Playback
Yes
No
No
Yes
Forward a Message With Comment
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Reply to a Message by Voice Mail Yes
No
No
Yes
Return Call to an Internal Sender
Yes
No
No
Yes
Create a Message
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Address a Message Using the Directory (By Name)
Yes
N/A
No
Yes
Mark a Message as Private, Priority, or Return Receipt
Yes
No
No
No
Record a Personal Greeting
Yes (up to 6)
Yes
Yes
Yes (up to 3)
Use Different Greetings for Internal & External Calls
Yes
No
No
No
Record Mailbox Name
Yes
No
No
Yes
Change Mailbox Password
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Assign a Personal Operator
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Create Personal Group Lists
No Yes Up to 10 Personal Group Lists per subscriber with up to 50 mailboxes per list.
Yes Up to 10 Personal Group Lists per subscriber with up to 50 mailboxes per list
No Only the System Admin. can create lists
No
Yes System Admin. Only
(Used for Addressing Messages)
Can also use 10 System Group Lists created by the System Admin. Broadcast Message
No
No
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
Voice Mail Features
PMsg R1
PVM R3
PMVS R5
PM R3
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Program an Outcalling Schedule
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Max # of Outcalling Numbers
5
N/A
5
5
Program the Minimum Time Between Outcalling Attempts
Yes, 5-99 min.; N/A default = 15 min
Yes, 5-99 min.; Yes, 5-99 min.; default = 15 min default = 15 min
Program the Number of Outcalling Cycles
Yes, 1-9 cycles; N/A default = 3
Yes 1-9 cycles; default = 3
Yes, 1-9 cycles; default = 3
PMVS R5
PM R3
Change the Answer Mode of the Mailbox
Yes
Outcalling to Phone and/or Pager
Security Features
(Record Mode or Answer-Only Mode)
PMsg R1
PVM R3
Password Protection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Minimum Password Length
Administrable (0-15 digits)
Fixed, 4 digits
Fixed, 4 digits
Administrable (0-15 digits)
Maximum Password Length
Fixed, 15 digits
Fixed, 4 digits
Fixed, 4 digits
Fixed, 15 digits
Forced Initial Password Selection
Yes
No
No
Yes
Administrable Transfer Restrictions
Yes
No, Fixed
No, Fixed
Yes
Administrable Maximum Extension Length
Yes
No
No
Yes
Avaya - Proprietary 5-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Administration and Serviceability Features
PMsg R1
PVM R3
PMVS R5
PM R3
Remote Administration
Yes (via Touch- Yes (via Touch- Yes (via Touch- Yes (via TouchTone Interface) Tone Interface) Tone Interface) Tone Interface)
PC-based Administration via a Graphical User Interface
Yes (via LAN Interface)
No
No
No
Backup and Restore
Yes
No
Yes
No
Partial: To PC Card
Partial - to PC Card Full: to customersupplied PC via LAN interface Maintenance, Diagnostics, and Report Interface
Three levels of access: •
Sys. Admin.
•
Technician
•
TSO
No
Configuration Report Only (requested through TouchTone Interface)
Available only to Technical Services Organization (TSO)
Local - via serial port
Local - via serial port
Remote - via modem dialup
Remote - via modem dialup
Configuration Report
Yes
No
Yes
Yes*
Extension Report
Yes
No
No
No
Diagnostic Reports
Yes (Technician No and/or TSO)
No
Yes (TSO only)
Visual Messaging Features www.messenger
PMsg R1 Yes, via LAN connection
PVM R3 No
PMVS R5 No
PM R3 No
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-7
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
Security Tips Avaya’s Voice Messaging Systems provide Automated Attendant, Call Answer and Voice Mail Services. Automated Attendant Service answers incoming calls and routes them to the appropriate department, person, or mailbox. Call Answer Service provides call coverage to voice mailboxes. Voice Mail Service enables subscribers to retrieve their messages, record their Personal Greeting(s) and provides a variety of other voice messaging features. Unauthorized persons try to locate unused or unprotected mailboxes and use them as drop-off points for their own messages, especially if inbound calls are free (for example, 800 inbound service). Use the tips below to maximize the security of your customer’s system. • Regularly check mailbox list against an authorized list • Avoid obvious passwords (1234) • Have subscribers and the System Administrator change passwords often • Delete all unused mailboxes • Set a Minimum Password Length of at least six digits (PARTNER MAIL R3 & PARTNER Messaging R1) • Use the Security Violations Notification feature (PARTNER MAIL R3 only) • Set Outgoing Call Restrictions appropriately for voice messaging ports • Assign Allowed and Disallowed Phone Number Lists, as needed to allow or restrict Outcalling destinations (PARTNER MAIL, PARTNER Mail VS & PARTNER Messaging only) Assign Outcalling only to mailboxes of responsible subscribers who have a legitimate business need for the feature • Change default passwords for unlocked mailboxes, and then notify the mailbox owner of the new password (PARTNER MAIL R3 only) • Manually check telephone bills to detect unusual calling patterns
Avaya - Proprietary 5-8
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Voice Messaging Product:
PARTNER Messaging R1
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-9
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER Messaging R1 Voice Messaging Options PARTNER Messaging R1
Compatibility PARTNER II 3.1 or greater PARTNER Plus 3.1 or greater PARTNER ACS R 1.0 or greater
Features/Capacities 2 port (200 mailboxes) 4 port (200 mailboxes) 6 port (200 mailboxes)
PARTNER ACS
Languages Supported: U.S. English Canadian French Latin American Spanish Mailbox Storage: 5 - 180 minutes
LAN PORT RS232
System Storage: 2 port = 100 hours 4 port = 100 hours 6 port = 100 hours
PARTNER Messaging R1
C A R D
C A R D
S L O T
S L O T
1
2
ckpapmr KLC 041701
Avaya - Proprietary 5-10
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER Messaging R1 Support Material PARTNER Messaging R1 Documentation Many of these documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235), or can be viewed online at http://support.avaya.com. Document Title
Avaya PFC Order No.
Comcode/SAP Code
PARTNER Messaging Installation, Programming, and Troubleshooting (included on PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 Customer Documents CDROM)
----------
------------
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 User’s Guide (Issue 1)
518-100-701
700019045
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 User Guide – Latin Spanish (Issue 1)
518-100-701SPL
------------
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 System Manager’s Quick Reference Guide (Issue 1) (Ships with product)
518-100-501
-------------
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 Customer Documents (Issue 1) (Ships with product)
518-100-901
700190060
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 Customer Documents CDROM (Issue 1)
518-100-800
-------------
www.messenger for PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0
518-100-700
700179534
-------------
700169378
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 PC Card Installation Instructions (CIB 3236) (Issue 1) (included on PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 Customer Documents CD-ROM)
700169386
Setting Restrictions for PARTNER Messaging Port Extensions (CIB 3237) (Issue 1) (Ships with product)
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-11
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products Document Title
BTM428J
Avaya PFC Order No.
Comcode/SAP Code
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 System Administration (included on PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 Customer Documents CD-ROM)
-------------
-------------
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 Getting Started Guide (included on PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 Customer Documents CD-ROM)
-------------
-------------
PARTNER Messaging R1 Training (Courses Available July 2001) To register for one of the courses below, call the Avaya Registration Center at 1-800255-8988. Course
Number
PARTNER Messaging R1.0 Overview
BSH041W2
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 Training Guide
BTT049S2
PARTNER Messaging Release 1.0 System Administration Training
BTC256M2
PARTNER Access Guide (Job Aid)
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 5-12
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER Messaging R1 Equipment Ordering Codes PARTNER Messaging R1 Item
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
PARTNER Messaging R1 Module
7068-100
GA
108694316
2-Port License/Backup Card
7068-102
GA
700015050
4-Port License/Backup Card
7068-104
GA
700015068
6-port License/Backup Card
7068-106
GA
700015076
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-13
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER Messaging R1 and Communications System Programming Procedures Checklist ¥
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
1
CS
CS
Hunt Group Extensions (#505)
Assign the two, four or six extensions PARTNER Messaging module ports to Hunt Group 7, (the VMS Hunt Group).
CS
Transfer Return Extension (#306)
Unanswered calls that are transferred to an extension that does not have Voice Mail coverage will return to this extension. This extension must not be a PARTNER Messaging extension. Assign a different extension, e.g., the receptionist extension (10) as the Transfer Return Extension.
1
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary 5-14 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
¥
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
2
CS
CS
Outcalling Call Restriction (#401)
Allowed Lists Assignments (#408) Disallowed List Assignments (#407)
Considerations when using the PARTNER Messaging Outcalling feature: If the PARTNER Messaging Outcalling feature will be used, set the appropriate Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) option and make Allowed List Assignments (#408) and/or Disallowed Phone List Assignments (#405), as needed, to the PARTNER Messaging system port extension(s) used for Outcalling. They are: Port Card Ports Used for Outcalling 2-port Port 2 4-port Port 4 6-port Ports 5 and 6 The communications system’s extensions associated with the ports used for Outcalling must be programmed to permit dialing of required Outcalling phone numbers. Extensions of ports not used for Outcalling should be set to "Inside Only," unless calling to external numbers is required for www.messenger for PARTNER Messaging (as described below).
2
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001 5-15
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
¥
BTM428J
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
3
CS
Outcalling Call Restriction (#401)
Considerations when using www.messenger for PARTNER Messaging:
Allowed Lists Assignments (#408)
When a subscriber viewing a www.messenger for PARTNER Messaging display chooses to play a message, the PARTNER Messaging system will attempt to place a call to the phone number entered by the subscriber on the www.messenger login screen. If subscribers will be permitted to enter external phone numbers (i.e., telephone numbers that are not PARTNER® extensions), set the appropriate Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) option and make Allowed List Assignments (#408) and/or Disallowed Phone List Assignments (#405) as needed, to all PARTNER Messaging system port extensions in order to permit calls to be placed by the PARTNER Messaging system to those numbers.
Disallowed List Assignments (#407) (continued)
Considerations when using PARTNER Messaging Automated Attendant Centrex Transfer: If Centrex Transfer will be used, set the appropriate Outgoing Call Restriction (#401) option and make Allowed List Assignments (#408) and/or Disallowed Phone List Assignments (#405) as needed, to all PARTNER Messaging system port extensions in order to permit calls to be placed by the PARTNER Messaging system to those Centrex numbers. NOTE: If Outcalling and Centrex Transfer will not be used, and the www.messenger feature will not be calling external phone numbers, the Call Restriction for all PARTNER Messaging port extensions should be set to "Inside Only."
3
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary 5-16 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
¥
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
4
CS
PM System Administration Prompt Language
This determines the language in which the System Administration prompts will be played to the System Administrator for the PARTNER Messaging System. The factory setting is the System/Primary Language. Change the System Administration Prompt Language if a different language is needed.
PM System Language Mode This determines the operational mode of the and Language(s) PARTNER Messaging System (Monolingual or Bilingual) and sets the System Language (Monolingual Mode) or the Primary and Secondary languages (Bilingual Mode). The factory setting for the operational mode is Monolingual Mode with U.S. English as the System Language. Change the settings, if needed. PM Call Answer Service Operator Extension
This determines where the PARTNER Messaging system will transfer a call when the caller: •
presses 0 or does not make a selection from an Automated Attendant Main Menu or submenu (and the Dial 0 / Timeout Action has been set to ‘Transfer to the Call Answer Operator’).
•
presses 0 before, during, or after leaving a message in a subscriber’s voice mailbox (if the subscriber has not chosen a Personal Operator).
The factory setting is extension 10. Change the setting, if desired.
4
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001 5-17
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
¥
BTM428J
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
5
CS
PM General Mailbox Owner(s) Extension(s)
This determines which extension’s message light will be lit when there are new messages in a General Mailbox. Choose a General Mailbox Owner for each General Mailbox that will be used. The same owner can be assigned for each General Mailbox. The factory setting for the General Mailbox Owner is extension 10. Change the setting, if needed.
PM Maximum Extension Length
Determines the maximum number of digits the caller will be allowed to dial to transfer to an extension, a voice mailbox or to an Automated Attendant. The factory setting is 2 digits. Change the setting, if needed.
5
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary 5-18 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
¥
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
6
CS
PM Extensions •
Mailbox Extensions
•
Transfer-Only Extensions
•
Automated Attendant Extensions
•
Each extension known to the messaging system must be assigned a ‘type’ (i.e., Mailbox, TransferOnly, Automated Attendant, or Fax). You can also assign the following attributes to the extension based its extension type. •
Mailbox Extensions − Phone Status
Fax Extensions
− Directory Name − Recorded Name − Message Length Mailbox Size / Mailbox Size − Outcalling Privilege − Mailbox Language − Record-A-Call Message Length •
Transfer-Only Extensions − Directory Name − Recorded Name
•
Automated Attendant Extensions − Directory Name − Recorded Name
•
Fax Extensions − Directory Name − Recorded Name
6
PM Automated Attendant Day and Night Main Menus
Create the menu definition, define the Dial 0/Timeout action, and record the menu prompt for each Main Menu needed.
PM Automated Attendant Submenus
Create the submenu definition and record the submenu prompt for each submenu needed.
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001 5-19
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
¥
BTM428J
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
7
CS
PM Automated Attendant Announcements
Record the announcement prompt for each announcement needed.
PM Automated Attendant Schedule Controller
Specify what controls the Automated Attendant’s Schedule. Choose one of the following for each Automated Attendant used: •
Follow the Switch Mode
•
Follow the Weekly Business Schedule
•
Follow Both Follow the Switch Mode and the Weekly Business Schedule
The factory setting is “Follow the Switch Mode.” PM Automated Attendant Weekly Business Schedule
If “Follow the Weekly Business Schedule” or “Follow Both the Switch Mode and the Weekly Business Schedule” were chosen in the previous step, you must program a Weekly Business Schedule for the Automated Attendant.
PM Automated Attendant Line Assignments
For each line that will answered by an Automated Attendant, designate which Automated Attendant will handle the line.
PM Fax Extension
Designate the extension number of the Fax that will handle Fax calls transferred by the Automated Attendant.
PM Transfer Restrictions
The factory setting for this feature is “Transfer Restrictions On.” For system security reasons, it is strongly recommended that you do not change this setting.
7
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary 5-20 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
¥
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
8
CS
PM Line Ownership
This feature should be used only for PARTNER Messaging systems installed on PARTNER communications systems where the Line Coverage Extension feature (#208) is not available and where Group Call Distribution #206 Option 3 is used to provide coverage for a line. If Group Call Distribution #206 Option 3 is used to provide coverage for a line, you must assign Line Ownership for that line so that the PARTNER Messaging system will provide the appropriate handling for the call.
PM Minimum Password Length
This designates the minimum number of digits that a Mailbox or System Administration password can contain. The factory setting is six digits. A setting of at least six digits is recommended for system security reasons.
8
PM System Group Lists
System Group Lists can be used by subscribers to address a message to pre-specified groups of mailboxes, without having to enter each mailbox extension individually. You can create up to ten System Group Lists (50 – 59) with up to 50 extensions per list.
CS
Group Call Distribution (#206 Option 1)
Specify the outside lines that are to be answered by Automated Attendants.
Used for assigning PARTNER Messaging Automated Attendant Service to lines.
Assign these lines to Hunt Group 7. Set Option 1 = Assigned
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001 5-21
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
¥
BTM428J
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
9
CS
CS
Group Call Distribution (#206 Option 3)
This should be used for PARTNER Systems where the Line Coverage Extension feature (#208) is not available.
Used for assigning PARTNER Messaging Call Answer Service to lines.
Specify the outside lines that are to be answered by PARTNER Messaging Call Answer Service. Assign these lines to Hunt Group 7. Set Option 3 = VMS Cover
CS
Line Coverage Extension (#208)
This is used to assign PARTNER Messaging system coverage for an incoming line. It specifies which extension’s coverage pertains to the incoming line and is used in conjunction with the Automatic VMS Cover and/or the VMS Cover button features.
CS
VMS Hunt Delay (#506)
This is administered on a system-wide basis for PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier systems, PARTNER II systems, and PARTNER Plus systems. It is administered on a per line basis for PARTNER ACS R3 and later systems. Specify either Immediate Call Handling or Delayed Call Handling. •
Immediate – calls first go to the Automated Attendant, then to the operator.
•
Delayed - calls first go to operator, then to the Automated Attendant. Set the Number of Rings for each: • For Immediate – Set to 0 for each line. If Caller ID is used on the line, set to 2. • For Delayed – Set to 3, 4, 5, or 6, depending on desired delay.
9
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary 5-22 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
¥
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
10
CS
CS
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)
This determines when the PARTNER system routes calls to the PARTNER Messaging Automated Attendant. It is administered on a system-wide basis for PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier systems, PARTNER II systems, and PARTNER Plus systems. It is administered on a per line basis for PARTNER ACS R3 and later systems. Choose the VMS Hunt Schedule. 1. Always 2. Day Only 3. Night Only
CS
Automatic VMS Cover (#310)
Assign Automatic VMS Coverage to extensions that require it.
CS
VMS Cover Rings
This procedure is used to set the number of rings before a call goes to Voice Mail coverage.
Use: •
•
10
#117 (for PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier, PARTNER Plus and PARTNER II)
It is administered on a system-wide basis for PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier systems, PARTNER II systems, and PARTNER Plus systems. It is administered on a per extension basis for PARTNER ACS R3 and later systems.
#321 (for PARTNER R3 and later)
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001 5-23
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
¥
BTM428J
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
11
CS
CS
Night Service Button (#503) Needed only if the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to ‘Always’ or ‘Night Only’
CS
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304)
This procedure is used to program a Night Service button on the receptionist’s extension. For PARTNER Messaging Automated Attendants whose Schedule Controllers are programmed to ‘Follow the Switch’ schedule or ‘Follow Both the Switch and the Weekly Business Schedule,’ this button is used to toggle between Day and Night Service operation. Administer Automatic Extension Privacy for the two, four or six PARTNER Messaging extensions if all Automated Attendants will be configured for Immediate Call Handling Mode and the PARTNER ACS Call Screening feature will not be used. Automatic Extension Privacy should not be assigned if an Automated Attendant is configured for Delayed Call Handling mode or if the PARTNER ACS Call Screening feature will be used.
CS
11
VMS Cover Button (Feature 15)
This button gives subscribers the ability to turn Voice Mail coverage on and off (whether or not they have been assigned Automatic VMS Coverage). This feature can only be assigned to a button that has lights.
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary 5-24 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
¥
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
12
CS
CS
Do Not Disturb Button (Feature 01)
This feature is used in conjunction with Automatic VMS Coverage and/or with the VMS Cover button. It must be programmed on a button with lights. When active, the Do Not Disturb feature send calls immediately to the PARTNER Messaging system for coverage, i.e., the extension does not first ring (the programmed number of VMS Cover Rings) before being sent to Voice Mail coverage. This feature applies to Intercom calls, transferred calls, and calls on incoming lines for which Line Coverage (#208) is assigned. NOTE: Do Not Disturb feature does not apply to #206 Option 3 calls; they are sent to PARTNER Messaging after to four rings.
CS
Voice Mailbox Transfer Button (Feature 14)
This button enables any PARTNER system user to transfer calls directly to a subscriber’s mailbox, without first ringing the subscriber’s extension.
CS
Voice Mail Auto Dial Button (Intercom 777)
Program an Auto Dial button on subscribers’ phones in order to provide one-touch access to PARTNER Messaging system’s Voice Mail Service.
CS
Record-a-Call Button (Feature 24)
The Record-a-Call feature enables a subscriber to record a conversation and store it in a PARTNER Messaging mailbox. Record-a-Call is available for systems comprised of: •
a PARTNER ACS R3 or later communications system, and…
•
a 4-port or 6-port PARTNER Messaging system. (The feature is not available with 2-port systems.)
The Record-a-Call feature must be programmed on a button with lights.
12
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001 5-25
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
¥
BTM428J
PM/
Administration Task
or
Explanation
13
CS
CS
Call Screening (Feature 25)
This feature enables a subscriber to listen to a caller leaving a message in his/her PARTNER Messaging voice mailbox. The feature is available only with PARTNER ACS Release 3 or later systems. The Call Screening feature must be programmed on a button with lights.
13
PM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Messaging programming procedure. CS means that the procedure is a PARTNER communications system programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary 5-26 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Voice Messaging Product:
PARTNER Voice Messaging R3
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-27
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 Voice Messaging Options PARTNER Voice Messaging R3
PVM R3 Small
PVM R3 Large
Compatibility PARTNER ACS PARTNER Endeavor Features/Capacities 2 port (4 mailboxes; PVM R3 Small only) 2 port (12 mailboxes; PVM R3 Large only) Languages Supported: U.S. English
cdpapcmc KLC 041101
Mailbox Storage: PVM Large is a two-port system providing up to 12 mailboxes; the default configuration is 8 mailboxes. Each mailbox can have a maximum of 30 messages in it. The System Administrator can configure PVM R3 Large as follows: Number of Mailboxes
4 6 8 10 12
Approx. Message Storage per mailbox
30.00 minutes 21.25 minutes 16.25 minutes 12.50 minutes 10.00 minutes
PVM R3 Small is a two-port system providing up to 4 mailboxes; the default configuration is 4 mailboxes. Each mailbox can have a maximum of 30 messages in it. The System Administrator can configure PVM R3 Small as follows: Number of Mailboxes
2 4
Approx. Message Storage per mailbox
25.00 minutes 13.75 minutes
System Storage: PVM Small - approx. 50 minutes; PVM Large - approx. 120 minutes Avaya - Proprietary 5-28
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 Support Material PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 Documentation Many of these documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235), or can be viewed online at http://support.avaya.com. Title
Avaya PFC Order No.
Comcode/SAP Code
PARTNER Voice Messaging System Release 3 Installation and Programming, Issue 2
585-322-706
108520115
Using the PARTNER Voice Messaging System Release 3
585-322-705
108520131
PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 Training To register for one of the courses below, call the Avaya Registration Center at 1-904636-3261. Course
Number
PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 Sales Training
BSS071W2
Unified Communications Sales Training
BSS225M2
PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 (Technical Training)
BTH109W2
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-29
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 Equipment Ordering Codes PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 Item
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode/SAP Code
4 Mailboxes
6108-547
GA
108505298
12 Mailboxes
6108-548
GA
108505306
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary 5-30
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER Voice Messaging R3 and PARTNER ACS System Programming Procedures Checklist ¥
PVM/
Administration Task
or PACS
Explanation
14
PACS
Hunt Group Extensions (#505)
Assign the two PARTNER Voice Messaging extensions, 78 and 79, to Hunt Group 7 (the VMS Hunt Group).
PACS
Transfer Return Extension (#306)
Unanswered calls that are transferred to an extension that does not have Voice Mail coverage will return to this extension. This extension must not be a PARTNER Voice Messaging extension. Assign a different extension, e.g., the receptionist extension (10) as the Transfer Return Extension.
PVM
System Configuration
The factory settings are as follows: PVM R3L: 8 mailboxes PVM R3S: 4 mailboxes
PVM
Assign Mailboxes
If you are using mailbox assignments that are different than the factory-set assignments, you must administer this item.
PVM
Assign the Automated Attendant Selector Codes
Assign the Automated Attendant Selector Codes, 1 to 9, as appropriate.
PVM
Record the Automated Attendant Menu Prompt
Record the menu prompt for the Automated Attendant.
14
PVM in this column means that the procedure is a PARTNER Voice Messaging programming procedure. PACS means that the procedure is a PARTNER ACS programming procedure. Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-31
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
¥
BTM428J
PVM/
Administration Task
or PACS
Explanation
14
PVM
Change the System Administrator’s Password
For security reason, change the System Administrator’s Password from its factory-set value.
PACS
Group Call Distribution (#206 Option 1)
Specify the outside lines that are to be answered by the Automated Attendant.
Used for assigning PARTNER Voice Messaging Automated Attendant Service to lines.
Assign these lines to Hunt Group 7.
Line Coverage Extension (#208)
This is used to assign PARTNER Voice Messaging system coverage for an incoming line. It specifies which extension’s coverage pertains to the incoming line and is used in conjunction with the Automatic VMS Cover and/or the VMS Cover button features.
PACS
Set Option 1 = Assigned
Avaya - Proprietary 5-32
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
¥
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PVM/
Administration Task
or PACS
Explanation
14
PACS
VMS Hunt Delay (#506)
This is administered on a systemwide basis for PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier systems. It is administered on a per line basis for PARTNER ACS R3 and later systems. Specify either Immediate Call Handling or Delayed Call Handling. •
•
Immediate – calls first go to the Automated Attendant, then to the operator. Delayed - calls first go to operator, then to the Automated Attendant.
Set the Number of Rings for each: • For Immediate – Set to 0 for each line. If Caller ID is used on the line, set to 2. • For Delayed – Set to 3, 4, 5, or 6, depending on desired delay. PACS
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)
This determines when the PARTNER system routes calls to the PARTNER Voice Messaging Automated Attendant. It is administered on a system-wide basis for PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier systems. It is administered on a per line basis for PARTNER ACS R3 and later systems. Choose the VMS Hunt Schedule. 1. Always 2. Day Only 3. Night Only
PACS
Automatic VMS Cover (#310)
Assign Automatic VMS Coverage to extensions that require it.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-33
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
¥
BTM428J
PVM/
Administration Task
or PACS
Explanation
14
PACS
VMS Cover Rings
This procedure is used to set the number of rings before a call goes to Voice Mail coverage.
Use:
PACS
•
#117 (for PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier)
•
#321 (for PARTNER R3 and later)
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304)
It is administered on a system-wide basis for PARTNER ACS R2 and earlier systems. It is administered on a per extension basis for PARTNER ACS R3 and later systems. Administer Automatic Extension Privacy for the two PARTNER Voice Messaging extensions, 78 and 79, if the Automated Attendant will be configured for Immediate Call Handling Mode and the PARTNER ACS Call Screening feature will not be used. Automatic Extension Privacy should not be assigned if the Automated Attendant is configured for Delayed Call Handling mode or if the PARTNER ACS Call Screening feature will be used.
PACS
VMS Cover Button (Feature 15)
This button gives subscribers the ability to turn Voice Mail coverage on and off (whether or not they have been assigned Automatic VMS Cover). This feature can only be assigned to a button that has lights.
Avaya - Proprietary 5-34
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
¥
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PVM/
Administration Task
or PACS
Explanation
14
PACS
Do Not Disturb Button (Feature 01)
This feature is used in conjunction with Automatic VMS Coverage and/or with the VMS Cover button. It must be programmed on a button with lights. When active, the Do Not Disturb feature send calls immediately to the PARTNER Voice Messaging system for coverage, i.e., the extension does not first ring (the programmed number of VMS Cover Rings) before being sent to VMS Coverage. This feature applies to Intercom calls, transferred calls, and calls on incoming lines for which Line Coverage (#208) is assigned. NOTE: Do Not Disturb feature does not apply to #206 Option 3 calls; they are sent to PARTNER Voice Messaging after to four rings.
PACS
Voice Mailbox Transfer Button (Feature 14)
This button enables any PARTNER system user to transfer calls directly to a subscriber’s mailbox, without first ringing the subscriber’s extension.
PACS
Voice Mail Auto Dial Button (Intercom 777)
Program an Auto Dial button on subscribers’ phones in order to provide them one-touch access to PARTNER Voice Messaging system’s Voice Mail Service.
PACS
Call Screening (Feature 25)
This feature enables a subscriber to listen to a caller leaving a message in his/her PARTNER Voice Messaging voice mailbox. The feature is available only with PARTNER ACS Release 3 or later systems. The Call Screening feature must be programmed on a button with lights. Avaya - Proprietary
Issue 6, May 2001
5-35
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 5-36
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Voice Messaging Product:
PARTNER Mail VS R5
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-37
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER Mail VS R5 Voice Messaging Options PARTNER MAIL VS R5
Compatibility PARTNER II 3.1 or greater PARTNER Plus 3.1 or greater PARTNER ACS 1.0 or greater
PARTNER
Features/Capacities 2 port/up to 48 mailboxes 4 port/up to 48 mailboxes Languages Supported: U.S. English Canadian French Latin American Spanish System Storage: 100 hours Maximum Storage per Mailbox: 180 minutes or 120 messages (range 5-180 Minutes)
BTM428J36.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary 5-38
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Identifying PARTNER Mail VS R5 Ports Extensions The following two graphics show which communications system extensions are assigned to PARTNER Mail VS R5 ports, depending on the location of the PARTNER MESSAGING VS module. Note that your system configuration may differ from the one shown here. PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II Systems
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-39
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER ACS Systems and Endeavor
zpacsext1.eps
Avaya - Proprietary 5-40
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER Mail VS R5 Support Material The following is a list of documents that were shipped with the system or components. Many of the documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235) or can be viewed online at http://support.avaya.com.
PARTNER Mail VS R5 Documentation Document Title
Avaya PFC Order No.
Comcode / SAP Code
PARTNER Mail VS R5 Installation & Programming Guide (1)
518-322-532
108355173
Using PARTNER Mail VS R5 (2 pks)
518-322-531
108355140
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-41
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER Mail VS R5 Equipment Ordering Codes PARTNER Mail VS R5 Item
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
2-port PMVS R5 with 48 mailboxes
6108-542
GA
108624867
4-port PMVS R5 with 48 mailboxes
6108-544
GA
108624875
PMVS R5 2-Port Backup Expansion Card
6108-545
GA
108344235
PMVS R5 4-Port Backup Expansion Card
6108-543
GA
108347386
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary 5-42
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER Mail VS R5 Programming Checklist Note: To access System Administration do the following. Voice Messaging Service →System Administrator Extension + # →System Administrator Password + # → 9 ✔ Procedure 1.
Assign VMS Ports Using Hunt Group Extensions
PARTNER Programming: #505 2.
Assign Transfer Return Extension PARTNER Programming: #306
3.
Assign Outgoing Call Restriction (create Allowed/Disallowed lists if Outcalling is permitted) PARTNER Programming: #401
4a. Choose the System Language (Form 1) Choices: Monolingual or Bilingual. Then choose the language(s) PMVS R5 Programming: Language 4b. Administer Prompt Language (Form 1) Choices: Any available language PMVS R5 Programming: Language 5. Administer Mailboxes (Form 2) PMVS R5 Programming: Mailboxes 6.
Administer Menu Definition and Dial 0/Timeout Action (Form 3) PMVS R5 Programming: Automated Attendant...Day Menu Record Announcement(s) (Form 3A & 3B) PMVS R5 Programming: Automated Attendant...Day Menu...Announcements Record Day Menu Prompt (Form 4 & 4A) PMVS R5 Programming: Automated Attendant...Day Menu
7.
Assign lines to Automated Attendant(s) (Form 3) PMVS R5 Programming: Automated Attendant
8.
Record Night Menu Prompt (Form 5 &5A) PMVS R5 Programming: Automated Attendant...Night Menu
9.
Assign Line Ownership (P+ R3.1, P II R3.0/3.1) (only if Step 15a will be performed) (Form 6) PMVS R5 Programming: Line Ownership...Assign Line Ownership
10. Assign VMS Hunt Delay PARTNER Programming: #506
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-43
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
✔ Procedure 11. Assign Auto Extension Privacy to PMVS R5 Extensions PARTNER Programming: #304 12. Assign VMS Hunt Schedule PARTNER Programming: #507 13. Program Night Service Button (if necessary) PARTNER Programming: #503 14. Create Allowed/Disallowed Lists (if Outcalling permitted, assign lists to PMVS extension ports) PARTNER Programming: #407/404 15a. Assign CO Line Coverage (Personal Line) (P+ R3.1, P II R3.0/3.1) PARTNER Programming: #206, Setting 3 15b. Assign CO Line Coverage (Personal Line) (P+/P II R4.0 and later, PARTNER ACS and PARTNER Endeavor) PARTNER Programming: #208 16. Assign Auto VMS Cover PARTNER Programming: #310 17. Program VMS Cover Rings (if necessary) PARTNER Programming: #321 (PACS R3.0 or later) or #117 (other releases) 18. Program VMS Cover Button (if necessary) Station Programming PARTNER Programming: F15 19. Program Do Not Disturb Button (if necessary) Station Programming PARTNER Programming: F01 20. Program Voice Mailbox Transfer Button (if necessary) Station Programming PARTNER Programming: F14 21. Program Auto Dial Button to PMVS R5 Hunt Group (if necessary) Station Programming PARTNER Programming: Intercom 777 22. Assign Outside Lines to be Answered by PMVS R5 Hunt Group PARTNER Programming: #206, Setting 1 23. Program Record-a-Call (optional) (PMVS R5 must be 4-port system, PACS must be R3 or later) PARTNER Station Programming: F24 PMVS R5 Programming: Mailboxes (RAC permission) 24. Program Call Screening (optional) (PACS R3 or later) Station Programming PARTNER Programming: F25 25. Backup PMVS R5 System Programming PMVS R5 Programming: Reports & Backup/Restore Avaya - Proprietary 5-44
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Voice Messaging Product:
PARTNER MAIL R3
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-45
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER MAIL R3 Voice Messaging Options PARTNER MAIL R3
Compatibility PARTNER II 3.0 or greater PARTNER Plus 3.1 or greater PARTNER ACS PARTNER Endeavor Features/Capacities 2-port (20 mailboxes) 4-port (40 mailboxes) 6-port (60 mailboxes)
BTM428J35.cdr
Languages Supported: U.S. English Canadian French Latin American Spanish Mailbox Storage: 10 or 60 minutes (depending on Class of Service) System Storage: 2-port = 21 hours 4-port = 21 hours 6-port = 21 hours
Avaya - Proprietary 5-46
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER MAIL R3
Ports 1 & 2 Ports 3 & 4 Ports 5 & 6
Status Indicator Lights COM 1 Port (Remote Maintenance Device Connector) COM 2 Port (Not Used) Power Switch AC Power
Vents Right Side Panel Serial Number Label BTM428J15.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-47
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER MAIL R3 Dip Switch Settings The graphic below illustrates the PARTNER MAIL R3 DSP card Dip Switch Settings.
Set of 8 Dip Switches
on off
Card 1: Ports 1 and 2 1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
on off
Card 2: Ports 3 and 4 1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
on off
Card 3: Ports 5 and 6 1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Set of 4 Dip Switches for all cards Outside the U.S. and Canada when Forward Disconnect signal is provided
on off
U.S. and Canada
1
2
3
4
Outside the U.S. and Canada when a Busy tone signal is supplied when the far end disconnects
on off 1
2
3
4
on off 1
2
3
4 BTM428J37.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary 5-48
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER MAIL R3 Touch-Tone Gate Settings Below are the settings for PARTNER MAIL R3 Touch-Tone Gate, Greeting and Fax extension.
Monolingual Mode Fax Ext. Administered
Fax Ext. Not Administered
Touch-Tone Gate On /
1.
Callers hear Greeting
1.
Callers hear Greeting
Greeting On
2.
T-T callers can press 1
2.
T-T callers can press 1
3.
Rotary callers time-out after Greeting
3.
Rotary callers time-out after Greeting
4.
Can detect and route fax calls
Touch-Tone Gate Off /
1.
Callers hear Main Menu
1.
Callers hear Main Menu
Greeting Off
2.
Can detect and route fax calls
2.
Rotary callers time-out after Main Menu
Bilingual Mode Fax Ext. Administered
Fax Ext. Not Administered
Touch-Tone Gate On /
1.
Callers hear Greeting
1.
Callers hear Greeting
Greeting On
2.
T-T callers press 1 to continue in the primary language or *1 to change to the secondary language
2.
T-T callers press 1 to continue in the primary language or *1 to change to the secondary language
3.
Rotary callers time-out after Greeting
3.
Rotary callers time-out after Greeting
4.
Can detect and route fax calls
Touch-Tone Gate Off /
1.
Callers hear Main Menu
1.
Callers hear Main Menu
Greeting Off
2.
T-T callers can press *1
2.
3.
Can detect and route fax calls
T-T callers can press 1 to change to the secondary language
Recommended Settings:
Touch-Tone Gate off, unless there will be many rotary callers and/or The Main Menu is very long. Avaya - Proprietary
Issue 6, May 2001
5-49
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER MAIL R3 Support Material PARTNER MAIL R3 Documentation Many of these documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235), or can be viewed online at http://support.avaya.com. Document Title PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Release 3 Planning, Installation, and Use
Avaya PFC Order No.
Comcode/SAP Code
585-322-516
----------
PARTNER MAIL R3 Training To register for the course below, call the Avaya Registration Center at 1-904-636-3261.
Course PARTNER MAIL R3 End User Training
Number BTC545V
Avaya - Proprietary 5-50
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
PARTNER MAIL R3 Equipment Ordering Codes PARTNER MAIL R3 Item
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
2-port
7108-302
GA
408071793
4-port
7108-304
GA
408071801
6-port
7108-306
GA
408071819
2-port Expansion Card
7108-300
GA
407470772
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-51
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
PARTNER MAIL R3 Programming Checklist Note: To access System Administration do the following. Voice Mail Service → System Administrator Extension + # → System Administrator Password + # → 9 → System Administration password + # ✓ Procedure 1. Assign VMS Ports Using Hunt Group Extensions PARTNER Programming: #505 2. Assign Line Access Mode (P II, P ACS and P Endeavor In Hybrid Mode only) PARTNER Programming: #313 3. Assign Transfer Return Extension PARTNER Programming: #306 4. Assign Outgoing Call Restriction (create Allowed/Disallowed lists if Outcalling is permitted) PARTNER Programming: #401 5. Remove Lines from RMD Port PARTNER Programming: #301 6. Assign Auto Extension Privacy for RMD PARTNER Programming: #304 7. Choose the System Language (Form A) Choices: Monolingual or Bilingual. Then choose the language(s) PM R3 Programming: System Parameters → System Language 8. Choose Maximum Digit Length (Form A) Choices: 2, 3 or 4 digits PM R3 Programming: System Parameters → Maximum Digit Length 9. Choose Single or Multiple Automated Attendant (Form A) PM R3 Programming: System Parameters → Single or Multiple Automated Attendant 10. Assign Lines to Automated Attendant 2 and Automated Attendant 3 (if multiple Automated Attendants are administered) (Form A) PM R3 Programming: Automated Attendant → Line Assignments 11. Create Mailboxes (Form B) PM R3 Programming: Mailboxes → Create Mailboxes 12. Assign Group Mailbox Owner (Form B) PM R3 Programming: Mailboxes → Assign a Group Mailbox Owner 13. Administer the Fax Extension (Form C) PM R3 Programming: System Parameters → Fax Extension and Fax Message Receiver → Fax Extension 14. Administer the Fax Message Receiver (Form C) PM R3 Programming: System Parameters → Fax Extension and Fax Message Receiver → Fax Message Receiver 15. Administer the Call Answer Service Operator (Form C) PM R3 Programming: System Parameters → Call Answer Service Operator 16. Administer General Mailbox Owner (Form C) PM R3 Programming: System Parameters → General Mailbox Owner 17. Assign System Administrator Mailbox (Form C) PM R3 Programming: System Parameters → System Administrator Mailbox 18. Update System Date and Time (Form D) PM R3 Programming: Schedule → Update System Date and Time 19. Administer the Schedule Controller (Form D) Choices: Follow PARTNER Schedule or Follow PARTNER MAIL R3 Business Schedule PM R3 Programming: Schedule → Automated Attendant Schedule → Schedule Controller Avaya - Proprietary 5-52 Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
✓
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Procedure 20. Administer Weekly Business Schedule (If Schedule Controller is set to Follow PARTNER MAIL R3 Business Schedule) (Form D) Choices: Open, Closed, Temporarily closed. Then enter the times of day. PM R3 Programming: Schedule → Automated Attendant Schedule → Weekly Business Schedule and Temporary Closing 21. Administer the Touch Tone Gate (Form E) Choices: On or Off PM R3 Programming: Automated Attendant → Touch Tone Gate 22. Administer the Automated Attendant Touch-Tone Gate Greeting (if touch-tone gate is on) (Form E) Choices: Day or Night Greeting PM R3 Programming: System Greetings → Automated Attendant Touch Tone Gate Greetings 23. Create Voice Mail Greeting (Form F) PM R3 Programming: System Greetings → Voice Mail Greeting 24. Create Announcements (Form K) PM R3 Programming: Automated Attendant → Announcements 25. Create Submenus (Form J) PM R3 Programming: Automated Attendant → Submenus 26. Create Day Menu (Form H) PM R3 Programming: Automated Attendant → Day Menu 27. Create Night Menu (Form H) PM R3 Programming: Automated Attendant → Night Menu 28. Create Group Lists (Form L) PM R3 Programming: Group Lists → Create a Group List 29. Assign Line Ownership (P+ R3.1, P II R3.0/3.1) (only if Step 39a will be performed) (Form M) PM R3 Programming: Line Ownership → Assign Line Ownership 30. Choose Minimum Password Length (Form N) PM R3 Programming: System Security → Minimum Password Length 31. Choose Security Violation Notification (Form N) PM R3 Programming: System Security → Security Violation Notification 32. Assign VMS Hunt Delay PARTNER Programming: #506 33a. Assign Fax Machine Extensions PARTNER Programming: #601 33b. Assign Fax Hunt Group PARTNER Programming: #505 34. Assign Line Ringing for fax machines/extensions in Hunt Groups PARTNER Programming: Central Tel Program 35. Assign Auto Extension Privacy to PM R3 Extensions (if VMS Hunt Delay is “Immediate” except if Call Screening will be used) PARTNER Programming: #304 36. Assign VMS Hunt Schedule PARTNER Programming: #507 37. Program Night Service Button (if necessary) PARTNER Programming: #503 38. Create Allowed/Disallowed Lists (if Outcalling is permitted) PARTNER Programming: #407/404
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-53
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
✓
BTM428J
Procedure 39a. Assign CO Line Coverage (Personal Line) (P+ R3.1, P II R3.0/3.1) PARTNER Programming: #206, Setting 3 39a. Assign CO Line Coverage (Personal Line) (P+/P II R4.0 and later, P ACS and P Endeavor) PARTNER Programming: #208 40. Assign Auto VMS Cover PARTNER Programming: #310 41. Program VMS Cover Rings (if necessary) PARTNER Programming: #117 42. Program VMS Cover Button (if necessary) PARTNER Programming: F15 43. Program Do Not Disturb Button (if necessary) PARTNER Programming: F01 44. Program Voice Mailbox Transfer Button (if necessary) PARTNER Programming: F14 45. Program Auto Dial Button to PM R3 Hunt Group (if necessary) PARTNER Programming: Intercom 777 46. Assign Outside Lines to be Answered by PM R3 Hunt Group PARTNER Programming: #206, Setting 1
Avaya - Proprietary 5-54
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Octel 100 Voice Messaging System
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-55
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
Octel 100 Voice Messaging Options Compatibility PARTNER II 3.0 or greater PARTNER Plus 3.1 or greater PARTNER ACS PARTNER Endeavor Features/Capacities 4-port 8-port 12-port 16-port Languages Supported: U.S. English Canadian French Latin American Spanish Mailbox Storage: 100 minutes
Avaya - Proprietary 5-56
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Octel 100 FEATURE MATRIX GENERAL INFO: Minimum Voice Ports Maximum Voice Ports Hours of Storage Mailboxes Message Length Class of Service Forms Filler System Reports Tutor Service MAINT. / ADMIN: Remote Maint./Admin. Modem NETWORKING: Multiple Sites AMIS Networking OctelNet AUTOMATED ATT: # of Main Greetings # of Time of Day Messages Call Blocking Call Forwarding Call Screening Extension Directory Fax Tone Transfer Greeting-By-Port Holiday / Time of Day Programmable Messages Intercom Paging Intercom Redirect Multilingual Prompts Voice Name Dialer (Speech Rec) Name Prompt on Transfer MAILBOXES: Visual Mailbox Multi Media Mailboxes Mailbox Default Operators Personalized Prompts
4 16 60 Unlimited 100 min. 25 Yes Yes Yes Optional Yes Optional Optional Optional 11 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Optional V / F (Fax Optional) Yes Yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-57
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
LEAVING MESSAGES: Future Delivery Yes Message Confirmation Yes Messaging Sending Yes Multiple Message Capability Yes Sent Message Editing Yes Wake-Up Messages Yes MESSAGE MANAGEMENT: Auto Forward Yes Distribution Lists Yes Undelete a Message Yes2 Message Notification (Cascaded Yes Outcalling) Network Message Forwarding (Follow Yes Me) Online System Displays Yes Send Copy of Message (Message Yes Forwarding) Transfer or Reply to Sender Yes Voice Folders Yes V-Trees Yes SPECIALTY MAILBOXES: Guest Mailboxes Yes Receive-Only Mailboxes Yes Voice-Only Mailboxes Yes MAILBOX SECURITY: Forced Password Change Yes Mailbox Passwords Yes FAX SOLUTIONS: Fax AutoPrint Yes Fax Mail Optional Fax on Demand Optional Personal Default Fax Number Yes Voice Message Cover Sheets Yes PRICING * Prices starting at: $9,265* * Pricing subject to change 1 Additional greetings can be achieved using V-Trees and Greetings-by-Port. 2 While active on the same call.
Avaya - Proprietary 5-58
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Avaya Web Communications Server
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-59
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
Avaya Web Communications Server The Avaya Web Communications Server provides the following functionality: • • •
Voice mail and e-mail messages are accessible through the same PC mailbox; this feature requires the installation of the MERLIN Messaging Release 2 or greater, or PARTNER Messaging Release 1 or greater. Performs as an email server, providing 200 mailboxes and 100 hours of message storage. Provides a medium for high-speed Internet access, web site hosting, and ebusiness transactions.
Ordering Information The order number for the Web Communications Server is 585-323-220. It is delivered on CD-ROM, and includes the documents noted below. The CD also includes a software upgrade file and instructions for upgrading from Release 1.5 to 2.0. Visit the following web site for more information: http://www.avaya.com/solutions Documentation These documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800457-1235), or can be viewed online at http://support.avaya.com.
Document Title
Avaya PFC Order No.
Installation Guide
595-323-220Install
User’s Guide
585-323-220User’s
Avaya - Proprietary 5-60
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Training Course
Number
Web Communications Server
BSS069W2
Using Your Web Communications Server (WCS) to Harness the Power of the Internet
BTC852W2
Planning a Web Communications Server (WCS) BTP802W2 Installation, and Helping the Customer Get Started Installing and Troubleshooting the Web Communications Server
BTT846W2
Sales Guide A copy of this job aid entitled “Avaya Web Communications Server (Release 1.5) How to Sell” is included in this sub-section.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-61
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
AVAYA WEB COMMUNICATIONS SERVER (Release 1.5) How To Sell Needs Businesses today, of all sizes, should be using the Internet to improve many aspects of their operations. From providing their employees with e-mail capability and integrating e-mail messages with voice mail messages, to better and more effective Sales and Marketing through controlled Web Sites and by selling products via electronic catalogs online, traditional businesses can make the transformation to e-business. The Avaya Web Communications Server is the enabling factor.
Clues to look for • • • • •
Businesses without e-mail Businesses whose e-mail addresses are at the ISP domain (e.g.
[email protected]) Businesses with dial-up access to the internet Businesses without a Web Site Businesses with a static, brochure-like Web Sites
How to position The Avaya Web Communications Server is optimally designed for companies with up to 100 e-mail users who require internet access and can utilize the easily customizable web sites to more efficiently communicate with customers, prospects, vendors, partners and employees.
Capabilities • • • •
IMAP4 and SMTP e-mail server to provide e-mail for all employees HTTP server to host Internet, Intranet, Extranet and Secure Electronic Catalog web sites Domain and DHCP server requires a single, static IP address to serve the entire office With Internet access When integrated with Partner Messaging Release 1, voice mails can be viewed from the IMAP4 e-mail client and played through the PC’s speakers
Avaya - Proprietary 5-62
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Needs Businesses today of all sizes must have e-mail to communicate. Additionally, having their own business name in their e-mail address, rather than that of an ISP helps to market and better position their business. E-mail requires Internet access. Also, access to the Internet can help a company with all kinds of information
Clues to look for • • • •
No e-mail None or limited internet access E-mail addresses with the ISP’s domain name Dial-up e-mail accounts
How to position The Avaya Web Communications Server provides a business with up to 200 e-mail and Internet access accounts via any broadband connection to any ISP. Because the e-mail server and Internet gateway resides with the AVAYA WEB COMMUNICATIONS SERVER rather than at the ISP, the customer does not incur charges for e-mail or individual Internet access accounts. Additionally, any user can communicate internally with any other user via company e-mail.
Capabilities • • • •
IMAP4 e-mail server, provides up to 200 e-mail accounts with the end-user’s own domain name Internet gateway provides all users with internet access E-mail messages reside on the server and can be extracted to any media for archiving Employees can now communicate internally via company e-mail
Questions to ask • • • • •
Do you have e-mail for all of your employees today? Does your e-mail address use your ISP’s domain name rather than your own? Do you pay for e-mail accounts? Do you provide Internet access for all of your employees today? Do you pay for Internet access accounts?
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-63
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
Needs Businesses today can use the Internet to run their businesses more efficiently by utilizing customizable web sites to better communicate with customers, prospects, vendors, partners and employees. Frequently asked questions can be posted and easily updated, products and services can be marketed and sold via the Internet, partners can be communicated to privately and employees can learn about new products or offerings via their own intranet site.
Clues to look for • No web site; no electronic catalog • A static, brochure-like web site • Disparate employees requiring ongoing communication How to position The Avaya Web Communications Server can help businesses to maximize their use of the Internet to more efficiently operate their business.
Capabilities The Avaya Web Communications Server comes with intuitive, easy to use software that allows businesses to build their own web sites by essentially filling in the blanks in wizard-driven templates. • • • •
An easy to build, easy to edit internet site for the whole world to view An easy to build, easy to edit private intranet site to communicate with employees An easy to build, easy to edit private extranet site to communicate with partners, vendors and customers An easy to build, easy to edit secure electronic catalog site to sell products and accept secure payments, like credit cards.
Questions to ask • •
Do you use the web today to efficiently communicate with customers, partners, vendors and employees? Would you like to sell products, securely, over the web?
Avaya - Proprietary 5-64
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
Needs Businesses are constantly searching for cost-effective ways to provide their employees with tools to improve efficiency.
Clues to look for •
Progressive thinking Partner ACS 4 prospects
How to position The Avaya Web Communications Server, when integrated with Partner Messaging Release 1 and ACS provides companies with integrated e-mail and voice mail so that their employees can view and play their voice mails from their IMAP4 e-mail clients.
Capabilities • • •
Integrated e-mail and voice mail Listen to, store, forward or delete voice mails from your e-mail client View and listen to voicemails in any order
Questions to ask • • •
Would you like to be able to get voicemails and e-mails on the same screen? Do you have a need to store and archive voice mails? Do you have a need to retrieve e-mails and voice mails remotely?
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
5-65
®
PARTNER Access Guide Voice Messaging Products
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 5-66
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Capacities
PARTNER® ACS Release 4.0 Capacities
Maximum Lines
Maximum Extensions
31 Lines and 8 Extensions
15 Lines and 40 Extensions
Processor Module
Processor Module
Power Cord
Paging Jack SMDR Port
Paging Jack
206 Module 200 Module
SMDR Port
Processor Module
PAGE SMDR
206 Module 200 Module
Processor Module
VOL MUSIC ON HOLD
INTERCONNECT CABLE
Music-onHold Jack
VOL MUSIC ON HOLD
INTERCONNECT CABLE
Music-onHold Jack
PAGE SMDR
Power Cord
AGENT005.cdr
AGENT005.cdr
One 1600 DSL Module and Three 400 Modules
Four 308EC Modules
Additional Sample Configurations: 12 lines 34 e tensions 13 lines 2 e tensions 11 lines 32 e tensions BTM428J07b.CDR
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
6-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Capacities
BTM428J
PARTNER E
24 Lines and 24 Extensions
16 Lines and 48 Extension or
PARTNER
PARTNER
PARTNER
PFT
N
PARTNER
L I
PFT PFT
PFT
L
PFT
I
I E S
L
PFT
I
I
I N E
L
PFT
I
L
E S
PFT
L I N E S
PFT
I E S
PFT
I
S
L I N
PFT
PFT
I
L
L
PFT
400
I N E
L
E
PFT
S
R1.0
L
PFT
I
N
E
PFT
L
E S PFT
I
E
I
S
N
PFT
L I
N
E
PFT
N
L I
E
N
S
E
E
S
S
L I
N
S
E
S L N
L
L I
N S
I E
S PFT
S
L N
E
E
L
S PFT
I N
I N
PFT
E
S PFT
L
I L
I N
MODULE
R1.0
N
E
I
S
E
L
400
MODULE
I
N
L
E
PFT
I N
PFT
I E S
N
E
PFT
S
S
L N
S
R1.0
I L N
PFT
E
S
E
PFT
E
400
MODULE
R1.0
R1.0
S I
S
E
I
L
E
PFT
N
L N
I N
S
S
400
MODULE
S L I
L N
L
N
S
N
L
PARTNER
E
400
S
E
L I
I
S
PFT
E
I N
MODULE
E
PFT
I N
PFT PFT
L
E
N LI N
L
E
R1.0
N
S PFT
I
S
N
PFT
N
MODULE
PFT
E
I
L
E
S
N LI
400
R1.0
N
L
N
PFT
L
S
PARTNER
S
MODULE
R1.0
S
E
E
PFT
S
400
MODULE
R1.0
E
I N
PFT
N
I E
S
400
MODULE
N
PFT
L
S L
L N
S
E
S
R1.0
PFT
E
N
E
400
MODULE
PARTNER
PARTNER
PFT N NI L N
L
I N
S
R1.0
PFT PFT
I E
PFT
S PFT
L
S I E
S
N
L N
E
PFT
I E
400
MODULE
R1.0
R1.0
N
S PFT
I N
L
PFT
E
S L
L N
E
PFT
PARTNER
400
400
MODULE
MODULE
R1.0
I
N
PFT
L
S
400
MODULE
PARTNER
PARTNER
PARTNER
N
S
E
S
PFT
I E
N
E
400
R1.0
N
I
N
S
400
MODULE
L
L
I
E
S
PFT
L
N
E
R1.0
PARTNER
PFT
PFT
NI L N
400
MODULE
PARTNER
PARTNER
PARTNER
S PFT
L I N E S
Eight 206 Modules
Four 206 Modules & Four 400 Modules
Additional Sample Configurations: 18 lines, 42 extensions 20 lines, 36 extensions 22 lines, 30 extensions
PARTNER P E 12 Lines and 12 Extensions
8 Lines and 24 Extension or
PARTNER
PARTNER
PARTNER
PFT
L
PFT
L
I
PFT
L
PFT
I
L I N E S
L
PFT
I
S
L
PFT
L I
L
N
I
E
N
S
E
PFT
L
I
S
I
PFT
L I
E
N
S
E
L I N
E
E
S L N
L
E
PFT
I N
S PFT
S
S
N
E S
I E
S
S
L N
E
I E
PFT
N
S PFT
I N
L N
S
R1.0
L I
E
S
PFT
I E
MODULE
R1.0
PFT
N
E
PFT L
L N
400
MODULE
L I
N
PFT
I
E
PFT
E
400
R1.0
I
L
N
N LI N
S
400
MODULE
S PFT
PFT
E
S
PFT L
E
S
I
PARTNER
N
S
R1.0
N
E
L
E
400
MODULE
S PFT
I N
PFT
N
I
E
S L
PARTNER
S
R1.0
N
E
PFT
N LI
L
E
400
MODULE
R1.0
I
N
PFT
400
MODULE
R1.0
N
S
S
400
MODULE
PFT
I E
E
S
PARTNER
PFT L N
N
E
R1.0
PFT
I
N
400
MODULE
PARTNER
PARTNER
S PFT
L I N E S
Four 206 Modules
Two 206 Modules & Two 400 Modules Additional Sample Configuration: 10 lines, 12 extensions
PARTNER 4 Lines and 12 Extensions PARTNER
PARTNER
PFT
L
PFT
L
I
I
N
N
E
E
S
400
MODULE
R1.0
PFT
S
400
MODULE
R1.0
L
PFT
I
N
E
E
S L
S PFT
I
N
E
E
S
L I N E S
L I
N
PFT
L I
N
PFT
S PFT
L I N E S
Two 206 Modules
sm1501a\capacity.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary 6-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Capacities
PARTNER® Endeavor Capacities 15 Lines and 40 Extensions: • •
1 PARTNER Endeavor Processor Module 4 362EC Modules
12 Lines and 32 Extensions: • • •
1 PARTNER Endeavor Processor Module 3 362EC Modules 1 PARTNER Mail VS Module
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
6-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Capacities
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 6-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
Equipment Ordering Codes
Processor Modules CU Component
PEC
Comcode / SAP Code
P ACS R1.0 P ACS R1.1 P ACS R3 P ACS R4
6054-PR1 6054-P11 6054-P30 6054-P40
PEC Status* LAI LAI LAI GA
P CU R1 P CU R2 P CU R3.0 P CU R3.1 P CU R4.0 P 4.1 CU
6060-CU1 6060-206 6060-PR3 6060-P31 6060-P40 6060-P41
LAI LAI LAI LAI LAI LAI
106190630 106440217 106917925 107085847 107323347 107525560
P+ CU R1 P+ CU R2 P+ CU R3 P+ CU R3.1 P+ CU R4.0 P+ 4.1 CU
6060-CU2 6060-824 6060-PP3 6060-C31 6060-C40 6060-C41
LAI LAI LAI LAI LAI LAI
105706147 106440233 106627805 107036998 107317539 107525545
P II CU R1 P II CU R3 P II CU R3.1 P II CU R4.0 P II 4.1 CU
6050-CU1 6050-CU3 6050-C31 6050-C40 6050-C41
LAI LAI LAI LAI LAI
106440993 106627847 107085854 107266561 107525602
Endeavor Processor 362
6056-PR1
LAI
108233671
107759375 108080920 108462995 108524141
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
7-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
BTM428J
Processor Module Upgrades CU Component P ACS R1.1 Upgrade Card P ACS R2.0 Upgrade Card P ACS Remote Access/R3 Upgrade PC Card P 4.1 Upgrade processor P 4.1 CU Upgrade (Maintenance only) P+ 4.1 Upgrade processor P II 4.1 Upgrade processor PARTNER Remote Access / R3 Upgrade Card PARTNER Remote Access/R4 Upgrade Card
Comcode / SAP Code
1326-005 1326-002 1326-008/A
PEC Status* LAI LAI LAI
6060-P41
LAI
107525560
--------------
LAI
107525578
6060-U41
LAI
107526592
6050-U41
LAI
107525651
1326-008
LAI
108371329
1326-020
GA
108468521
PEC
108080938 107932089 108319963
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary 7-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
Modules PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
6050-E31
LAI
107085870
200 R2
60607
LAI
106413180
200 R3.0
60607
LAI
106413180
200E R3.0
60607
LAI
106413180
200E R3.1
60634
LAI
106441181
206R1
60601
LAI
106190648
206R2
60606
LAI
106440225
206R3
6060-PR3
LAI
106917925
206R4
6060-P40
LAI
107323347
206E R3
60626
LAI
106441140
206E R3.1
60631
LAI
106917933
206E R4.0
60631
LAI
106917933
206EC R3
60613
LAI
106628449
206EC R3.1
60632
LAI
107659062
308EC R1
60555
LAI
108033978
308EC R3
60557
GA
108463001
362EC R1
60556
LAI
108233289
400E R3
60505
LAI
106441215
400E R3.1
60540
LAI
107085821
400EC R3.1
60542
GA
108098070
1600 DSL Module
60560
GA
108773904
Module Connector
60642
LAI
107089302
2-Slot Carrier
60623
GA
107801243
(OLD) 5-Slot Carrier
60624
GA
107952566
5-Slot Carrier PARTNER Endeavor Upgrade Card
60561
GA
108897836
1326-009
LAI
108258492
RAU 60641 * PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
LAI
106894058
CU Component P II Expansion Unit
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
7-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
BTM428J
MLS Telephones PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
MLS-6 Black
3151-04B
LAI
107092165
MLS-6 White
3151-04W
LAI
107092181
MLS-12 Black
3151-05B
LAI
107092116
MLS-12 White
3151-05W
LAI
107092124
MLS-12D Black
3151-06B
LAI
107092157
MLS-12D White
3151-06W
LAI
107092132
MLS-18D Black
3151-07B
LAI
107092215
MLS-18D White
3151-07W
LAI
107092207
MLS-34D Black
3151-08B
LAI
106927551
MLS-34D White
3151-08W
LAI
106927569
MLS-CA24 (DSS/BLF) Black
3151-DBB
LAI
106441934
MLS-CA24 (DSS/BLF) White
3151-DBW
LAI
106441942
Telephone
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change Avaya - Proprietary 7-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
PARTNER Telephones PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
Apparatus
PTNR-6 Black
3158-04B
GA
107854788
7311H12B-003
PTNR-6 White
3158-04W
GA
107854796
7311H12B-264
PTNR-6 Gray
3158-04G
GA
107854804
7311H12B-323
PTNR-18 Black
3158-05B
GA
108236639
7311H13D-003
PTNR-18 White
3158-05W
GA
108236670
7311H13D-264
PTNR-18 Gray
3158-05G
GA
108262817
7311H13D-323
PTNR-18D Black
3158-07B
GA
108236712
7311H14E-003
PTNR-18D White
3158-07W
GA
108236720
7311H14E-264
PTNR-18D Gray
3158-07G
GA
108262825
7311H14E-323
PTNR-34D Black
3158-08B
GA
107305054
7515H04A-003
PTNR-34D White
3158-08W
GA
107305062
7515H04A-264
PTNR-34D Gray
3158-08G
GA
107320749
7515H04A-323
CA48 DSS Black
3158-CAB
GA
108354291
605B1-003
CA48 DSS White
3158-CAW
GA
108354309
605B1-264
CA48 DSS Gray
3158-CAG
GA
108354317
605B1-323
PARTNER-CA48 Attribute Code Atlas 220V
PWR50
GA
107525511
D-kitD182849
PARTNER-CA48 Attribute Code Canada
PWS12
GA
107637498
D-kitD182878
END-6 Black
3146-04B
LAI
108234170
7311H12C-003
END-18 Black
31058
LAI
108234204
7311H13C-003
END-18D Black
31059
LAI
108234220
7311H14D-003
END-34D Black
31060
LAI
107854879
7311H14B-003
Telephone
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
7-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
BTM428J
Analog Telephones PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
6210 Analog Set Gray White
3198-1GU 3198-1WU
GA GA
108099235 108099219
Touch-Tone Desk Set Black Misty Cream
3101-UBD 3101-UMD
GA GA
108209016 108209024
Touch-Tone Wall Set Black Misty Cream
3101-UBW 3101-UMW
GA GA
108209032 108209040
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
SoundStation
3127-STD
GA
407428697
SoundStation EX w/Mics
3127-EXP
GA
407428739
SoundStation Premier EX
3127-APE
GA
407795251
SoundStation Premier EX w/Mics
3127-APX
GA
407795269
Telephone
Analog Speakerphones (has dial pad) Speakerphone
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary 7-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
Multi-Line Digital Cordless Business Telephones MDC 9000 Cordless
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
3203-03W 3203-03B
LAI LAI
107304982 107304974
32034 32036
LAI LAI
106760812 106760804
3122-041
LAI
407156892
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
MLC-6 Black
3153-03B
LAI
106202492
MLC-6White
3153-03W
LAI
106202518
Handset White Black Battery Pack White Black Headset
PARTNER Cordless Telephone MLC-6 MLC-6
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
7-7
®
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
BTM428J
TransTalk Digital Wireless Systems TransTalk 9000
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
3204-CR1
LAI
107073330
3204-W1W 3204-W1B
LAI LAI
107077463 107077455
3204-01W 3204-01B
LAI LAI
107017030 107017022
32034 32036
LAI LAI
106760812 106706804
3122-041
LAI
407156892
System Configuration Carrier Assembly (with power converter) MDW 9000 Handset White Black Stand-Alone Configuration MDW 9000 Handset White Black Accessories Battery Pack White Black Headset (wired)
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change Avaya - Proprietary 7-8
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
TransTalk Digital Wireless Systems (continued) TransTalk MDW 9031
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
3204-CR3
GA
107955122
3204-W7B
GA
108046525
3204-07B
GA
108046525
32034 32036
GA GA
106760812 106706804
3122-041
GA
407156892
System Configuration Carrier Assembly (with power converter) MDW 9031 Handset Black Stand-Alone Configuration MDW 9031 Handset Black Accessories Battery Pack White Black Headset (wired)
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
7-9
®
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
BTM428J
TransTalk Digital Wireless Systems (continued) TransTalk MDW 9040
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
3204-CR3
GA
107955122
3204-W7B
GA
108046525
3204-07B
GA
108046525
32034 32036
GA GA
106760812 106706804
3122-041
GA
407156892
System Configuration Carrier Assembly (with power converter) MDW 9040 Handset Black Stand-Alone Configuration MDW 9040 Handset Black Accessories Battery Pack White Black Headset (wired)
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary 7-10
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
Voice Messagingl / Automated Attendant Applications PARTNER Messaging R1 Item
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
PARTNER Messaging R1 Module
7068-100
GA (Q4, 2001)
108694316
2 Port License/Backup Card
7068-102
GA (Q4, 2001)
700015050
4 Port License/Backup Card
7068-104
GA (Q4, 2001)
700015068
6 Port License/Backup Card
7068-106
GA (Q4, 2001)
700015076
PVM R3 Item
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
4 Mailboxes
6108-547
GA
108505298
12 Mailboxes
6108-548
GA
108505306
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
2 ports/48 Mailboxes
6108-542
GA
108624867
4 ports/48 Mailboxes
6108-544
GA
108624875
PMVS 2-Port Backup Expansion Card
6108-545
GA
108344235
PMVS 4-Port Backup Expansion Card
6108-543
GA
108347386
PMVS R5 Item
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
7-11
®
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
BTM428J
Voice Messaging / Automated Attendant Applications (continued) PARTNER MAIL R3 Item PARTNER Mail R3 2-port 4-port 6-port 2-port Expansion Card
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP CODE
7108-302 7108-304 7108-306 7108-300
GA GA GA GA
408071793 408071801 408071819 407470772
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP CODE
61252
LAI
406406090
PARTNER Attendant Item Partner Attendant
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary 7-12
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
Call Accounting Systems CAT Systems
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
CAT Basic
3600-014
GA
406838862
CAT BASIC Upgrade
3600-017
GA
406840736
CAT PLUS V3.1.1
3600-032
GA
406838805
CAT PLUS V3.1.1 Upgrade
3600-035
GA
406407710
CAT PLUS Hospitality Upgrade
3600-031
GA
n/a
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
7-13
®
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
BTM428J
Other Equipment Equipment
PEC
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
IROB
60612
GA
106392558
5324-003
GA
408466555
PARTNER Contact Closure Adjunct
60625
GA
107881435
5-Watt Self-Amplified Horn Speaker
5328-005
GA
408186005
10-Watt 70-volt Amplifier
5328-010
GA
408186062
35-Watt 70-volt Amplifier
5328-035
GA
408186062
100-Watt 70-volt Amplifier
5328-101
GA
408186088
PCM 2000, first 3-zones, talkback
5323-106
GA
408186013
PCM 2000 (ZPM) additional 3-zones
5323-108
GA
408186039
PCM 2000 (CPU/ZPM) after every 9-zones
5323-107
GA
408186039
Round Recessed Ceiling Speaker
5330-215
GA
408184059
EZ Install Round Ceiling Speaker
5330-201
GA
408185981
Universal Bi-Dir Wall Speaker
5330-205
GA
408184042
Universal Connection Doorphone Speaker
5330-120
GA
408466548
Universal Doorphone Controller & Speaker
5324-001
GA
408466563
Square Indoor Speaker
5330-235
GA
408184075
15-Watt Horn Speaker
5331-200
GA
408184117
30-Watt Horn Speaker
5331-205
GA
408184133
30-Watt Bi-Directional Horn Speaker
5331-211
GA
408185999
35-Watt Attenuator
5335-005
GA
408187169
APS 120 Custom
5338-12C
GA
408129161
Numeric Pager-Custom
5338-NUC
GA
408272912
Alphanum. Pager-Custom
5338-ANC
GA
408272904
APS Program. Software
5338-SOF
GA
408129054
GA
106416340
PARTNER/Analog Doorphone Speaker
RFI Filter 60611 * PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary 7-14
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
SPP Offerings Offer PARTNER
PARTNER Plus
PEC
PEC Status*
Premier Package 1 w/2 hr.
6060-PK1
GA
Premier Package 2 w/o 2 hr.
6060-PK2
GA
Enhanced Response
6060-2HR
GA
Subsequent Training
6060-TR1
GA
Wire Coverage
6060-WR1
GA
Moves and Changes
6060-MCR
GA
Seasonal
6060-SEA
GA
Premier Package 1
6062-PK1
GA
Premier Package 2
6062-PK2
GA
Wire Coverage
6062-WR1
GA
Subsequent Training
6062-TR1
GA
2-Hour Response
6062-2HR
GA
Moves and Changes
6062-MCR
GA
Seasonal
6062-SEA
GA
6050-PK1
GA
Premier Package 2
6050-PK2
GA
Wire Coverage
6050-WR1
GA
Subsequent Training
6050-TR1
GA
2-Hour Response
6050-2HR
GA
Moves and Changes
6050-MCR
GA
Seasonal
6050-SEA
GA
PARTNER II Premier Package
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
7-15
®
PARTNER Access Guide Equipment Codes
BTM428J
Headsets PARTNER Base Units Item
PEC Code
PEC Status*
Comcode / SAP Code
PARTNER Corded Base Unit
3276-090
GA
407153253
10U100 900MHz Cordfree Base Unit
3122-095
GA
407875939
PEC Code
PEC Status*
Comcode/SAP Code
Starset top H31
3122-030
GA
406445627
Mirage top H41
3124-049
GA
406445783
Mirage top H41N
3124-050
GA
408020998
Supra Monaural top H51
3122-040
GA
406445791
Supra Monaural NC top H51N
3122-055
GA
406445809
Supra Binaural NC top H61N
3122-060
GA
406445817
Supra Binaural top H61
3122-045
GA
406976076
Encore Binaural NC top H101N
3124-070
GA
407547074
Encore Monaural Voice Tube H91
3124-062
GA
408021004
Encore Monaural NC top H91N
3124-065
GA
408020980
Encore Binaural Voice Tube H101
3124-067
GA
408021095
Tristar Voice Tube top H81
3124-035
GA
407547058
Tristar Noise Canceling top H81N
3124-036
GA
408020758
Supra Starter
3276-040
GA
408018943
Supra Starter NC
3276-045
GA
408001436
Earset Starter
3276-030
GA
408018901
Earset Starter NC
3276-035
GA
408001428
Starter Special NC
3276-070
GA
408001386
Starter Special VT
3276-075
GA
408018869
Avaya Freedom of Choice Headpieces Item
* PEC Status Codes: DA = Discontinued Availability GA = General Availability (Active) LAI = Limited Availability; Inactive
Note: Comcodes/SAP Codes are subject to change
Avaya - Proprietary 7-16
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A P + 2 E P
Partner ACS Partner Partner Plus Partner II Endeavor Abbreviated Ringing: (System phones only) Sets + 2 A E incoming calls to ring once when the user is already on a call. Account Code Entry: Lets users enter an + 2 A E Account Code (up to 16 digits) for an incoming or outgoing call. Account Codes are used to track phone use by department or project, or to track client calls for billback purposes. Allowed/Disallowed Phone Number Lists: + 2 A E Allowed Lists specify telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions. Disallowed Lists restrict users from dialing an entire category of numbers (such as 900 or 976). Auto Dial Buttons: (System phones only) Dial P + 2 A E outside numbers, feature codes, or Account Codes with a single touch. Monitor the status of an extension using red and green LED indicators next to the button. 800 Auto Dial and Speed Dial buttons can be programmed in PARTNER ACS. A Automatic Daylight Savings/Standard Times: This feature automatically updates the system clock for annual Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time changes. Automatic Extension Privacy: Prevents users P + 2 A E from joining calls active at an extension. Typically, this feature is used for standard phones and extensions connected to fax machines, modems, or credit card readers that send and receive data calls. Automatic Line Selection: Determines the line or P + 2 A E pool a user is connected to after lifting the handset or activating the speakerphone. Automatic System Answer (ASA): Plays callers 2 a greeting and performs the action specified by Optional E the Automatic System Answer mode feature: &A
2 Optional E &A + 2 Optional E &A
FEATURE
Places the call on hold at Extension 10 Continues to ring at all extensions that have access to the line Disconnects the call immediately after the greeting plays Automatic System Answer Mode: Specifies how the system handles calls after the Automatic System greeting plays. Automatic VMS Cover: Automatically routes an extension’s unanswered intercom and transferred calls to a voice mail system after a specified number of rings. Can also route incoming CO calls if extensions are assigned "ownership" of the line using the Line Coverage Extension feature.
BENEFIT Employees are alerted that another call has come in but aren’t distracted. Bill clients for calls made on their behalf or track and/or allot costs within the company.
Customize list of permitted and restricted numbers for each extension in the system. Curb toll abuse without unduly restricting users.
Permits one-touch dialing.
Simplifies daylight savings time changes.
Lets you see the status of an extension before transferring a call. Ensures data or voice transmissions are not interrupted.
Customizes line selection at each extension.
Improves customer service by ensuring that calls are handled quickly and professionally. Helps receptionist manage incoming calls. Can be used by small businesses to provide call-center-type services.
Allows the ASA feature to be customized to the needs of the business. Voice mail coverage is on al all times. No need to turn it on.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
8-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
BTM428J
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A P + 2 E P
A
A
A
+
+
+
+
Partner ACS Partner Partner Plus Partner II Endeavor Background Music: (System phones only) + 2 A E Provides background music at the touch of a button via the speaker of an idle system phone. Plays material from the Music On-Hold audio source. Programmable by extension. E Backup Failure Alarm: If Backup Programming— Automatic is active and an automatic backup fails, a Backup Failure Alarm Message will appear on the display of extensions 10 and 11. The message will indicate the cause of failure. E Backup Programming—Automatic: Allows system programming to be saved automatically to a PMCIA card once a month. E Backup Programming—Manual: Allows system programming to be saved automatically to a PMCIA card whenever system administrator chooses. Call Coverage: Redirects all intercom, 2 A E transferred, and outside calls from a user’s extension to another extension after a specified number of rings. Call Coverage Rings: Specifies the number of 2 A E rings before a call goes to a covering extension. Systemwide setting applies to all extensions. Permits customization of coverage patterns to meet variety of needs. PARTNER ACS R3 and later releases provide the capability of programming call coverage rings on an individual extension basis. Call Forwarding/Call Follow Me: Forwards all 2 A E intercom, transferred, and outside calls from a user’s extension to another system extension. Users can activate this feature from their own extension or from any other extension on the system. Call Park: Lets users put a call on a special type 2 A E of hold, allowing it to be picked up from any phone in the system.
+ 2 A E A + 2 A E 2 A E
FEATURE
Call Pickup: Answer any intercom, outside, or transferred call ringing at another extension by dialing a code plus the extension number. Call Screening: Call Screening lets a PARTNER ACS user listen to a caller leaving a message in his/her voice mailbox. Call Waiting: (Standard phones only) Alerts a user who is on a call that a second incoming call is ringing. Caller ID: (system phones only) Displays the number and name (if available) of the party for all call on lines equipped with Caller ID service.
BENEFIT Lets users customize their work environment.
Immediate indication when system programming backup has failed.
Customer programming, including latest changes, is automatically backed up. Provides backup of system programming in case of system failure. Programming can be copied from one PARTNER ACS system to another. Ensures all calls are answered.
Permits customization of coverage patterns to meet a variety of needs.
Lets employees move around the office without missing important calls.
Allows users to park a call, move about the office and pick it up from another phone without knowing which line the call is on. Used in conjunction with paging. Paged party can pick up the call from any phone. Better call coverage.
Lets customers screen calls. They can choose to answer the important ones and let other callers leave a message. Enhances the performance of standard telephones. Lets you know who’s calling before you answer the phone. Can be used with PassageWay Software for Call Center application.
Avaya - Proprietary 8-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A P + 2 E 2
2
A
P P A +
Partner ACS Partner Partner Plus Partner II Endeavor A E Caller ID Inspect: Allows a user who is active on a call to view Caller ID information for a second ringing, active, or held call. A E Caller ID Name Display: Toggles the display between Caller ID Number and Caller ID Name. (Caller ID Name is an optional feature available with Caller ID service. It is not provided by all local telephone companies.) Caller ID Name and Number Display: Displays Caller ID Name & Number simultaneously on ringing incoming and transferred calls. Conference Calls: A conference connects + 2 A E multiple inside and outside parties on a single call. Conference Drop: Drops the last outside party + 2 A E added to a conference call, without disconnecting the other parties. Contact Closure Support: Jack on PARTNER ACS Module accommodates an optional, external adjunct that has two contact closure relays. Copy Settings: Copies many programmed 2 A E settings from one extension to another.
P + 2 A E 2 Optional E &A
+ 2 A E
+ 2 A E
P + 2 A E
+ 2 A E
+ 2 A E
FEATURE
Dial Mode: Identifies incoming lines as rotary or Touch-Tone. Direct Extension Dial (DXD): (System phone only at Extension 10) Permits an outside caller to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly, without the aid of a receptionist. The system picks up the outside call after a specified number of rings and plays a short message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension of Hunt Group. For PARTNER ACS R3 and later releases, DXD calls can also be transferred into a Calling Group. Direct Line Pickup (Active Line): Allows users to pickup an incoming call, or to join a call in progress on a specific outside line, even when that line is not assigned to their phone. Direct Line Pickup (Idle Line): Allows users to access a specific outside line when the line is not in use, even when that particular line is not assigned to their phone. Display: (System phones only) The message appearing on the display area of the PARTNER display telephones can be shown in English, Spanish, or French. The language can be set for each extension. Display Language: (System phones only) The message appearing on the display area of the PARTNER display telephones can be set for each extension. Distinctive Ring: Specifies whether calls should ring at a standard device using the system's distinctive ringing patterns (for outside, intercom, or transferred call) or whether all calls should ring
BENEFIT Determines relative priority of calls.
Determine who is calling.
Users are alerted to the caller’s Name and number on incoming and transferred calls. Enables users to conduct meetings over the phone - a common "must-have" feature. Prevents remaining callers from hearing dial tone when caller leaves a conference. Supports contact closure devices like magnetic doorlocks. Simplifies system programming; saves time and ensures consistency and accuracy of features. Enables PARTNER systems to support Touch-Tone and rotary lines. Reduces calling load on receptionist. Useful for Call-Center-like services.
Ensures access to all outside lines even while they are in use, ideal for users whose phones have a limited number of line buttons. Ensures access to all outside lines, ideal for users whose phones have a limited number of line buttons. Makes the phone an even more valuable tool and simplifies system programming.
Accommodates multilingual users and overseas customers.
Customizes ringing patterns to allow for easier recognition of call source. Allows some standard devices (e.g., fax machines or modems) to pick up intercom
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
8-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
BTM428J
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A P + 2 E
Partner ACS Partner Partner Plus Partner II Endeavor like outside calls.
+ 2 A E
P + 2 A E P + 2 A E
A
+ 2 A E
P + 2 A E
+ 2 A E + 2 A E
P + 2 A E + 2 A E
+ 2 A E
FEATURE
BENEFIT and transferred calls.
Do Not Disturb: (System phones only) Press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls from audibly alerting. Outside callers hear ringing while inside callers hear a busy signal when this feature is enabled. Door Phone Alert Extension: Identifies up to 48 extensions that are to alert when a door phone is pressed. Door Phone Extension: Identifies extensions to which door phones are connected. A door phone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors. When door phone bell is pressed, phones at Door Phone Alert Extensions alert with an identifiable sound. DSL (Digital Line Subscriber) Module: The 1600 DSL Module adds Symmetrical Digital Subscriber Line capability. Provides support for simultaneous voice and data applications over a Symmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (SDSL). Emergency Phone Number List: Allows the system manager to create a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions. Enhanced Tip/Ring (ETR): Protocol used by PARTNER system telephones that allows industrystandard phones and adjuncts to be bridged on the same extension with a system phone without using an adapter. Exclusive Hold: (System phones only) Lets you prevent other users from picking up outside calls placed on hold at your extension. Extension Name Display: (System phones only) Lets users assign a name to their extension. When the extension is used to make an intercom, group, or transferred call, the name appears on the system display telephone(s) receiving the call. Users receiving a Transfer Return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call. Extension Test: Puts a system phone into a local test mode to check the LEDs and ringer. Verifies the connection to the PARTNER Control Unit. External Hotline: (System phones only) When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline, a preprogrammed outside number is dialed automatically. Fax Management Button: Permits one-touch transfer of fax calls to a fax machine. Associated LEDs show the busy status of the machine and alert users when a fax has arrived or if the fax machine is not answering calls.
Reduce phone distractions.
Ensures that door phones are answered.
Provides added security at building entrances that are unattended.
Preserves customer investment in current PARTNER system by providing always-on, high-performance Internet access through a PC card upgrade. Ensures that everyone can dial emergency numbers like fire, hospital, and police.
Reduces cost by eliminating the need for special adapters and additional phone lines. Improves office efficiency by supporting a wide variety of adjunct devices (e.g. fax machines, single-line and cordless phones, etc.) Ensures privacy for held calls.
Allows recipient of internal or transferred calls to know who is calling or whose phone they are covering.
Easy method of troubleshooting.
Automatic dialing of frequently called outside numbers.
Transfer fax calls and monitor a remote fax machine.
Avaya - Proprietary 8-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A P + 2 E A
Partner ACS Partner Partner Plus Partner II Endeavor Fax Tone Detection: When an incoming call is answered by PARTNER Voice Messaging, PARTNER MAIL, PARTNER MAIL VS, or ASA/DXD, PARTNER ACS R3 determines if the incoming call is a fax and will automatically transfer the call to Hunt Group 8 (a new PARTNER ACS R3 Hunt Group for faxes). Forced Account Code Entry: (System phones + 2 A E only) Identify specific extensions at which users must enter an Account Code in order to receive outside dial tone. Forced Account Code List: Lets you identify up + 2 A E to 99 valid account codes. + 2 A E
+ 2 A E + 2 A E
+ 2 A E
+ 2 A E + 2 A E
P + 2 A E P + 2 A E 2 Optional E &A
+ 2 A E
FEATURE
Group Call Distribution: Assigns outside lines to ring directly in Hunt Groups instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist. Also used to route calls to a voice mail system. Group Calling: Ring, voice signal, or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the extensions in any one of four Calling Groups. Group Hunting—Ring/Voice Signal: Distributes call volume among a number of extensions. When a call arrives in a Hunt Group, it rings or voice signals the first available (non-busy) extension in the group by searching in a circular hunt. Hunt Groups will handle outside, transferred, and intercom calls. Hunt Groups are supported, with Hunt Group 7 reserved for voice messaging. th (PARTNER ACS R3 has an 8 Hunt Group reserved exclusively for fax calls.) Group Pickup: Allows a user at any extension in the system to answer outside, intercom. or transferred calls ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group. Hotline: When a user lifts the handset of a Hotline Phone, a programmed Alert Extension rings. The Hotline Phone must be a standard phone. Intercom Dial Tone: Choose the type of dial tone that the system provides at each extension (internal or external). Some auto dialing devices like modems require outside dial tone. Joining (Bridging): Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress. Up to three system extensions can join a call on an outside line. Last Number Redial: Redials the last outside number dialed (up to 28 characters). Line Access Mode: (Hybrid Mode only): Identifies individual extensions that are to operate as key extensions even though the system is configured for Hybrid Mode. If an extension’s Line Access Mode is set to Key, individual lines can be assigned to specific buttons on the phone. Line Access Restriction: Restricts an extension from making or receiving calls on a specific line.
BENEFIT Allows voice and fax calls to be received on the same line, eliminating the expense of a dedicated fax line.
Ensures that employees will enter Account Codes.
Prevents users from circumventing the Forced Account Code Entry feature by entering random numbers. Route incoming calls on specific lines to a Sales or Service group. Reduces load on receptionist and speeds call handling. Ensures that calls are answered. Lets you make an announcement to all members of the group at once. Hunt Groups can be set up to handle specific types of calls such as Sales or Service. Specific lines can be programmed to ring directly in Hunt Groups, improving call handling and reducing the load on the receptionist.
Allows for great flexibility and better customer service. Coworkers can answer each other’s calls. Provides immediate, automatic access to a particular extension within the company. Customize the system to support auxiliary equipment like modems or fax machines that have auto dialing capability. Allows several users to join a discussion with an outside party. Saves time looking up and redialing a previously dialed number. Allows for customization of telephone extensions regardless of mode of operation. Provides direct access to outside lines in Hybrid Mode.
Avoids toll misuse or abuse.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
8-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
BTM428J
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A P + 2 E +
Partner ACS Partner Partner Plus Partner II Endeavor Line Assignment: Assigns outside lines to 2 A E extensions. Line Coverage Extension: Identifies an extension + 2 A E as "owner" of an outside line so voice mail coverage can be provided. Line Pooling: (Hybrid Mode only) allows users to 2 group similar incoming or outgoing lines together Optional E in pools and assign them to buttons on a system &A phone. Line Ringing: Determines how each outside line P + 2 A E or pool assigned to an extension rings: immediately, after a 20-second delay, or not at all. (PARTNER does not support delayed ringing.) Loudspeaker Paging: Permits use of an external P + 2 A E paging system from a system telephone. + 2 A E + 2 A E P + 2 A E
+ 2 A E + 2 A E + 2 A E P + 2 A E + 2 A E
+ 2 A E + 2 Optional E &A
FEATURE
Manual Signaling: Enables users to signal a predetermined coworker’s extension using a "button/buzzer" type of arrangement. Message Light Off/On: Activates the message light at another user’s system or standard phone. Music-On-Hold: Plays music to callers on hold. An audio source must be connected to the system. With Magic-On-Hold, callers can hear personalized announcements. Music-On-Hold-Volume: Programming feature that selects the Music-On-Hold volume level for parties placed on hold. Night Service Extension: Assigns extensions to a Night Service Group that will receive incoming calls after hours. Night Service Button: (System phone at Extension 10 only) Program a button to turn Night Service on and off. Outgoing Call Restriction: Restricts the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension. Outgoing Call Restriction Button: (System phone at Extension 10 only) Press a button to change the current Outgoing Call Restriction setting for an extension. Outside Conference Denial: Determines whether more than one outside party is allowed on a conference call. Personal Speed Dial Numbers: Lets users store 20 frequently dialed numbers at their extension which can be dialed using a two-digit code. Personal Speed Dial numbers programmed for a particular extension are for use at that extension only. 800 Personal Speed Dial and Auto Dial buttons can be programmed in PARTNER ACS.
BENEFIT Customizes line assignment. Permits voice mail coverage for incoming calls on CO lines. Allows access to many lines from a single button. Divides line pools by function (e.g., WATS and CO lines) and assigns the pools(s) to the extensions that require them. Delayed ringing permits another extension with the same line to cover your calls after four rings. No ringing can be used in libraries or other places where silence is important. Loudspeaker paging is useful for geographically dispersed environments like warehouses or for locations where the workforce is ambulatory like hospitals. Facilitates communication between coworkers when they’re on the phone with another party. A convenient way to signal another user. Soothe or provide information to callers on hold.
Change volume level of MOH devices with low-volume output. Ensures that after-hours calls are answered.
Easy activation of Night Service.
Controls toll abuse and reduces network costs. Simplifies the process of changing an extension’s outgoing call restrictions. Useful when quick changes to this setting are needed, for example, on conference room phones, or guest phones at a motel or bed and breakfast. Controls telephone usage and network costs.
Allows users to customize their phones to meet their individual needs.
Avaya - Proprietary 8-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A Partner ACS P Partner + Partner Plus 2 Partner II E Endeavor Pool Access Restriction: (Hybrid Mode only) 2 Restricts a pooled extension from receiving and/or Optional E making outside calls on all lines within a specific &A pool. Pool Extension Assignment: (Hybrid Mode only) 2 Identifies the pools to be assigned to buttons at a Optional E pooled extension. Two buttons are available for &A the Main Pool and for each Auxiliary Pool. Up to four pools can be assigned per extension. 2 A E Pool Line Assignment: (Hybrid Mode only) Removes lines from, or assigns lines to pools. Privacy: (System phones only) Lets users press a P + 2 A E programmed button to prevent other users form joining calls at their extension. Recall: Sends a timed switchhook flash over the P + 2 A E telephone line to obtain new dial tone. Can be used to access PBX, Central Office, or Centrex features, such as Call Waiting. A Record-a-Call: This feature lets a user record a conversation and store it in a PMVS R5 mailbox. To set up Record-a-Call for a user, you must install PMVS R5 and activate the feature for that extension. Remote Administration: All PARTNER systems P + 2 A E can be programmed and maintained from a remote location using two PARTNER Remote Access Units (RAUs). A Remote Administration & Diagnostics: The Remote Administration & Diagnostics feature provides the ability to administer and perform diagnostics on the PARTNER ACS system through a modem connection. The PARTNER ACS modem is contained in a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which has its own assigned extension (Intercom 76). A Restore Programming: Copies system programming stored on a PC Card to PARTNER Optional E ACS system memory. Ring On Transfer: Specifies what callers hear + 2 A E (ringing, silence, or music) when Music-On-Hold is activated and their call is being transferred. Save Number Redial: (System phones only) + 2 A E Saves an outside number into temporary memory. Save a number before hanging up on a busy or non-answering call. Once saved, the number can be redialed again at any time. The number stays in memory until a new one is saved. Unlike Last Number Redial, this feature lets users make other calls before redialing the saved number. Send All Calls: Use the Call Coverage, VMS + 2 A E Cover, or Do Not Disturb buttons to send intercom, transferred, or outside calls immediately to a covering extension or voice mailbox.
FEATURE
BENEFIT Avoids toll misuse or abuse.
Provides convenient, one-touch access to line pools. Customizes pool assignment to reduce toll abuse or misuse.
Customizes the pooled line environment. (Not all lines need to be assigned to pools.) Ensures privacy.
A quick way to obtain new dial tone after completing a call. Allows the system to operate behind a switch or with Centrex services. Allows users the convenience of recording a conversation for future use.
Ideal for business with more than one PARTNER system who wish to perform administration and maintenance from a centralized location. Simplifies the process of remote administration and diagnostics.
Change or restore programming easily. Move system programming from one PARTNER ACS system to another. Callers will know they are still connected while being transferred. Eliminates time spent looking up and redialing numbers.
Sends calls immediately to coverage when you are busy or on the phone.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
8-7
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
BTM428J
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A P + 2 E +
Partner ACS Partner Partner Plus Partner II Endeavor Simultaneous Paging: Provides access to a 2 A E loudspeaker paging system and to all of the builtin speakers on idle system phones at the same time. SMDR Output Format: Specifies whether up to + 2 A E 15 or 24 digits are printed in the “Number” field on an SMDR report. SMDR Record Type: Specifies whether all calls or + 2 A only outgoing calls should be included on the SMDR report. 2 E SMDR Talk Time: Specifies whether a “Talk Time” field is included on the SMDR report. A E Star Code Dial Delay: Ensures that Star Codes do not circumvent calling restrictions. Star codes are used to request special services from the telephone Central Office. For example, *67 blocks Caller ID information from being passed to the called party. Station Lock: Lets users enter a 4-digit code to + 2 A E “lock” their extension from making outside calls. They reenter this code to unlock the extension. +2 A E Station Unlock: Unlocks a specific user’s locked extension. Available only on ext. 10 or 11. System Password: (System phones only) A four+ 2 A E digit password that users can enter to override dialing restrictions. A E System Release Status: Entering a new feature code from any system display telephone will display the product name, release number, and country code of the PARTNER ACS system. System Speed Dial Numbers: Program up to 100 P + 2 A E frequently dialed numbers for the system. Any user can dial these numbers by entering a threedigit code. Touch-Tone Enable: (System phones only) Lets P + 2 A E a user send Touch-Tone signals on an outside call over a rotary line. Transfer: Pass an outside or intercom call from P + 2 A E one extension to another by pressing a Transfer or Auto Dial Button, or the switchhook on a standard phone. Transfer Return Extension: By default, + 2 A E transferred calls that are not answered are returned to the originating extension. This feature allows users to identify the Transfer Return Extension. Transfer Return Rings: A systemwide setting that + 2 A E specifies the number of times a transferred call rings before it goes to the Transfer Return Extension. P A Unique Line Ringing: (System phones only) Assigns a unique ringing pattern to outside calls arriving on incoming lines.
FEATURE
BENEFIT Assures that all broadcast announcements are heard.
The longer Number field is useful for law offices or hotels that need to record many digits for outgoing calls. Customizes the content of the SMDR report.
Useful for inbound Call Center reporting. Reduces the risk of toll fraud or a call being misrouted.
Prevents unauthorized users from making from making outside calls. Useful when user forgets the code used to lock the extension. Allows selected users to override dialing restrictions. A convenient way to identify the system release when speaking to technical support.
Speeds dialing of frequently called numbers.
Lets customers use services such as bankby-phone or Automated Attendants that require Touch-Tone signals to operate. Improves call handling.
Improves customers service and reduces caller frustration. Calls transferred by an Automated attendant that are unanswered can be routed to a receptionist. Permits customization of coverage patterns to meet variety of needs.
Helps users identify the line on which an outside call is ringing.
Avaya - Proprietary 8-8
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
PARTNER FAMILY FEATURE DEFINITIONS A P + 2 E +
Partner ACS Partner Partner Plus Partner II Endeavor VMS Cover Button: (System phones only) Lets 2 A E voice mail subscribers press a programmed button to route unanswered intercom and transferred calls to their voice mailbox after a specified number of rings. VMS Cover Rings: Specifies the number of times + 2 A E a call rings before it is sent to a user’s voice mailbox. VMS Hunt Delay: Specifies whether outside calls + 2 A E to the Automated Attendant Service of a voice mail system should be answered after two or four rings. + 2 A E
+ 2 A E
+ 2 A E
+ 2 A E
+ 2 A E
FEATURE
VMS Hunt Schedule: Specifies when an Automated Attendant Service of a voice mail system will answer calls: all the time, only during day operation (Night Service is off), or only during night operation (Night Service is on). Voice Interrupt On Busy: (System phones only) Interrupt and speak to a user who is on another call. (The third party—the one who to whom the recipient is speaking—may hear the interrupting party's voice and the beeps, which signal Voice Interrupt. Voice Interrupt On Busy—Talk Back: (System phones only) Program a button to respond to a Voice-Interrupt-on-Busy call while active on another call. Voice Mailbox Transfer Button: (System phones only) Transfer a caller directly to a specific extension’s voice mailbox without first ringing the extension. Wake-Up Service Button: (System phone at Extension 10 only) Used for scheduling wake-up (or reminder) calls. The system will make an intercom call to a target extension at a prescheduled time. If the call isn’t answered, or if the called extension is busy, the system makes a second attempt five minutes later.
BENEFIT Lets voice mail subscribers turn coverage on and off with the touch of a button.
Permits customization of coverage patterns to meet a variety of needs. Permits an Automated Attendant to answer calls immediately or after a delay. A delay allows a receptionist to answer them first. In this setup, only overflow calls go to the Attendant. Customizes the Automated Attendant to meet the needs of the business. Develop flexible coverage patterns for day and night operation. Alerts an individual who is busy on a call.
Permits two-way communication when a user is busy on the phone.
Sends a caller directly to voice mail coverage when you know that the called party is busy.
Serves as a key customer satisfier when a business (such as a hotel, motel, and a bed & breakfast) needs to offer reminder and wake-up services.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
8-9
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Definitions
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 8-10
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER ACS Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner ACS Feature Account Code Entry Allowed/Disallowed Lists (8 each) Automatic Daylight Savings/Standard Times Automatic Extension Privacy Automatic Line Selection Automatic System Answer Automatic System Answer Mode Automatic VMS Coverage Background Music Backup Failure Alarm Backup Programming Automatic Backup Programming - Manual Bridging (Joining Calls) Built-In-Speakerphone (BIS) Operation Call Coverage Call Follow Me Call Forwarding Call Park Call Pickup Call Screening Call Waiting (for T/R extensions) Caller ID Caller ID Logging & Dialing Caller ID Log Line Association Caller ID Log Answered Calls Caller ID Log All Calls Caller ID Name/Number Simultaneous Display
R 1.0
R1.1
R2.0
R3.0
R4.0
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
-
-
-
yes
yes
yes yes -
yes yes -
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes -
yes -
yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER ACS Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner ACS Feature Caller ID Type Central Telephone Programming from the Attendant Conference - CO-CO Conference - Outside Conf Denial Conference - CO Call Drop Conference - CO-ICOM Conference - ICOM-ICOM Contact Closure Copy Settings DTMF Receivers Dial Mode (Rotary/TouchTone) Differentiated Ringing CO/ICOM/Xfer Direct Facility Termination Direct Grp Calling (CO Hunt) Direct Line Pick-up - Active Line Direct Line Pick-up - Idle Line Display - Call Timer Display - Internal Calling Party ID - Number Display - Int. Calling Party ID Name Display - Clock/Date/Day of Week Display - Display Number Dialed Display - Identify Display Language Eng/Span/Fr per Extension Display - My Extension
R 1.0
R1.1
R2.0
R3.0
R4.0
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER ACS Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner ACS Feature Display – Name and Number appear simultaneously on incoming ringing and transferred calls Display - Transfer Return Identification Distinctive Ring - ICOM Ring (1 burst) Do Not Disturb Doorphones DSL (Digital Line Subscriber) Support (for SDSL only) DSS/BLF Adjunct Support DXD (Direct Extension Dial) Emergency Number List Emergency Telephone (External Hotline) Enhanced T/R (ETR) End to End Signaling (manual) Extension Hunt Grps Extension Programming Extension Test Facility Post-Select Facility Preselect Facility Status Information Fax Management Button Fax Tone Detection Feature Button Forced Account Code Entry Forced Account Code List (Verification for a maximum of 99 entries) Forward Disconnect Group Pickup Grp Calling/Paging with Pickup
R 1.0
R1.1
R2.0
R3.0
R4.0
-
-
-
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes -
yes yes -
yes yes -
yes yes -
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes 7 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes 7 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes 7 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes 8 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes 8 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER ACS Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner ACS Feature Grp Listen Inhibit Hands-Free Answer On Intercom (HFAI) Hold Hold Disconnect Time Hold - Exclusive Hold Rls On Abandon Hold Reminder Tone Hotline Howler Tone (no timeout) Idle Intercom Timeout Intercom Autodial - Ring (Ext.No.) Intercom Autodial - Voice Sig. (* plus Ext. No.) Intercom Call - Ring Intercom Call - Voice Signal Intercom Dial Tone (Regular/Machine) Last Number Redial Line Assignment Line Assignment (Custom) Line Pools Line Reserve Line Restrictions Line Ringing Options Line Type (CO/PBX) Loudspeaker Paging Manual Signaling Message Light On/Off - system phones Message Light On/Off standard phones
R 1.0
R1.1
R2.0
R3.0
R4.0
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER ACS Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner ACS Feature Music On Hold - External Source Music on Hold Volume Night Service On-Hook Dialing One Touch Transfer Outgoing Call Restriction Button Outgoing Call Restriction Levels Outside Autodial PBX Dial Out Code (1 digit) PARTNER Voice Messaging Password Restriction Override Personal Line Termination Personal Speed Dial Numbers Privacy Programmable Make/Break Ratio Real Time Clock Recall - CO/Intercom Record-a-Call Remote Administration & Diagnostics Restore Programming Ringing Line Preference Ringing at Busy Telephone (abbrev. or continuous) Ringing on Transfer Save Number Redial Second Attendant Position Send All Calls Senderized Dialing Operation Senderized Dialing (Enhanced)
R 1.0
R1.1
R2.0
R3.0
R4.0
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
3
3
3
3
3
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes -
yes yes -
yes yes -
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER ACS Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner ACS Feature Simultaneous Paging Square Operation Star Code Dial Delay Station Lock Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Talk Time System ID System Programming (LCD based via Ext. 10 or 11) System Release Status System Speed Dialing (100) Touch-Tone enable Transfer Transfer Return Transfer Return To Programmable Extension Transfer Return Identification VMS Cover Button VMS Cover Ring Interval VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule VMS Support – PARTNER Messaging VMS Support – PVM VMS Support - PARTNER MAIL VS VMS Support - PARTNER MAIL Voice Interrupt on Busy Voice Interrupt on Busy - Talkback
R 1.0
R1.1
R2.0
R3.0
R4.0
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-
-
yes
yes
yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER ACS Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner ACS Feature Voice Mailbox Button Volume Backup/Restore Volume Control - Handset Volume Control - Ringer Volume Control - Speaker Wake Up Service
R 1.0
R1.1
R2.0
R3.0
R4.0
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
PARTNER Features/Functionality Compatibility PARTNER Feature 911 Emergency Dialing Automatic Line Selection Automatic Extension Privacy Bridging Built-In-Speakerphone (BIS) Operation Central Telephone Programming from the Attendant Conference - CO-CO Conference - Call Drop Conference - CO-ICOM Conference - ICOM-ICOM DTMF Receivers Dial Mode (Rotary/Touch-Tone) Differentiated Ringing - CO/ICOM Direct Facility Termination Display - Call Timer Display - Internal Calling Party ID Number Display - Clock/Date Display - Display Number Dialed Doorphones Emergency Phone
R1
R2
R3& 3.1
R4
R 4.1
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-7
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER Features/Functionality Compatibility R1
PARTNER Feature End to End Signaling Enhanced T/R (ETR) Extension Programming Extension Test Facility Post-select Facility Preselect Facility Status Information Feature Button Forward Disconnect Grp Listen Inhibit Grp Paging with Pickup Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) Hold Hold Rls On Abandon Hot Line Phone Idle Intercom Timeout Intercom Autodial - Ring (Ext. No.) Intercom Autodial - Voice Signal (* plus Ext. No.) Intercom Call - Ring Intercom Call - Voice Signal Last Number Redial Line Ringing Options Loudspeaker Paging (via a line port and an adapter) Music Access Music/Tones on Hold On-Hook Dialing Outgoing Call Restriction Outside Autodialing Privacy
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
R2
R3& 3.1
R4
R 4.1
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 1 grp 1 grp 1 grp 1 grp yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes 2 yes
yes yes yes 2 yes
yes yes yes 2 yes
yes yes yes 2 yes
yes yes yes 2 yes
yes 2 yes yes
yes 3 yes yes
yes yes 3 yes yes
yes yes yes 3 yes yes
yes yes yes 3 yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-8
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER Features/Functionality Compatibility PARTNER Feature Recall CO Ringing Line Preference Ringing at Busy Telephone (abbrev. or continuous) Ringing on Transfer Senderized Dialing Operation Square Operation System ID System Programming (Dialcode based) System Speed Dialing Transfer (CO Calls Only) Unique Line Ringing Volume Backup/Restore Volume Control - Handset Volume Control - Ringer Volume Control - Speaker
R1
R2
R3& 3.1
R4
R 4.1
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes 10 yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes 60 yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes 60 yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes 60 yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 60 yes yes yes yes yes yes
NOTE: PARTNER Release 3.1 has the same feature content as PARTNER R3. The only difference is that the module and 412 carrier have been modified to support the wide input power supply and the battery backup unit.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-9
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER Plus Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner Plus Feature Account Code Entry Allowed/Disallowed Lists Automatic Line Selection Automatic Extension Privacy Automatic VMS Coverage Background Music Bridging (Joining Calls) Built-In-Speakerphone (BIS) Operation Call Follow Me (ICOM) Call Forwarding (ICOM) Call Park Call Pickup Call Waiting (for T/R extensions) Central Telephone Programming from the Attendant CENTREX Mode Conference - CO-CO Conference - Outside Conf Denial Conference - CO Call Drop Conference - CO-ICOM Conference - ICOM-ICOM Copy Settings DTMF Receivers Dial Mode (Rotary/Touch-Tone) Differentiated Ringing - CO/ICOM/Xfer Direct Facility Termination Direct Grp Calling (CO Hunt) Direct Line Pick-up - Active Line Direct Line Pick-up - Idle Line Display - Call Timer Display - Internal Calling Party ID Number
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R 4.0
R 4.1
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-10
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER Plus Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner Plus Feature Display - Int. Calling Party ID - Name Display - Clock/Date/Day of Week Display - Display Number Dialed Display - Identify Display Language Eng/Span/Fr per Extension Display - My Extension Display - Transfer Return Identification Distinctive Ring - ICOM Ring (1 burst) Do Not Disturb Doorphones DSS/BLF Adjunct Support Emergency Number List Emergency Telephone (External Hotline) Enhanced T/R (ETR) End to End Signaling (manual) Extension Hunt Grps Extension Programming Extension Test Facility Post-Select Facility Preselect Facility Status Information Fax Management Button Feature Button Forced Account Code Entry Forced Account Code List (Verification) Forward Disconnect Group Pickup Grp Calling/Paging with Pickup Grp Listen Inhibit Hands-Free Answer On Intercom (HFAI) Hold Hold - Exclusive
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R 4.0
R 4.1
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes 6 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes 7 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes 7 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes 7 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
1 grp 1 grp
1grp 1grp
4 grps 4 grps
4 grps 4 grps
4 grps 4 grps
4 grps 4 grps
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-11
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER Plus Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner Plus Feature Hold Rls On Abandon Hold Reminder Tone Hotline Howler Tone (no timeout) Idle Intercom Timeout Intercom Autodial - Ring (Ext.No.) Intercom Autodial - Voice Sig. (* plus Ext. No.) Intercom Call - Ring Intercom Call - Voice Signal Intercom Dial Tone (Regular/Machine) Last Number Redial Line Assignment Line Assignment (Custom) Line Reserve Line Restrictions Line Ringing Options Line Type (CO/PBX) Loudspeaker Paging Manual Signaling Message Light On/Off - system phones Message Light On/Off - standard phones Music On Hold - External Source Night Service On-Hook Dialing One Touch Transfer Outgoing Call Restriction Button Outgoing Call Restriction Levels Outside Autodial PBX Dial Out Code (1 digit) Password Restriction Override Personal Line Termination Personal Speed Dial Numbers Privacy
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R 4.0
R 4.1
yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes
-
-
-
yes
yes
yes
yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-12
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER Plus Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner Plus Feature Real Time Clock Recall - CO/Intercom Ringing Line Preference Ringing at Busy Telephone (abbrev. or continuous) Ringing on Transfer Save Number Redial Second Attendant Position Send All Calls Senderized Dialing Operation Senderized Dialing (Enhanced) Simultaneous Paging Square Operation Station Lock Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Output System ID System Programming (LCD based via Ext. 10) System Programming (LCD based via Ext. 10 or 11) System Speed Dialing (60) System Speed Dialing (100) Touch-Tone enable Transfer Transfer Return Transfer Return To Programmable Extension Transfer Return Identification VMS Cover Button VMS Cover Ring Interval VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule VMS Support - PARTNER MAIL VS VMS Support - PARTNER MAIL
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R 4.0
R 4.1
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes -
yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
-
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes -
yes -
yes -
yes -
-
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes -
yes -
yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-13
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER Plus Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner Plus Feature Voice Interrupt on Busy Voice Interrupt on Busy - Talk-back Voice Mailbox Button Volume Backup/Restore Volume Control - Handset Volume Control - Ringer Volume Control - Speaker Wake Up Service
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R 4.0
R 4.1
yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-14
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER II Features/Functionality Compatibility PARTNER II Features Account Code Entry Allowed/Disallowed Lists Automatic Extension Privacy Automatic Line Selection Automatic System Answer Automatic System Answer Mode Automatic VMS Cover Background Music Bridging (Joining Calls) Built-In-Speakerphone (BIS) Operation (coupled) Call Coverage Call Follow Me (Intercom) Call Forwarding (Intercom) Call Park Call Pickup Call Waiting (T/R exts) Caller ID (ETR and SMDR) Central Telephone Programming from the Attendant Conference Button (for CENTREX) Conference - CO-CO Conference - Outside Conf Denial Conference - Call Drop Conference - CO-ICOM Conference - ICOM-ICOM Copy Settings DTMF Receivers Dial Mode (Rotary/Touch-Tone) Differentiated Ringing - CO/ICOM/Xfer Direct Facility Termination
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R4
R 4.1
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes opt. yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes opt. yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-15
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER II Features/Functionality Compatibility R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R4
R 4.1
-
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
End to End Signaling (manual)
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
Extension Hunt Grps
6 grps
6 grps
Extension Programming
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
PARTNER II Features Direct Grp Calling (CO Hunt, Grp Call Dist) Direct Line Pick-up - Active Direct Line Pick-up - Idle DSS/BLF Adjunct Support Display - Call Timer Display - Int. Calling Party ID - Number Display - Int. Calling Party ID - Name Display - Clock/Date/Day of Week Display - Display Number Dialed Display - Identify Display Language Eng/Span/Fr per Extension Display - My Extension Display - Transfer Return Identification Do Not Disturb Doorphones DXD (Direct Extension Dial) Emergency Number List Emergency Telephone (External Hotline) Enhanced T/R (ETR)
Extension Test Facility Post-select Facility Preselect Facility Status Information Fax Management Button Feature Button Follow CO Ringing
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
7 (7th is VM 7 (7th is VM 7 (7th is VM 7 (7th is VM Call. Group)
Call. Group)
Call. Group)
Call. Group)
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes -
Avaya - Proprietary 9-16
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER II Features/Functionality Compatibility PARTNER II Features Forced Account Code Entry Forced Account Code List (Verification) Forward Disconnect Grp Pickup Grp Calling/Paging with Pickup Grp Listen Inhibit Hands-Free Answer On Intercom (HFAI) Hold Hold - Exclusive Hold Rls On Abandon Hold Reminder Tone Hotline Howler Tone (no timeout) Hybrid Mode Idle Intercom Timeout Intercom Autodial - Ring (Ext. No.) Intercom Autodial - Voice Sig. (* plus Ext.No.) Intercom Call - Ring Intercom Call - Voice Signal Intercom Dial Tone (Regular/Machine) Intercom Ring (1 burst) [Distinctive Ring] Last Number Redial Line Access Restrictions (Class of Svc) Line Assignment Line Assignment - Custom Line Pools Line Reserve Line Ringing Options
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R4
R 4.1
-
-
yes -
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
4 grps
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes -
yes yes -
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes yes 3
yes yes yes 3
yes yes yes 3
yes yes yes 3
yes yes yes yes 3
yes yes yes yes 3
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-17
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER II Features/Functionality Compatibility Loudspeaker Paging PARTNER II Features Manual Signaling Message Light On/Off - system phones Message Light On/Off - standard phones Music On Hold - External Source Night Service On-Hook Dialing One Touch Transfer Outgoing Call Restriction Button Outgoing Call Restriction Levels Outside Autodial Password Restriction Override PBX Dialout Code (1 digit) Personal Line Termination Personal Speed Dial Numbers Prime Line Support Privacy Real Time Clock Recall - CO/Intercom Repertory Dialing (CENTREX) Ringing Line Preference Ringing at Busy Telephone (abbrev. or continuous) Ringing on Transfer Save Number Redial Second Attendant Position Send All Calls Senderized Dialing Operation Senderized Dialing (Enhanced) Simul. Paging (through Spkrs & Spkrphones)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R4
R 4.1
yes
yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
-
-
-
yes
yes
yes
yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes -
yes yes yes -
yes yes yes -
yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-18
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER II Features/Functionality Compatibility Square Operation PARTNER II Features Station Lock Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Talk Time System ID System Programming (LCD based via Ext. 10 or 11) System Speed Dialing (60) System Speed Dials (100) Touch-Tone Enable Transfer Transfer Button (for CENTREX) Transfer Return Transfer Return Identification Transfer Return to Programmable Extension VMS Cover Button VMS Cover Ring Interval VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule VMS Support - PARTNER MAIL VS VMS Support - PARTNER MAIL Voice Interrupt on Busy Voice Interrupt on Busy - Talk-back Voice Mailbox Button
yes
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
R1
R2
R3
R 3.1
R4
R 4.1
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-
-
-
-
-
yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
-
-
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-19
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER II Features/Functionality Compatibility Volume Backup/Restore
Yes Yes Yes Yes -
Volume Control - Handset Volume Control - Ringer Volume Control - Speaker Wake Up Service
yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes -
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes
PARTNER Endeavor Features/Functionality Compatibility R 1.0
Partner Endeavor Feature Account Code Entry Allowed/Disallowed Lists (8 each) Automatic Extension Privacy Automatic Line Selection Automatic System Answer Automatic System Answer Mode Automatic VMS Coverage Background Music Backup Failure Alarm Backup Programming - Automatic Backup Programming - Manual Bridging (Joining Calls) Built-In-Speakerphone (BIS) Operation Call Coverage Call Follow Me (ICOM) Call Forwarding (ICOM) Call Park Call Pickup Call Waiting (for T/R extensions)* Caller ID
* **
yes yes yes yes Yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes**
Only Usable on Last 2 Extensions on Processor or EC Requires a PARTNER 2 X 24 Display Set (PARTNER 18D and 34D) Avaya - Proprietary
9-20
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER Endeavor Features/Functionality Compatibility R 1.0
Partner Endeavor Feature Caller ID Logging & Dialing
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
**
Caller ID Log Line Association
**
Caller ID Log Answered Calls
**
Caller ID Log All Calls
**
Caller ID Type
**
Central Telephone Programming from the Attendant CENTREX Mode Conference - CO-CO Conference - Outside Conf Denial Conference - CO Call Drop Conference - CO-ICOM Conference - ICOM-ICOM Contact Closure Copy Settings DTMF Receivers Dial Mode (Rotary/Touch-Tone) Direct Facility Termination Direct Grp Calling (CO Hunt) Direct Line Pick-up - Active Line Direct Line Pick-up - Idle Line Display - Call Timer Display - Internal Calling Party ID - Number Display - Int. Calling Party ID - Name Display - Clock/Date/Day of Week Display - Display Number Dialed Display Language Eng/Span/Fr per Extension Display - My Extension Display - Transfer Return Identification
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-21
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER Endeavor Features/Functionality Compatibility Partner Endeavor Feature Distinctive Ring - ICOM Ring (1 burst) Do Not Disturb
*
Doorphones DSS/BLF Adjunct Support DXD (Direct Extension Dial) Emergency Number List Emergency Telephone (External Hotline) Enhanced T/R (ETR) End to End Signaling (manual) Extension Hunt Grps Extension Programming Extension Test Facility Post-Select Facility Preselect Facility Status Information Fax Management Button Feature Button Forced Account Code Entry Forced Account Code List (Verification) Forward Disconnect Group Pickup Grp Calling/Paging with Pickup Hands-Free Answer On Intercom (HFAI) Hold Hold Disconnect Time Hold - Exclusive Hold Rls On Abandon Hold Reminder Tone
* *
R 1.0
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 7 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes* 4 grps 4 grps
yes yes yes yes yes yes
Usable on Last 2 Extensions on Processor or EC Usable on Last 2 Extensions on Processor or EC Avaya - Proprietary
9-22
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER Endeavor Features/Functionality Compatibility R 1.0
Partner Endeavor Feature Hotline Howler Tone (no timeout) Idle Intercom Timeout Intercom Autodial - Ring (Ext.No.) Intercom Autodial - Voice Sig. (* plus Ext. No.) Intercom Call - Ring Intercom Call - Voice Signal Intercom Dial Tone (Regular/Machine) Last Number Redial Line Assignment Line Assignment (Custom) Line Pools Line Reserve Line Restrictions Line Ringing Options Loudspeaker Paging Manual Signaling Message Light On/Off - system phones Message Light On/Off - standard phones Music On Hold - External Source Music on Hold Volume Night Service On-Hook Dialing One Touch Transfer Outgoing Call Restriction Button Outgoing Call Restriction Levels Outside Autodial Password Restriction Override Personal Line Termination Personal Speed Dial Numbers
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-23
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
PARTNER Endeavor Features/Functionality Compatibility R 1.0
Partner Endeavor Feature Privacy Programmable Make/Break Ratio Real Time Clock Recall - CO/Intercom Restore Programming Ringing Line Preference Ringing at Busy Telephone (abbrev. or continuous) Ringing on Transfer Save Number Redial Second Attendant Position Send All Calls Senderized Dialing Operation Senderized Dialing (Enhanced) Simultaneous Paging (No Loudspeaker Paging) Square Operation Star Code Dial Delay Station Lock Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Talk Time System ID System Programming (LCD based via Ext. 10 or 11) System Release Status System Speed Dialing (100) Touch-Tone enable Transfer Transfer Return Transfer Return To Programmable Extension Transfer Return Identification VMS Cover Button
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary 9-24
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
PARTNER Endeavor Features/Functionality Compatibility R 1.0
Partner Endeavor Feature VMS Cover Ring Interval VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule VMS Support - PARTNER MAIL VS VMS Support - PARTNER MAIL VMS Support – PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Voice Interrupt on Busy Voice Interrupt on Busy - Talk-back Voice Mailbox Button Volume Backup/Restore Volume Control - Handset Volume Control - Ringer Volume Control - Speaker Wake Up Service
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
9-25
®
PARTNER Access Guide Feature Compatibility
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 9-26
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide PARTNER Systems In a Nutshell
PARTNER ACS In a Nutshell Capacity: 3 X 8 expandable to 15 X 40 or 19 X 8 or 31x 8 Target: 5 to 15 stations Associated Hardware Processor, 206E, 206EC, 200E, 308EC, 400E 400EC, 1600 DSL modules Call Accounting Terminals Call Assistant MLS-CA24 or PARTNER CA48 (R3.0 and later) Contact Closure Adjunct Doorphones Headsets Industry Standard Tip/Ring Devices Loudspeaker Paging System Multi-Line Cordless Set Major Features Account Code Entry Background Music Backup Programming - Automatic Call Forward/Follow Me Caller ID Logging & Dialing Caller ID Name & Number Calling/Paging Groups (4) Call Park Call Screening Conferencing Contact Closure Group Direct Line Pickup DSL Support Enhanced T/R Connectivity Extension Hunt Groups (8) Fax Tone Detection Group Call Distribution Considerations
Associated Hardware Music-on-Hold PARTNER Alerts PARTNER Attendant PARTNER MAIL PARTNER Mail VS PARTNER Messaging PARTNER Voice Messaging Card Remote Access PC Card TransTalk® Major Features Hotel/Motel Features Hotline, Internal and External Manual Signaling Message Light On/Off Music-on-Hold Night Service Record-a-Call Remote Administration & Diagnostics Restore Programming Restriction Features Second Attendant Position Simultaneous Page SMDR Speed Dialing (System and Personal) Star Code Support Dial Delay Voice Interrupt on Busy
Maximum lines and stations cannot be reached simultaneously A maximum of four 308EC Modules can be added to the system (R2 and later only) Two different Doorphones are offered - the PARTNER Doophone Speaker and the Universal Doorphone Controller. Two PARTNER Doorphone Speakers may be connected to assigned station ports to alert from 1 to 39 extensions (if extension is assigned as a Doorphone Alert Extension). The first line on each 206E module and the first 2 lines on each 308 automatically connect to the first extension (206E) and the first and second extensions (308) in the event of a power failure. A single line set connected to that extension will be able to make and receive calls on the line.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
10-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide PARTNER Systems In a Nutshell
BTM428J
PARTNER In a Nutshell Capacity: 2 X 6 expandable to 4 X 12 Target: 2 to 4 stations Associated Hardware 206, 206E and 200E Modules 267F2 Bridging Adapter Industry Standard Tip/Ring Devices Loudspeaker Paging System Module Connector Music-on-Hold Coupler Off-Premises Range Extender
Associated Hardware PARTNER Doorphone PARTNER Extra Alerts PARTNER IROB Protector PARTNER Multi-Line Cordless PassageWay Remote Administration Unit TransTalk®
Major Features Dual LEDs Abbreviated Ringing Auto Dialing Auto-Line Selection Auto Privacy Conferencing Display Set Support Doorphone/Internal Hotline/External Hotline Enhanced Tip/Ring connectivity Group Paging Last Number Redial
Major Features Music Access Music-on-Hold/Tones on Hold Hold Outgoing Call Restriction Privacy Recall Remote Administration Ringing Options System Speed Dial Transfer (standard or one-touch) Unique Line Ringing
Considerations Limited Display Support No Transfer Return feature No Delayed Ring option System will not support 34-button PARTNER or MLS set No Paging Port: Line Port must be used to interface Loudspeaker paging system No support for SMDR/Call Accounting No Customized Line Assignment No Personal Speed Dial Numbers (can have Auto Dial numbers and System Speed Dial numbers) No lighting of message waiting light (lights only when set is in programming mode) No caller ID No Voice Messaging No Backup/Restore
Avaya - Proprietary 10-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide PARTNER Systems In a Nutshell
PARTNER Plus In a Nutshell Capacity: 2 X 6 expandable to 8 X 24 or 12 X 12 Target: 5 to 15 stations Associated Hardware Processor, 206E, 200E, 400E modules Call Accounting Terminals Call Assistant MLS-CA24 or PARTNER CA48 (R3.0 and later) Doorphones Headsets Industry Standard Tip/Ring Devices Loudspeaker Paging System Multi-Line Cordless Set Music-on-Hold
Major Features Account Code Entry Background Music Call Forward/Follow Me Calling/Paging Groups (4) Call Park Call Waiting for T/R sets Conferencing Direct Line Pickup Enhanced T/R Connectivity Extension Hunt Groups (7) Group Call Distribution Fax Management Hotel/Motel Features
Associated Hardware PARTNER Alerts PARTNER Attendant PARTNER MAIL (P+ R3.1 and later) PARTNER MAIL VS (P+ R3.1 and later) PARTNER Messaging PassageWay Remote Administration Unit TransTalk®
Major Features Hotline, Internal and External Manual Signaling Message Light On/Off Music-on-Hold Night Service Name on Display Remote Administration Restriction Features Second Attendant Position Simultaneous Page SMDR Speed Dialing (System and Personal) Voice Interrupt on Busy
Considerations No Caller ID (adjunct box in front of switch required) Maximum lines and stations cannot be reached simultaneously A maximum of two 400E Modules can be added to the system. Two different Doorphones are offered - the PARTNER Doorphone Speaker and the Universal Doorphone Controller. Two PARTNER Doorphone Speakers may be connected to assigned station ports to alert from 1 to 24 extensions (if extension is assigned as a Doorphone Alert Extension). The first line on each 206E module automatically connects to the first extension in the event of a power failure. A single line set connected to that extension will be able to make and receive calls on the line. Does not offer: hybrid mode (line pooling), Caller ID support, ASA, DXD, Call Coverage, SMDR Talk Time No Backup/Restore.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
10-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide PARTNER Systems In a Nutshell
BTM428J
PARTNER II In a Nutshell Capacity: 2 X 6 expandable to 16 X 48 or 24 X 24 Target: 10 to 30 stations Associated Hardware
Associated Hardware
Processor, 206E, 206EC, 200E, 400E, 400EC modules Call Accounting Terminals Call Assistant (MLS-CA24 or PARTNERCA48) Carrier with Processor module Doorphones Headsets Industry Standard Tip/Ring Devices Loudspeaker Paging Multi-Line Cordless Set
Major Features Account Code Entry (Forced/Regular) Auto System Answer Background Music Basic Line Pooling Call Coverage Call Forward/Follow Me Call Waiting for T/R sets Caller ID (R3.1 and later) with 206EC/400EC Calling/Paging Groups (4) Call Waiting for T/R sets Conferencing Direct Extension Dialing Direct Line Pickup Disallowed/Allowed Lists
Music-on-Hold PARTNER Alerts PARTNER Attendant PARTNER MAIL VS (P II R3.1 or later) PARTNER MAIL (P II R3.0 or later) PARTNER Messaging PassageWay Direct Connection Remote Administration Unit TransTalk®
Major Features Extended T/R Connectivity Extension Hunt Groups (7) Fax Management Hotel/Motel Features Hotline, Internal and External Manual Signaling Music-on-Hold Night Service Line Pooling Name on Display (ICM only) Remote Administration Simultaneous Page SMDR Speed Dialing (System and Personal) Voice Interrupt on Busy
Considerations Maximums cannot be reached simultaneously. A maximum of four 400E (or 400EC) Modules can be used, two per carrier. 206EC and 400EC are required for ICLID (Caller ID). Two different Doorphones are offered - the PARTNER Doorphone Speaker and the Universal Doorphone Controller. Two PARTNER Doorphone Speakers may be connected to assigned station ports to alert from 1 to 48 extensions (if extension is assigned as a Doorphone Alert Extension). The first line on each 206E module automatically connects to the first station port in the event of a power failure. A single line set connected to the station port will be able to make and receive calls on the respective line. System programming can be accomplished from either extension 10 or 11. No Backup / Restore
Avaya - Proprietary 10-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide PARTNER Systems In a Nutshell
PARTNER Endeavor In a Nutshell Capacity: 3 X 8 expandable to 15 X 40 Target: 5 to 15 stations Associated Hardware Processor, 206E, 206EC, 200E, 362EC, 400E, 400EC modules Call Assistant MLS-CA24 or PARTNER CA48 (R3.0 and later) Doorphones Headsets Industry Standard Tip/Ring Devices Loudspeaker Paging System Multi-Line Cordless Set Music-on-Hold PARTNER Alerts Major Features Account Code Entry Background Music Backup Programming - Automatic Call Forward/Follow Me Caller ID Logging & Dialing Call Park Call Waiting for T/R sets Conferencing Direct Line Pickup Enhanced T/R Connectivity Extension Hunt Groups (7) Group Call Distribution Fax Management Hotel/Motel Features
Associated Hardware PARTNER Attendant PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS PARTNER Messaging PARTNER Voice Messaging Card PassageWay Remote Administration Unit TransTalk® Major Features Hotline, Internal and External Manual Signaling Message Light On/Off Music-on-Hold Night Service Name on Display Remote Administration Restore Programming Restriction Features Second Attendant Position Simultaneous Page Speed Dialing (System and Personal) Star Code Support Dial Delay Voice Interrupt on Busy
Considerations Maximum lines and stations cannot be reached simultaneously A maximum of four 362EC Modules can be added to the system. Two different Doorphones are offered - the PARTNER Doorphone Speaker and the Universal Doorphone Controller. Two PARTNER Doorphone Speakers may be connected to assigned station ports to alert from 1 to 39 extensions (if extension is assigned as a Doorphone Alert Extension). Only one PCMCIA card slot. No paging port, No SMDR port, No Contact Closure Adjunct port Tip and Ring equipment will only be fully functional on last two station ports.
NOTE: Caller ID Logging and Dialing does work on Endeavor, but will work only on 18, 18D, or 34D with a 2X24 display.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
10-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide PARTNER Systems In a Nutshell
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 10-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Testing Power Outlet
AC Outlet Voltage Test Points
Neutral
Phase
G Test Leads
110 to 125 Volts Neutral
Phase
G Test Leads
Neutral
Phase 110 to 125 Volts G
Test Leads
BTM428J08.cdr
Less than 1 Volt
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
11-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Testing Power Outlet
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 11-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Pin Assignments
RJ11W One CO Line
Single-Line Adapter (RJ11)
T R
D2R Cord
1
2
3
4
5
6
Miniature 6-Position Jack
RJ11 Jack Pin Assignment
Two-Line Adapter (RJ14) D2R Cords
RJ14W Two CO Lines
T1 R1 T2 R2
1< 2< 3< 4< 5< 6< 1
2
3
4
5
6
Miniature 6-Position Jack
<1 <2 <3 <4 <5 <6 <1 <2 <3 <4 <5 <6 BTM428J33.cdr
RJ14 Jack Pin Assignment
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
12-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Pin Assignments
BTM428J
206 or 308 Module Extension Jack Pin Assignments COLine Jacks 2 Pair - 8 Position
LED 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BTM428J31.cdr
Extension Jacks
The ETR (Enhanced Tip/Ring) wiring protocol used by the six extension jacks on a 206 or 308 Module carries voice and power over the voice pair (T/R) in a loop arrangement identical to the standard telephone wiring. Control and control power are carried in a similar loop arrangement over the control pair (CT/CR) The following table lists the pin assignments for the extension jacks on a 206 or 308 Module.
Pin Number
Lead Designation
Lead Potential
Lead Color
1
Spare
--------
--------
2
Spare
--------
--------
3
CT
GRD
Green/White
4
R
-48V
Blue/White
5
T
GRD
Blue/White
6
CT
-48V
Green/White
7
Spare
--------
--------
8
Spare
--------
--------
The control pair, CT (GRD) and CR –48V) leads, are the power leads to the MLS telephone. The Tip (GRD) and Ring (-48V) leads are the power and voice pair for the standard telephone.
Avaya - Proprietary 12-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Pin Assignments
WIRING DISTANCE LIMITATIONS System Telephones
WIRE TYPE (AWG)
MAXIMUM DISTANCE (feet)
MAXIMUM DISTANCE COMBINED WITH TINSEL (feet)
#22
1580
plus 14 = 1594
#24
1000
plus 14 = 1014
#26
400
plus 14 = 414
D8W Stranded (twisted pairs)
400
plus 14 = 414
D4BU
14
---------------
Standard Tip/Ring Telephones
WIRE TYPE (AWG)
MAXIMUM DISTANCE (feet)
#22
3580
#24
3000
#26
2630
Stranded
2100
Tinsel
14
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
12-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Pin Assignments
BTM428J
MLS-series telephones
Interc
om Interc
om
Ext.
Fea ture Conf
Mic HF AI Spkr
Mess
1
Tra nsf r
AB C DEF
3
JKL
5
7
MN
6
TUV
*
age
2
GH I
4 PQ RS
Hold
8
O
WX YZ
9
0
#
PARTNER-18D® Phone
sm1501a48a.cdr
PARTNER-series phones have the 267F2 bridging adapter built right into the phone.
Avaya - Proprietary 12-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Pin Assignments
Extension Wiring Example
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
12-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Pin Assignments
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 12-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Installing MLS-CA24
Connecting MLS-CA24 Intercom Autodialers Since the autodialer has a fixed stand, you may need to adjust the height of the system phone – by installing a stand – to match the height of the autodialer. Refer to Step 2 of 'Desk Mounting" under 'Assembling System Phones" for instructions. You can wall mount an Intercom Autodialer to work next to a wall-mounted system phone; however, wall-mounting system display phones is not recommended. The following instructions are for desk mounting. One Autodialer
1
A)
Unplug the phone's modular telephone cord from the jack on the bottom of the phone and the wall jack, and save the cord for Step 1D.
B)
Plug one end of the D8W cord supplied with the autodialer into the jack on the bottom of the phone. (If the phone has multiple jacks, plug the cord into the GRAY jack.)
C)
D)
2
Route the other end through the groove at the back of the autodialer and plug it into the OUT jack. Route one end of the modular telephone cord through the groove at the back of the autodialer and plug it into the IN jack; plug the other end into the wall jack for extension 10 or
A)
Connect the keyed power cord supplied with the autodialer to the POWER jack on the bottom of the autodialer, routing it through the groove as you did in Step 1.
B)
If the keyed power cord is not attached to the power unit, plug the free end of the cord into the modular jack on the power unit; otherwise, go to Step 2C.
C)
Plug the power unit into an electrical outlet.
To phone
Wall Jack Power Unit
In
Out Power
BTM428J25.cdr
CAUTION: Use only the power unit supplied by Avaya with the MLS-CA24 Intercom Autodialer.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
13-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Installing MLS-CA24
3
A)
BTM428J
Arrange the autodialer on your desk next to the phone.
MLS-3
Volume
B)
Feature
1
Conf
Remove the plastic cover from the autodialer and label the button sheet with employee names. Place the button sheet back on the autodialer, then carefully replace the plastic cover.
Spkr
4
Transfer
Mic
2
GHI
5
PQRS
Hold
4D
7
8
ABC
Message
3
JKL
6
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
9
Oper
0
#
1 010.cdr
Two Autodialers
1
A)
B)
Unplug the phone’s modular telephone cord from the jack on the bottom of the phone and the wall jack, and save the cord for Step 2B. Plug one end of the D8W cord supplied with the autodialer into the jack on the bottom of the phone. (If the phone has multiple jacks, plug the cord into the GRAY jack.)
Wall Jack
To phone Power Unit
In
Power Unit
Out Power
BTM428J06.cdr
2
C)
Route the other end through the groove at the back of the autodialer and plug it into the OUT jack.
A)
Using the second D8W cord, connect the two autodialers together: plug one end of the cord into the IN jack on the first autodialer, and plug the other end into the OUT jack on the second autodialer.
B)
Using the modular telephone cord from Step 1 A, route one end through the groove at the back of the second autodialer and plug it into the IN jack; plug the other end into the wall jack for extension 10 or 11
Avaya - Proprietary 13-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
3
4
PARTNER Access Guide Installing MLS-CA24
A)
Connect the keyed power cord supplied with the autodialer to the POWER jack on the bottom of the autodialer, routing it through the groove as you did in Step 1.
B)
If the keyed power cord is not attached to the power unit, plug the free end of the cord into the modular jack on the power unit; otherwise, go to Step 3C.
C)
Plug each power unit into a separate electrical outlet (or both into a power strip).
A)
Arrange the autodialer on your desk next to the phone.
B)
Remove the plastic cover from the autodialer and label the button sheet with employee names. Place the button sheet back on the autodialer, then carefully replace the plastic cover.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
13-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Installing MLS-CA24
BTM428J
Connecting a PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialers The PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialer is shipped with an adapter, a D8W line cord, a power cord, a power unit, and a button labeling sheet. NOTE: The PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialer can be wall mounted to work next to a wall-mounted system phone.
1 2
3
Plug the adapter into the wall jack. A) Plug one end of the D8W line cord into the J1 jack on the adapter. B)
Plug the other end of the D8W line cord into the IN jack on the bottom of the autodialer.
A)
Plug the blue-tinted connector (labeled D8AC) of the power cord into the jack on the power unit. CAUTION: Use only the power unit supplied with the PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialers.
BTM428J25.cdr
I
B)
Plug the other end (clear tinted) of the power cord into the J2 jack on the adapter.
C)
Plug the power unit into an electrical outlet.
4
Plug the phone’s modular telephone cord into the OUT jack on the bottom of the autodialer.
5
A)
Arrange the autodialer on the desk next to the phone.
MLS34D
Volume
Feature
1
Conf
B)
C)
Remove the plastic cover from the autodialer and label the button sheet with employee names. Place the button sheet on the autodialer, then carefully replace the plastic cover. Adjust the height of the autodialer to match the system phone.
Spkr
4
Transfer
Mic
2
GHI
5
PQRS
Hold
7
8
ABC
Message
3
JKL
6
TUV
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
9
Oper
0
#
1 010.cdr
IMPORTANT: If you unplug the system phone that is connected to an autodialer, you must reset the autodialer. To do so, unplug the D8W line cord (connected to the IN jack on the bottom of the autodialer) from the J1 jack on the adapter, then plug in back in. Avaya - Proprietary 13-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide System Restart (Erase)
Performing a System Restart (Erase) 1. From extension 10 or 11, press [Feature] [0] [0]. 2. Press System Program [Left Intercom] System Program [Left Intercom] 3. Press [#] [9] [8] [9] •
The display will read “Restart Defaults”
4. Press the letters [C] [L] [E] [A] [R] on the keypad • •
This will automatically cause the extension to exit from Programming Mode. The letters [C] [L] [E] [A] [R] = 25327
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
Page 14-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide System Restart (Erase)
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary Page 14-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide System Identifier
System Identifier The System Identifier makes it possible to remotely identify the release number of any PARTNER, PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor or PARTNER II system. Have the person calling press FEATURE #1 while active on a CO line. Count the beeps and look up the release number on the chart below.
Touch-Tone Signals
PARTNER PARTNER PARTNER ACS Plus
Release 1
5-1
1
2
PARTNER II
PARTNER Endeavor
2-1
small=2-1-1 large=2-2-1
Release 2 Release 3.0
5-1-1
3
4
2-2
5-3
1-3
2-4
3-1
1-3
1-2
1-4
2-3
3-2
3-3
-
-
3-4
4-1
4-2
4-3
Release 3.1 Release 4.0
5-4-1
Release 4.0.1 Release 4.1
Example:
PARTNER II R3.0 would return 3 beeps, a 1.5 second pause, followed by 1 additional beep.
In addition, the PARTNER ACS has a feature called System Release Status (F59). Pressing FEATURE 59 from any system display telephone will display the product name, release number and country code of the PARTNER ACS for 15 seconds on the top line of the display. The country code for the U.S. and Atlas countries is “01”. For example, the following information will display for a PARTNER ACS Release 1.0 in the U.S: P ACS R1.0 CO1 P ACS R4.0 CO1
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
15-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide System Identifier
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 15-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Model Z300A Filter
Model Z300A Filter For PARTNER System Telephones and Industry-Standard TipRing Telephones.
Important Safety Instructions Always follow these basic safety precautions when installing the Z300A filter: 1. Read and understand all instructions. 2. Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals, unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. 3. Use caution when installing this product on telephone lines. 4. DO NOT install this product on telephone wiring during a lightning storm. 5. Never install this product in a wet location. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Parts Enclosed
Modular Jack
Modular Jack EMI Filter 2 ft 4 Conductor (D4BU) Modular Cord
BTM428J29.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
16-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Model Z300A Filter
BTM428J
Low Severity (1 filter) 2 ft Modular Cord Building Wire
COLine Z300A
Telephone
Control Unit
Medium Severity (2 filters) 2 ft Modular Cord Building Wire
COLine
Z300A
Z300A
Telephone
Control Unit
OR
2 ft Modular Cord Building Wire
COLine Z300A
Z300A Telephone
Control Unit
High Severity (3 filters) 2 ft Modular Cord Building Wire
COLine Z300A
Z300A Control Unit
Z300A Telephone
BTM428J30.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary 16-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Model Z300A Filter
Description and Compatibility X
When installed between a control unit and telephone, the Z300A filter alleviates electromagnetic interference (EMI). If protects the phone from conducted interference (static noise from radio and TV sources.)
X
The filter protects the following devices from EMI: ♦ Enhanced tip-ring PARTNER, PARTNER Plus, PARTNER Endeavor, PARTNER II and PARTNER ACS system telephones (MLC-6 and all MLS-series telephones, and PARTNER telephones.) ♦ Industry-standard tip-ring telephones (such as 2500 sets) and other devices with integrated telephones (such as answering machines and fax machines.)
Installation 1. Determine the number of filters necessary. This depends on the severity of the interference: X
Low severity = 1 filter
X
Medium severity = 2 filter
X
High severity = 3 filters (example: radio stations)
2. Refer to the diagrams on the next page for placement instructions. (Note that the maximum distance between the filter and the control unit or telephone is 2 feet.) 3. Connect wires a. Connect one end of the 2-foot D4BU cord to a modular jack on the filter. Then connect the other end of the cord to a modular jack on the control unit, telephone, or another Z300A filter. b. Connect the CO line or building wire to the modular jack on the other end of the filter. NOTE: When installing filters for the PARTNER Plus/II/ACS/Endeavor systems, route the D4BU cord from the line or extensions jacks through the slots in the bottom of the control unit, to make it easier to reseal the control unit cover.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
16-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Model Z300A Filter
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 16-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide End User Training Checklist
END-USER TRAINING CHECKLIST
❏
Step 1:
❏
Establish Rapport
- Greet receptionist - State purpose of visit - Ask for person to be trained or alternate (refer to System Planner) - Emphasize that the person to be trained will be responsible for training the rest of the customer’s staff
❏
Step 2:
-
Review System Planner
- Make sure customer has System Planner - Explain importance of System Planner to customer - Verify that all forms have been completed - Verify that no changes are required - Review restriction options
❏
❏
-
Position Training and Timeframes - Explain installation process - Discuss installation timeframes - Schedule a time for customer training
❏
Show Customer Documentation
Step 5:
Install System
❏
-
-
-
- Install the PARTNER system Step 6: -
Perform System and Telephone Programming Perform System Programming Program and label telephones Test system operation Notify the customer when you are done with installation and programming
Train Customer on Telephone Layout Show customer telephones Review physical layout of telephones Distinguish number of buttons on telephone from number of lines Explain: • Fixed Feature Buttons (Hold, Transfer, Drop, etc.) • Line, Intercom, and Pool (P II only) Buttons • Programmable Feature Buttons • Other parts of telephone such as display, volume control, and speakerphone Discuss programmable features of interest to the customer Explain function and layout of Call Assistant if ordered
Step 8: -
- Show the customer the appropriate PARTNER system documentation (if available) - Explain that the documentation will be used during training - Ask the customer to review documentation while you are completing the hardware installation
❏
-
Step 3:
Step 4:
Step 7:
-
Train Customer on Basic Call Handling Make sure customer knows how to place, answer, transfer, conference and hold calls Use the following training approach to teach customers call handling procedures: • Discuss feature (i.e., operation, application, benefit) • Demonstrate operation • Provide practice • Test understanding Explain operational differences between system, standard, and feature phones, including Power Failure Transfer. Explain limitations on standard phones and devices due to touch-tone receiver availability. Discuss other optional features, such as Auto Dialing and Privacy. Make sure customer knows how to access pools for calls (P II only). If customer has PARTNER Mail VS, show customer how to log into Tutor.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
17-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide End User Training Checklist
BTM428J
END-USER TRAINING CHECKLIST
❏
Step 9:
❏
Explain Programming Procedures
Step 11:
Give Customer Number to Call for Help
- Explain how to use the system programming telephones (extensions 10 and 11, as applicable).
- Discuss number customer can call
- Show system programming overlays
- Discuss warranty coverage
- Demonstrate how to enter/exit programming mode; explain Cycle and Direct programming • Refer customers to System Programming Reference in the Installation, Programming and Use Guide - Explain how to perform Centralized and Extension Programming • Refer customers to Telephone Programming Reference in the Installation, Programming and Use Guide
- Encourage customer to call with questions on programming
❏
Step 12:
Thank Customer for Purchasing the Avaya System
- Ask customer: "Is there anything else I can help you with?" - Use farewell greeting: "Thank you for doing business with us."
- Test the customer by having the person program a System Speed Dial Number - Remind the customer to keep the System Planner up to date - Explain the difference between System and Station programming at extension 10 and 11
❏
Step 10:
Explain Reference Material
- Make sure the customer is familiar with all PARTNER family documentation - Make sure the customer understands the function of each document and how to use it before training others - Recommend that the customer keep the System Planner and Programming Overlays in a safe place - Refer the customer to the Avaya Customer Support web page: http://support.avaya.com.
Avaya - Proprietary 17-2
Issue 6, May 2001
BTM428J
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
Instructions for Setting Up Hybrid (Pooled) Operation Introduction PARTNER II Release 4.0 (& later), ACS R2 and later, and Endeavor add a Line Pooling feature to the PARTNER product line. Pooling allows customers to partition lines into groups or “pools.” These systems will support four types of pools: a main pool and three auxiliary pools.
Terminology Key Mode (KF) – Key mode refers to a method of accessing lines. In Key mode, each line is represented on a unique button on a user’s set. Key mode is the line access method supported by current versions of the PARTNER product line. As such, a system configured for KEY mode will exhibit the same line access behavior as previous releases. Hybrid Mode (MF) – Hybrid mode also refers to a method of accessing lines. In Hybrid mode, lines can be partitioned in groups or “pools.” These pools can then be represented by buttons on a user’s set.
Tool Required for Mode Change To change the mode of operation of the system a 3/32” diameter flat-head tool is required.
Default Configuration By default, all PARTNER II Release 4.0 (& later), PARTNER ACS R2 and later, and PARTNER Endeavor processors will be shipped in the KF (Key mode) position.
Switch Location The switch is located in the lower right-hand corner, on the right side of the processor module, (see Fig. 1). The switch entry can be identified by a small hole that is labeled “KF MF.” NOTE: On ACS R2 and later and Endeavor there is no “switch”. Line Pooling is password activated.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
18-1
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
BTM428J
PARTNER II R4.0 (& later) Process Module
PA E SMDR
P cess e R41
R
A
P
Avaya - Proprietary 18-2
Issue 6, May 2001
BTM428J
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
Mode Change To change the mode operation of the system, perform the following procedure: 1. Turn system power off. 2. Remove the processor module from the system. 3. Insert the 3/32” flat-head tool down into the mode operation hole (see Fig. 2) until the tool is positioned in the switch. NOTE: Do not force the tool into the hole. The tool needs to enter two holes (see fig. 2) before the switch is reached. DO NOT use excessive force when turning the switch. The switch should only turn about 90 degrees (quarter turn) in either direction before the stop is reached. Excessive force will damage the processor. If the system is a new install, the switch only needs to be changed if the customer wants MF (Hybrid mode) operation. 4. For MF (Hybrid mode), turn the switch fully to the right (clockwise). For KF (Key mode), turn the switch fully to the left (counter-clockwise). 5. Replace the processor module back into the carrier. 6. Turn on system power.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
18-3
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
BTM428J
Verification of Mode operation To verify the mode operation of the system perform the following procedure: 1. From extension 10 or 11 enter system programming mode. 2. Attempt to enter any one of the following Hybrid mode procedures: #207 – Pool Line Assignment. #314 – Pool Extension Assignment. #315 – Pool Access Restrictions. If you hear an error tone when you attempt to access the procedures, the system is configured for KF (Key mode) operation. If you are successful at entering any if the above procedures (no error tone, and receive the procedure options), then the system is configured for MF (Hybrid mode) operation. 3. Exit system program mode or continue programming the pool assignments: #207 – Pool Line Assignment. #314 – Pool Extension Assignment. #315 – Pool Access Restrictions. NOTE: See PARTNER® II Communication System R4.0 (& later), Programming and Use or the System Programming Quick Reference, for more information on setting up for Hybrid (Pooled) or Key Operation.
Avaya - Proprietary 18-4
Issue 6, May 2001
BTM428J
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
Step 1 Troubleshooting the PARTNER® System for a Possible Blown Fuse:
Remove cover (if applicable)
With power cord connected, turn unit on with known good 200, 206 or 400 modules installed (test modules separately)
Any Green LED on?
Yes
No Toggle On/Off Switch on and off several times
Hear relays clicking in 206 modules?
Yes
No Go to step 2 to repair or send to repair center for repairs
Fuse is OK Mo1213a01.cdr
BTM428J12.CDR
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
18-5
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
BTM428J
Step 2 Removing the Power Backplane 2A Removing the Power Backplane For a Release 4 and later 5-Slot Carrier (PEC 60561): A. Turn On/Off Switch to the off position. B. Unplug the unit from the wall outlet and remove the carrier’s Power Cord. C. Remove each module from the carrier D. Loosen the four screws securing the carrier to the wall and remove the carrier from the wall. (It is not necessary to completely remove the screws.) E. Using a flat head screwdriver, remove the three screws on the back of the carrier that secure the rear cover. F. Slide the rear cover to the left and remove it from the carrier. G. Lift the backplane straight up to remove it from the carrier.
Avaya - Proprietary 18-6
Issue 6, May 2001
BTM428J
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
2B Removing the Power Backplane for a 5-Slot Carrier Earlier than Release 4 (PEC 60624): A. Turn On/Off Switch to the off position. B. Unplug the unit from the wall outlet. C. Remove each module from the carrier D. Using a flathead screw driver, remove the eleven (11) screws securing the (white) power shield against the back of the carrier covering the 824 power backplane. E. Remove the one screw on the upper (power backplane) printed wiring board, securing the strap between the power and signal backplane boards. F. Loosen the screw on the lower (signal backplane) printed wiring board. G. Remove the white shield. (The power backplane should now be completely exposed.)
D.
G.
E. F. BTM428J13.cdr
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
18-7
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
BTM428J
Step 3 Replacing the fuse
Fuse BTM428J14.cdr
Fuse Replacement for Carriers prior to Release 4
Fuse Replacement for Release 4 and later Carriers
A. Remove the power backplane from the carrier and place it on a flat surface. B. Using the edge/end of the screwdriver (or similar tool), pry one end of the fuse away from its holder. When fully removed at one end, grab the fuse between the thumb and index finger and remove it completely. C. Test the fuse with Ohmmeter, If the fuse has high resistance replace fuse. To re-assemble the power backlane into the carrier, execute the above instructions in the reverse order. Avaya - Proprietary 18-8
Issue 6, May 2001
BTM428J
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
Note: Replace the fuse with: Comcode number
406977587
Vendor
Wickmann
Part number
19181-062
Description: 4amp, 5mm x 20mm, 150v.time lag, high breaking capacity fuse or equivalent. For further specifications refer to the Wickmann catalog.
To Make PARTNER ACS or PARTNER Endeavor Hybrid Go into System programming X
Dial #198
X
Dial 863285
X
Dial 1 for key
X
Dial 2 for hybrid
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
18-9
PARTNER® Access Guide Pooled Operations
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 18-10
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Telephone Button Programming
Telephone Button Programming This job aid provides information about programming from a PARTNER-34D phone to MLS-phones and from an MLS-34D phone to PARTNER telephones. In these situations, be aware that the button you press at extension 10 or 11 (the programming extension) is likely to be in a different location than the button on the telephone to which the programming applies (the target telephone). If you are programming from a PARTNER-18D or MLS-18D phone, the button locations are the same. Use the illustrations in this Job Aid to facilitate programming from one telephone type to the other. Figure 1 shows the buttons on the PARTNER-34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each MLS telephone. (The letters on the PARTNER-34D Overlay in Figure 1 are printed on the Overlay. To help you program from an MLS-34D telephone, you may want to write the letters shown on the MLS-34D overlay on your overlay.) Figure 2 shows the buttons on the MLS-34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each PARTNER telephone. To program features on specific buttons at target telephones: 1.
Look at the figure with the overlay that matches the telephone at your programming extension.
2.
Find the location of the button in the picture of the target phone.
3.
Note the letter associated with that particular button
4.
Find the letter in the picture of the Programming Overlay
5.
Press that button on the programming extension.
For example, if you are using a PARTNER-34D telephone at extension 10 and you want to program Do Not Disturb on the top, leftmost button of an MLS-18D phone, refer to Figure 1, find the top, leftmost button on the MLS-18D phone and press the button labeled M on the PARTNER-34D Programming Overlay.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
19-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Telephone Button Programming
BTM428J
Figure 1: Programming Overlays Programming from a PARTNER 34-D Telephone MLS-6 Phone
Intercom
Intercom Ext. Volume Spkr
MLS-18D/12D/12 Phone PARTNER-34D Overlay
Message
Intercom
Intercom Ext. Volume
Speakerphone Spkr
Mic
HFAI
MLS-34D Phone
Ext. Intercom
Intercom
Avaya - Proprietary 19-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Telephone Button Programming
Figure 2: Programming Overlays Programming from an MLS-34D Telephone PARTNER-6 Phone
Intercom
Intercom
Ext.
Message
MLS-34D Overlay PARTNER-18D/18 Phone
Ext. Intercom
Message
Intercom
PARTNER-34D Phone
Ext. Intercom
Message
Intercom
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
19-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Telephone Button Programming
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 19-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Documentation
PARTNER ACS Release 4.0 Documentation Many of these documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235), or can be viewed online at: http://support.avaya.com. Title PARTNER ACS Document CD (see note below for documents included on the CD) PARTNER ACS R 4.0 Remote Administration Getting Started, Issue 2 18D Programming Overlay 34D Programming Overlay Template to Install Module
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-456-801
Comcode 700017957
518-456-166
700018013
N/A N/A N/A
847531688 847531696 848263596
Note: The CD included in the documentation package contains an electronic version of the following documents: • Installation, Programming and Use, Issue 2 (Document number 518-456-803) • Quick Reference Guide, Issue 2 (Document number 518-456-804) • System Planner, Issue 3 (Document number 518-456-161) • How to Use Your PARTNER Telephone – English, Issue 1 (518-457-701) • How to Use Your PARTNER Telephone – French, Issue 1 (518-457-701FRC) • How to Use Your PARTNER Telephone – Spanish, Issue 1 (518-457-701SPL) • Quick Reference Flow Charts Latin American Spanish (Document number 518457-601SPL) • PC Card Installation Instructions, Issue 4 (Document number 518-457-101) • Expanding Your PARTNER Advanced Communications System, Issue 2 (Document number 518-456-500) • PARTNER ACS Customer Support Document, Issue 2 (Document number 518456-163ADD) • Hong Kong R3 Addendum, Issue 2 (Document number 518-456-054HKADD)
Installation, Programming and Use, Remote Administration Getting Started, System Planner, and How to Use Your PARTNER Telephone are also available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center, using the document number.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
Page 20-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Documentation
BTM428J
PARTNER Release 4.1 Documentation The PARTNER System is no longer orderable. The following is a list of documents that were shipped with the system or components. Many of the documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235) or can be viewed online at http://support.avaya.com. If you are unable to locate a specific document, the documentation for PARTNER ACS can be substituted in most cases. ENGLISH Title Installation and Use 12 sets of User Instruction Cards Customer Letter
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-118 518-455-119 518-455-119A
Comcode 107542110 107542136 107604092
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-118SPD 518-455-119SPD
Comcode 107542151 107542144
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-118FRC 518-455-119FRC 518-455-119AFR
Comcode 107732869 107572810 107735854
SPANISH Title Customization Chart 12 sets of User Instruction Cards FRENCH Title Installation and Use 12 sets of User Instruction Cards Customer Letter
Avaya - Proprietary Page 20-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Documentation
PARTNER Plus Release 4.1 Documentation The PARTNER Plus System is no longer orderable. The following is a list of documents that were shipped with the system or components. Many of the documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235) or can be viewed online at: http://support.avaya.com. If you are unable to locate a specific document, the documentation for PARTNER ACS can be substituted in most cases.
ENGLISH Title Installation Programming and Use PARTNER-34D Programming Overlay PARTNER-18D Programming Overlay System Planner User Instruction Cards (11/pk) Programming a System with PARTNERModel and MLS-Model Telephones
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-227 518-455-228 847531696 847531688 518-455-338 518-455-340 518-455-013
Comcode 107879199 107879207 847531696 847531688 N/A 107879454 107879488
SPANISH Title PARTNER Plus Programming Quick Reference User Instruction Cards
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-228SPD
Comcode 107879363
518-455-340SPD
107970246
FRENCH Title PARTNER Plus Programming Quick Reference 12 Sets of User Instruction Cards
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-228FRC
Comcode 107879348
518-455-340FRC
107970220
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
Page 20-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Documentation
BTM428J
PARTNER II Release 4.1 Documentation The PARTNER II System is no longer orderable. The following is a list of documents that were shipped with the system or components. Many of the documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235) or can be viewed online at: http://support.avaya.com. If you are unable to locate a specific document, the documentation for PARTNER ACS can be substituted in most cases. ENGLISH Title Installation Programming and Use Programming and Use Addendum PARTNER-34D Programming Overlay PARTNER-18D Programming Overlay Instructions for Setting Up Hybrid (Pooled) Operation (Atlas countries only) User Instruction Cards (11/pk) Programming a System with PARTNERModel and MLS-Model Telephones System Planner
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-333 518-455-334
Comcode 107879223 107879231
847-531-696 847-531-688
847531696 847531688 107879249
518-455-340 518-455-013
107879454 107879488
518-455-338
SPANISH Title PARTNER II Programming Quick Reference 12 Sets of User Instruction Cards
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-334SPD 518-455-340SPD
Comcode 107879389 107879246
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-334FRC 518-455-340FRC
Comcode 107879355 107879220
FRENCH Title PARTNER II Programming Quick Reference 12 Sets of User Instruction Cards
Avaya - Proprietary Page 20-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Documentation
PARTNER Reporter Documentation The PARTNER Reporter System is no longer orderable. The following document was shipped with the system or components. It may be available the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235) or can be viewed online at: http://support.avaya.com. ENGLISH Title Installation and Use
Avaya PFC Order No. 518-455-720
Comcode 107966459
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
Page 20-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Documentation
BTM428J
MLC-6 Cordless Telephone Documentation The MLC-6 is no longer orderable. Many of the documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235) or can be viewed online at: http://support.avaya.com. ENGLISH Title MLC-6 Cordless Telephone: Installation and Troubleshooting MLC-6 Cordless Telephone Quick Reference: Display and Controls
Avaya PFC Order No. 999-506-143 999-506-146
Avaya - Proprietary Page 20-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Documentation
TransTalk® 9000 Digital Wireless Systems Many of these documents are available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235), or can be viewed online at: http://support.avaya.com. TransTalk® MDW 9040 Wireless Pocket Phone:
English Title Installation and Use (Issue 1) Installation and Use (Issue 2) Quick Reference (Issue 1) Quick Reference (Issue 2)
Avaya PFC Order No. 503-801-190 503-801-190 503-801-191 503-801-191
Comcode 108594409 700060940 108634106 700060437
French Title Quick Reference (Issue 1)
Avaya PFC Order No. 503-801-191FRC
Comcode 700059298
Spanish Title Quick Reference (Issue 1)
Avaya PFC Order No. 503-801-191SPL
Comcode 700059009
Brazilian/Portuguese Title Quick Reference (Issue 1)
Avaya PFC Order No. 503-801-191PTB
Comcode 700060445
TransTalk® MDW 9030/9031 DCP Wireless Pocket Phone:
English Title Installation and Use (Issue 3) Dual Zone Quick Reference (Issue 2) Quick Reference (Issue 2)
Avaya PFC Order No. 503-801-166 503-801-169 503-801-165
French Title Dual Zone Quick Reference (Issue 2)
Avaya PFC Order No. 503-801-165FRC
Spanish Title Dual Zone Quick Reference (Issue 2)
Avaya PFC Order No. 503-801-165SPL
Brazilian/Portuguese Title Dual Zone Quick Reference (Issue 1)
Avaya PFC Order No. 503-801-165PTB
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
Page 20-7
®
PARTNER Access Guide Documentation
BTM428J
Miscellaneous Documentation The following is a list of documents that were shipped with the named system or components. These documents may be available from the Avaya Publications Fulfillment Center (1-800-457-1235) or can be viewed online at: http://support.avaya.com. Title PARTNER Module Connector Installation Instructions 206 Expansion Module Installation Instructions 400 Expansion Module Installation Instructions PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialer Installation Instructions
Comcode 107542649 107542623 107542615 107542672
Avaya - Proprietary Page 20-8
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Training & Support
PARTNER ACS Training To register for one of the courses below or obtain a videotape (if indicated below), call the Avaya Registration Center at 904-636-3261.
Course
Number
Initial Sales Training for Business Partners (iTV)
BSS074B2
PARTNER ACS Sales (Classroom)
BSH620L2
PARTNER ACS Installation and Maintenance
BTH115B (iTV) BTH115V2 (Videotape)
PARTNER ACS Basic System Planning
BSP128B2 (iTV) BSP128V2 (Videotape)
PARTNER Access Guide
BTM428J (Job Aid)
PARTNER ACS R4 DSL Planning and Programming (Classroom)
BTT027H2
PARTNER ACS R4 Delta Installation and Maintenance
BTH111B2 (iTV) BTH111V2 (Videotape)
PARTNER ACS R4 Delta Sales
BSP046B2 (iTV) BSP046V2 (Videotape)
Avaya - Proprietary 21-1
Issue 6, May 2001
®
PARTNER Access Guide Training & Support
BTM428J
The following on-line support is available for the PARTNER Family:
Internal Avaya Associates: Avaya Net Internal Home Page http://associate.avaya.com/ Avaya University http://au.avaya.com Offers and Product Information http://associate2.avaya.com/sales_market/partner/ Internal Technical Information http://nsac2.sd.avaya.com/
Business Partners: Business Partner Product Information http://www.avaya.com/businesspartner/ Avaya University http://learning1.avaya.com
Customer Support Center: Avaya Support http://support.avaya.com/ Customer Training http://learning2.avaya.com/
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
21-2
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
PARTNER ACS Programming Quick Reference Flowcharts
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-1
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
System Programming Flow Chart—How to Use To use the following sets of Flow Charts, follow these instructions first: Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11. ■
To Start System Programming: — Press f 0 0 — Press s s
■
To End System Programming: — Press f 0 0
■
To Use a Specific Procedure: — Dial # and a three-digit procedure code. (Example: # 1 0 1 for System Date)
■
To Cycle through System Programming Procedures: — Press N or P
■
To Cycle Through Available Settings: — Press D or d
■
To Return to Factory Setting: — Press r Procedures #399, #609, and #728—shown in dashed boxes—are skipped when cycling Procedures # 207, #313, #314, and #315—shown in square dotted boxes—are for pools
Icon Description 4
= Factory setting = Button with lights required = Button with lights recommended
2.0
= PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later
3.0
= PARTNER ACS Revision 3.0 or later
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-2
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
System Flow Chart—System System Date
Outside Conference Denial
Ring On Transfer
Dial # 1 0 1 Dial the date (MMDDYY)
Dial # 1 0 9 Dial 1=Allowed 4 2=Disallowed
Dial # 1 1 9 Dial 1= Active 4 2=Not Active
System Day
2.0 or earlier
Dial # 1 0 2 Dial 1=Sun 4 2=Mon 3-Tue, 4=Wed, 5=Thur, 6=Fri, 7=Sat System Time
Dial # 1 0 3 Dial the time (HHMM-24 hr. military time) Number of Lines Dial # 1 0 4 Dial two digits (01-31) (R 4.0), or Dial two digits (01-19) (Prior to R 4.0), for # of outside lines assigned to every extension. 3 per ACS processor & 308EC module. 2 per 206 or 200 module 4. 4 per 400 module 4 WARNING Do not use Number of Lines (#104) after initial setup. In Key mode, the Number of lines procedure will change Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction (#302), Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings, use Line Assignment (#301) In Hybrid mode, the Number of Lines procedure will change Pool Line Assignment (#207), Pool Extension Assignment (#314), and Pool Access Restriction (#315). Additionally, it changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction (#302), Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing. To change pool assignments without affecting other settings, use Pool Line Assignment (#207) and Pool Extension Assignment (#314) Transfer Return Rings Dial # 1 0 5 Dial 1 digit (0-9) for # of rings before call returns. 0-9 rings 4 rings 4 Recall Timer Durations Dial # 1 0 7 Dial two digits (01-80) to set length of a switchook flash 4=18 (450 msec) Rotary Dialing Timeout Dial # 1 0 Dial 1=4 secs 2=8 secs 4 3=12 secs
8
Automatic System Answer Delay Dial # 1 1 0 Dial a ring delay number (0-9) 2 rings 4
2.0
Automatic System Answer Button 2.0 Dial # 1 1 1 Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 3=Select Button then press a programmable button Direct Extension Dial Delay Dial # 1 1 2 Dial a ring delay number (0-9), 2 rings 4 0 rings=answered immediately
2.0
Automatic System Answer Mode Dial # 1 2 1 Dial 1=Hold 4 2=Disconnect 3=Ring Caller ID Type Dial # 1 2 2 Dial 1=USA 4 2=Singapore Backup Programming Automatic Dial # 1 2 3 Dial 1=Active 2=Not Active 4 3=Backup Alarm Cleared
Direct Extension Dial Button Dial # 1 1 3 2.0 Dial 1=Assigned, 2=Not Assigned 4 3=Select Button then press a programmable button
Backup Programming—Manual Dial # 1 2 4 Press e to begin the backup
Outgoing Call Restriction Button Dial # 1 1 4 Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 3=Select Button then press a programmable button
Restore Programming
Wake Up Service Button
Dial # 1 2 6 Dial 1=Active 4 2=Not Active
3.0
Mode of Operation Press f 0 0 s
s#198
Call Coverage Rings
116
Press e to begin the restore Automatic Daylight/ Standard Times
Dial # 1 1 5 Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 3=Select Button then press a programmable button Dial # Dial 1-9 24
Dial # 1 2 5 Dial 1= MAN.mmddyy 4 2=AUTO.mmddyy
2.0 only
Enter the system password Dial 1=Key (factory setting) 4 2=Hybrid
VMS Cover Rings Dial # Dial 1-9 34
117
System Reset—Programming Saved IMPORTANT: Using this procedure disconnects any active calls but retains system settings. Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period. Dial # 7 2 8
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-3
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
System Flow Chart—System Speed Dial numbers
To program a number: Press f 00 to enter programming mode
To remove a number: Press f 00 to enter programming mode
Press f Dial a three-digit code (600-699) Dial the telephone number—up to 28 digits including special characters. To “mark” it (to override restrictions), dial * before the telephone # To program another number, or to change a number, repeat: Press N P, enter a new extension # and repeat above steps
Press f Dial the System Speed Dial number’s code (600-699) Press ! To remove another number, repeat: Press f 00 to exit programming mode
Press f 00 to exit programming mode
System Flow Chart—Lines
Dial Mode
Group Call Distribution
Dial # 2 0 1 Dial a system line number Dial 1=Touch-Tone 4 2=Rotary
Dial # 2 0 6 Dial a group number (1-6, 7 for VMS) Dial a system line # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 3= VMS Line Cover (only for Hunt Group 7)
Press n to program another line Hold Disconnect Time Dial # 2 0 3 Dial a system line # Dial 00=No Detection, 01=50 msec, 02=100 msec, 03=150 msec 04=200 msec, 05=250 msec, 06=300 msec 07=350 msec, 08=400 msec, 09=450 msec 4 10=500 msec, 11=550 msec, 12=600 msec Press n to program another line Automatic System Answer Lines Dial #
204
2.0
Dial a system line # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4
Press n to program another line Pool Line Assignment Dial # 2 0 7 Dial a system line # Dial 1=No Pool 2=Main Pool 880 4 3=Pool 881 4=Pool 882 5=Pool 883
2.0
Press n to program another line Line Coverage Extension Dial # 2 0 8 Dial a system line # then, a system extension # No line owned by an extension 4
Press n to program another line
Press n to program another line Direct Extension Dial Lines Dial # 2 0 5 Dial a system line # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 Press n to program another line
2.0
Press r to unassign ownership
Unique Line Ringing Dial # 2 0 9 Dial a system line # Dial 1 4 2-8
3.0
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-4
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
System Flow Chart—Extensions
Line Assignment
Transfer Return Extension
Dial # 3 0 1 Dial a system extension # To remove all existing line assignments, press r before selecting a line. Dial a line number Dial 1=Assigned 4 2=Not Assigned 3=Select Button then press a programable button (to assign the line to that button). If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned, the line moves from the old button to the new button you select.
Dial # 3 0 6 Dial a system extension # Dial # of extension (10-57) to which call should return if not answered, Extension transferring call 4
Press n to program another line for this extension To program another extension: Press N P, enter a new extension # and repeat above steps Line Access Restriction Dial # 3 0 2 Dial a system extension # Dial a system line # Dial 1=No Restriction 4, 2=Outgoing Only, 3=Incoming Only, 4=No Access (line appears on button, but you can use line only to pick up a transferred or held call) To program another extension: Press N P, enter a new extension number and repeat above steps Display Language Dial # 3 0 3 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=English 4 2=Spanish 3=French Press n to program another extension Automatic Extension Privacy Dial # 3 0 4 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4
Press n to program another extension Forced Account Code Entry Dial # 3 0 7 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 Press n to program another extension Distinctive Ringing Dial # 3 0 8 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Active 2=Not Active 4 Press n to program another extension Intercom Dial Tone Dial # 3 0 9 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Regular 4 2=Machine Press n to program another extension Automatic VMS Cover Dial # 3 1 0 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 Press n to program another extension External Hotline Dial # 3 1 1 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4
Press n to program another extension
Press n to program another extension
Abbreviated Ringing
Voice Interrupt On Busy
Dial # 3 0 5 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Active (1 ring) 4 2=Not Active (repeated ringing) Press n to program another extension
Dial # 3 1 2 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 Press n to program another extension
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-5
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
System Flow Chart—Extensions (Continued)
Line Access Mode Dial # 3 1 3 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Pooled 4 all extensions except 10 2=Key 4 extension 10 only
Caller ID Log Answered Calls 2.0
Dial # 3 1 7 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Active 2=Not Active 4
Press n to program another extension
Press n to program another extension
Pool Extension Assignment 2.0 Dial # 3 1 4 Dial a system extension # to remove existing pool assignments, press r before selecting a line Dial a pool access code (880, 881, 882, or 883) Dial 1=Assigned 4 880, 2=Not Assigned 4 881,882,883, 3=Select Button then press a programmable button (auxiliary pools only)
Caller ID Log Line Association Dial # 3 1 8 Dial a system extension # Dial a system line #
To associate another extension: Press N P, enter a new extension # and repeat above steps Caller ID Log All Calls
Pool Access Restriction Dial # 3 1 5 Dial a system extension # Dial a pool number (880, 881, 882, or 883) Dial 1=No Restriction 4 2=Outgoing Only 3=Incoming Only 4=No Access
Call Coverage Rings 2.0
To program another extension: Press N P to enter a new extension # & repeat above steps
Press n to program another extension
Dial # 3 1 9 Dial a system extension #
2.0
3.0
Dial # 3 2 0 Dial one digit (1-9) for the # of rings before the call is sent to the covering extension 2 rings 4
For Centralized Telephone Programming, see following pages
Press n to program another pool.
Dial # 3 1 6 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4
2.0
Press n to program another extension
Press N P to enter a new extension # & repeat above steps
Call Waiting
2.0
VMS Cover Rings
3.0
Dial # 3 2 1 Dial one digit (1-9) for the # of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging 3 rings 4 Copy Settings Dial # 3 9 9 Dial a source extension # Dial target extension #s
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-6
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
System Flow Chart—Dialing Restrictions and Permissions
Outgoing Call Restriction
Allowed Phone Number Lists
Dial # 4 0 1 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=No Restriction 4 2=Inside Only (intercom) 3=Local Only (intercom and local)
Dial # 4 0 7 Dial a list # (1-8) Dial a list entry (01-10) To add entry: Dial the telephone # (up to 12 digits)
Press n to program another extension
Press e Press r to remove a list entry
Toll Call Prefix Dial # 4 0 2 Dial 1=0/1 plus Area Code and # 4 2=Area Code and # only
Press n to program another list entry To program another list: Press N P to enter a new list # & repeat above steps
System Password Dial # 4 0 3 Dial four digits to set the password Allowed List Assignments Disallowed Phone Number Lists Dial # 4 0 4 Dial a list # (1-8) Dial a list entry (01-10) To add entry: Dial the telephone # (up to 12 digits) Press e Press r to remove a list entry Press n to program another list entry
Dial # 4 0 8 Dial a system extension # Dial a list # (1-8) Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 Press n to program another list To program another extension: Press N P to enter a new extension # & repeat above steps
To program another list: Press N P to enter a new list # & repeat above steps Forced Account Code List Disallowed List Assignments Dial # 4 0 5 Dial a system extension # Dial a list # (1-8) Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 Press n to program another list To program another extension: Press N P to enter a new extension # & repeat above steps
Dial # 4 0 9 Dial a list # (01-99) To add entry: Dial the account code (up to 6 digits) Press e Press r to remove a list entry Press n to program another list
Emergency Phone Number Lists
Star Code Dial Delay
Dial # 4 0 6 Dial a list # (01-10) To add entry: Dial the telephone # (up to 12 digits)
Dial # 4 1 0 Dial 0=0 Seconds Delay 4 1=1 Second Delay 2=2 Seconds Delay 3=3 Seconds Delay 4=4 Seconds Delay 5=5 Seconds Delay 6=Not Active
Press e Press r to remove a list entry Press n to program another list entry
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-7
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
System Flow Chart—Groups
Pickup Group Extension Dial # 5 0 1 Dial a group # (1-4) Dial an extension # (10-49) Dial 1=Assigned to group 2=Not Assigned to group 4 Press n to program another extension
Hunt Group Extensions Dial # 5 0 5 Dial a group # 1-6, 7 for VMS, 8 for fax detection (R 3.0) Dial a system extension # (10-49) Dial 1=Assigned to group 2=Not Assigned to group 4 Press n to program another extension
Calling Group Extensions Dial # 5 0 2 Dial a group # (1-4) Dial an extension # (10-49) Dial 1=Assigned to group 2=Not Assigned to group 4 Press n to program another extension
Night Service Button Dial # 5 0 3 Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 3=Select button then press a programmable button (to assign Night Service to that button) If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned, the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select
Night Service Group Extensions Dial # 5 0 4 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned to group 2=Not Assigned to group 4 Press n to program another extension
VMS Hunt Delay Dial #
506
Release 2.0 and earlier: Dial 1=Immediate 4 2=Delayed Release 3.0 and later: Dial 1=Day 2=Night Dial line number Dial 0-6 24
VMS Hunt Schedule Dial # 5 0 7 Release 2.0 and earlier: Dial 1=Always 4 2=Day Only 3=Night Only Release 3.0 and later: Dial line number Dial 1=Always 4 2=Day Only 3=Night Only Dial 0-6 24
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-8
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
System Flow Chart—Auxiliary Equipment
Fax Machine Extensions Dial # 6 0 1 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 Press n to program another extension Music-On-Hold Dial # 6 0 2 Dial 1=Active 4 2=Not Active Hotline Dial # 6 0 3 Dial the hotline extension # (not ext. 10 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules) Dial the alerted extension number (not the hotline) or 7 0 to paging system To remove the hotline and alert: Press r Doorphone 1 Extension Dial # 6 0 4 Dial any extension # (except 10, 11, or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules) To remove the doorphone extension: Press r Doorphone 2 Extension Dial # 6 0 5 Dial any extension (except 10, 11, or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules) To remove the doorphone extension: Press r Doorphone Alert Extension Dial # 6 0 6 Dial any extension # (except a doorphone extension) Dial 1=Not an alert 4 2=Doorphone 1 alert 3=Doorphone 2 alert 4=Doorphones 1 & 2 Press n to identify another extension (up to 48 alert extensions per doorphone) Automated Attendant Extensions Dial # 6 0 7 Dial a system extension # Dial 1=Assigned 2=Not Assigned 4 Press n to program another extension
SMDR Record Type Dial # 6 0 8 Dial 1=All calls 4 2=Outgoing calls only
SMDR Top Of Page Dial # 6 0 9
SMDR Output Format Dial # 6 1 0 Dial 1=15 digits 4 2=24 digits
SMDR Talk Time Dial # 6 1 1 Dial 1=Active 2=Not Active 4
2.0
Contact Closure Group Dial # 6 1 2 Dial a group # (1 or 2) Dial an extension # (10-49) Dial 1=Assigned to group 2=Not Assigned to group 4
Contact Closure Operation Type Dial # 6 1 3 Dial a Contact Closure (1 or 2) Dial 1=1-Second On 2=3-Seconds On 4 3=5-Seconds On 4=Toggle
Music-On-Hold Volume Dial # 6 1 4 Dial 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7=
+ + + + + + +
4
Remote Administration Password 3.0 Dial # 7 3 0 No Password (8 dashes display) Active password (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) Password can only be changed at Extension 10 or 11
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-9
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart—How to Use
11
To use the Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart, follow these instructions first: Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11. ■
To Enter Programming Mode:
— Press f 0 0 — Press s s c — Dial the extension number to be programmed. Buttons on to which lines or pools are assigned light up to show the current Line Ringing setting: remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial number or features. ■
To Program Another Feature at the Same Extension:
— After you program one feature, continue with the instructions in the box for the next feature. ■
To Change Setting For Another Extension
— Press c — Dial the new extension’s number ■
To Erase A Feature or Auto Dial Button:
— Press the programmed button — Press! ■
To End Programming Mode:
— Press f 0 0
Icon Description 4
= Factory setting = Button with lights required = Button with lights recommended
2.0
= PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later
3.0
= PARTNER ACS Revision 3.0 or later
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-10
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display first...then Line Ringing.
Automatic Line Selection Press * * Press the line/pool/intercom buttons in the desired order Press * * Key Extension: Outside lines i 4 Pooled Extension: Pool 880 button 1, button 2, i, right i 4 Pools 881-883, individual lines
OR Extension Name Display Press i Enter the character codes for the name (See table “Valid Character Entries”) Then Line Ringing Press each line or pool button until the desired ringing option appears in the display • Immediate ring (green steady)4 Lines • No ring (green fast flutter) 4 Pools • Delayed ring—starts ringing after 20 seconds (green slow flashing)
Personal Speed Dial Numbers Press f Dial a two-digit code (80-99) Dial the phone number—up to 28 digits including special functions (see “Special Dialing Functions”)
Auto Dial Numbers—Outside and Inside Press a programmable button To program an outside number: Dial the phone number—up to 28 digits including special functions (see “Special Dialing Functions”) To program an extension number: Press i Dial the extension number (to ring the extension) or * plus the extension number (to voice-signal the extension)
Account Code Entry Press a programmable button Press f
2.0
12
Background Music Press a programmable button Press f
19
Call Coverage Press a programmable button
2.0
Press f 2 0 Dial (optional) two-digit originating extension number Dial (optional) two-digit destination extension number
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me Press a programmable button Press f 1 1 Dial (optional) two-digit originating extension number Dial (optional) two-digit destination extension number Call Pickup Press a programmable button Press i 6 Dial the two-digit extension number Call Screening Press a programmable button with lights Press f
25
Caller ID Call Logging & Dialing Press a programmable button with lights Press f
2.0
17
Caller ID Name Display Press a programmable button with lights Press f
2.0
23
Caller ID Inspect Press a programmable button with lights Press f
3.0
2.0
16
Conference Drop Press a programmable button Press f
06
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-11
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
Centralized Telephone Programming Flow Chart (Continued)
Contact Closure 1 Press f Press a programmable button Press f
41
Contact Closure 2 Press a programmable button Press f
42
Direct Line Pickup—Active Line Press a programmable button Press i
68
Direct Line Pickup—Idle Line Press a programmable button with lights Press i
8
Do Not Disturb Press a programmable button with lights Press f
01
Exclusive Hold Press a programmable button Press f
02
Group Calling—Ring/Page For ringing group: Press a programmable button Press i 7 Dial a Calling Group number (1-4) For paging group: Press a programmable button Press i * 7 Dial a Calling Group number (1-4) Group Hunting—Ring/Voice Signal For ringing the first available extension: Press a programmable button Press i 7 7 Dial a Hunt Group number (1-7) For voice signaling the first available extension:
Press a programmable button Press i * 7 7 Dial a Hunt Group number (1-6) Group Pickup Press a programmable button Press i 6 6 Dial a Pickup Group number (1-4) Last Number Redial Press a programmable button Press f
05
Loudspeaker Paging Press a programmable button
VMS Cover Press a programmable button
Press i
Press f
70
Manual Signaling Press a programmable button Press f 1 3 Dial a two-digit extension number (to ring extension) or Dial * plus the two-digit extension number (to voice-signal the extension) Message Light Off Press a programmable button Press f 1 0 Dial (optional) two-digit extension number
15
Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back Press a programmable button with lights Press f
18
Voice Mailbox Transfer Press a programmable button Press f
14
Message Light On Press a programmable button Press f 0 9 Dial (optional) two-digit extension number Privacy Press a programmable button with lights Press f
07
Recall Press a programmable button with lights Press f
03
Record-A-Call Press a programmable button with lights Press f
24
Save Number Redial Press a programmable button Press f
04
Simultaneous Paging Press a programmable button Press i
*70
Station Lock Press a programmable button Press f
21
Station Unlock Press a programmable button Press f
22
Touch-Tone Enable Press a programmable button Press f
08
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-12
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart—How to Use
11
To use the Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart, follow these instructions first: To Program at an extension, use the following procedure: To Start programming:
■
— Press f 0 0 — The green light next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension show the current Line Ringing settings. You can program the remaining buttons with telephone numbers, extension numbers, or system features. ■
To assign a name to the extension, press i, and then enter the character codes.
■
To Erase the current programming from a button, press the button, then press!:
— Press the programmed button — Press! To End Programming Mode:
■
— Press f 0 0
Icon Description 4
= Factory setting = Button with lights required = Button with lights recommended
2.0
= PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later
3.0
= PARTNER ACS Revision 3.0 or later
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-13
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart
Account Code Entry Press a programmable button
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me Press a programmable button with lights
Press f 1
Press f 1 1 Dial (optional) two-digit originating extension number Dial (optional) two-digit destination extension number
2
Extension Name Display Press i Enter the character codes for the name (See table “Valid Character Entries”) Personal Speed Dial Numbers Press f Dial a two-digit code (80-99) Dial the phone number—up to 28 digits including special functions (see “Special Dialing Functions”) Auto Dial Numbers—Outside and Inside Press f 0 0 Press a programmable button To program an outside number: Dial the phone number—up to 28 digits including special functions (see”Special Dialing Functions”) To program an extension number: Press i Dial the extension number (to ring the extension) or * plus the extension number (to voice-signal the extension) Background Music Press a programmable button Press f
Call Pickup Press a programmable button Press i 6 Dial the two-digit extension number
Caller ID Call Logging & Dialing Press a programmable button with lights Press f
23
Caller ID Inspect Press a programmable button with lights Press f
Press f
Call Coverage Press a programmable button
2.0
17
Caller ID Name Display Press a programmable button with lights
19
2.0
2.0
16
2.0
Press f 2 0 Dial (optional) two-digit originating extension number Dial (optional) two-digit destination extension number
Conference Drop Press a programmable button Press f
06
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-14
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
Extension Telephone Programming Flow Chart (Continued)
Contact Closure 1 Press f Press a programmable button Press f
41
Contact Closure 2 Press a programmable button Press f
42
Direct Line Pickup—Active Line Press a programmable button Press i
68
Direct Line Pickup—Idle Line Press a programmable button with lights Press i
8
Do Not Disturb Press a programmable button with lights Press f
01
Exclusive Hold Press a programmable button Press f
02
Group Calling—Ring/Page For ringing group: Press a programmable button Press i 7 Dial a Calling Group number (1-4) For paging group: Press a programmable button Press i * 7 Dial a Calling Group number (1-4) Group Hunting—Ring/Voice Signal For ringing the first available extension: Press a programmable button Press i 7 7 Dial a Hunt Group number (1-7) For paging the first available extension:
Press a programmable button Press i * 7 7 Dial a Hunt Group number (1-6)
Group Pickup Press a programmable button
Simultaneous Paging Press a programmable button
Press i 6 6 Dial a Pickup Group number (1-4)
Press i
Last Number Redial Press a programmable button Press f
05
Loudspeaker Paging Press a programmable button Press i
70
Manual Signaling Press a programmable button Press f 1 3 Dial a two-digit extension number (to ring extension) or Dial * plus the two-digit extension number (to voice-signal the extension) Message Light Off Press a programmable button Press f 1 0 Dial (optional) two-digit extension number Message Light On Press a programmable button Press f 0 9 Dial (optional) two-digit extension number
*70
Station Lock Press a programmable button Press f
21
Station Unlock Press a programmable button Press f
22
Touch-Tone Enable Press a programmable button Press f
08
VMS Cover Press a programmable button Press f
15
Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back Press a programmable button Press f
18
Voice Mailbox Transfer Press a programmable button Press f
14
Privacy Press a programmable button with lights Press f
07
Recall Press a programmable button with lights Press f
03
Record-A-Call 3.0 Press a programmable button Press f
24
Save Number Redial Press a programmable button Press f
04
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-15
PARTNER® Access Guide Programming Quick Reference
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-16
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
PARTNER® Plus and PARTNER® II Programming Quick Reference
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-17
®
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 22-18
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
Centralized Telephone Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE AT THE SAME EXTENSION: After you program one feature, continue with the instructions in the box for the next feature.
TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE: PRESS f 0 0 PRESS s s c DIAL the extension number to be programmed Buttons on to which lines or pools are assigned light up to show the current Line Ringing setting; remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or features.
NOTE:
TO CHANGE SETTING FOR ANOTHER EXTENSION: PRESS c DIAL the new extension’s number
TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO DIAL BUTTON: PRESS the programmed button PRESS ! TO END PROGRAMMING MODE: PRESS f
0 0
Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display first.
AUTOMATIC LINE SELECTION (p. 5-23) PRESS * * PRESS the line/pool/intercom 2.0 buttons in the desired order PRESS * * Key Extension: Outside lines left i ✓ Pooled Extension: Pool 880 button 1, button 2, left i , right i ✓ Pools 881-883, individual lines
EXTENSION NAME DISPLAY (p. 5-130) PRESS left i Enter the character codes for the name (See Table 5-3 “Character Codes” on p. 5-131)
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS (p. 5-210) DIAL the phone number—up to 28 digits PRESS f including special functions (see DIAL a two-digit code "Special Dialing Funtions" p. 5-250) (80-99) AUTO DIAL NUMBERS—OUTSIDE AND INSIDE (p. 5-17) PRESS a programmable button To program an extension number: left To program an outside number: i PRESS DIAL the phone number—up to 28 DIAL the extension number (to digits including special ring the extension) or * functions (see “Special plus the extension number Dialing Functions,” p. 5-250) (to voice-signal the extension)
LINE RINGING (p. 5-179) PRESS each line or pool button until the desired ringing option appears in the display • Immediate ring (green steady) ✓ Lines • No ring (green fast flutter) ✓ Pools • Delayed ring—starts ringing after 20 seconds (green slow flashing)
System Features ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY PRESS a programmable button 1 2 PRESS f
(p. 5-7)
BACKGROUND MUSIC PRESS a programmable button 1 9 PRESS f
(p. 5-39)
(p. 5-46) CALL COVERAGE PRESS a programmable button 2.0 PRESS f 2 0 DIAL (optional) two-digit originating extension number DIAL (optional) two-digit covering extension number CALL FORWARDING/CALL FOLLOW-ME PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-52) PRESSf 1 1 DIAL (optional) two-digit originating extension number DIAL (optional) two-digit destination extension number
2.0 3.0
= = = = =
Factory setting Button with lights required Button with lights recommended PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later PARTNER ACS Revision 3.0 or later
CALL PICKUP (p. 5-57) PRESS a programmable button 6 PRESS left i DIAL the two-digit extension number (p. 5-59) 3.0 CALL SCREENING PRESS a programmable button with lights 2 5 PRESS f CALLER ID CALL LOGGING & DIALING PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-72) 2 3 PRESS f
DIRECT LINE PICKUP–ACTIVE LINE PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-109) DIAL left i 6 8 DIRECT LINE PICKUP–IDLE LINE PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-111) DIAL left i 8 DO NOT DISTURB (p. 5-121) PRESS a programmable button with lights 0 1 PRESS f
(p. 5-66) CALLER ID INSPECT PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS f 1 7
EXCLUSIVE HOLD (p. 5-128) PRESS a programmable button PRESS f 0 2
(p. 5-81) CALLER ID NAME DISPLAY PRESS a programmable button with lights 1 6 PRESS f
GROUP CALLING—RING/PAGE (p. 5-145)
(p. 5-89) CONFERENCE DROP PRESS a programmable button PRESS f 0 6
For paging the group:
CONTACT CLOSURE 1 PRESS a programmable button 4 1 DIAL left f
(p. 5-90)
CONTACT CLOSURE 2 PRESS a programmable button 4 2 DIAL left f
(p. 5-90)
For ringing the group:
PRESS a programmable button 7 PRESS left i DIAL a Calling Group number (1-4) PRESS a programmable button * 7 PRESS left i DIAL a Calling Group number (1-4)
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-19
®
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
BTM428J
System Features Continued GROUP HUNTING–RING/VOICE SIGNAL (p. 5-149) For ringing the first available extension:
PRESS a programmable button 7 7 PRESS left i DIAL a Hunt Group number (1-7) For voice signaling the first available extenstion:
PRESS a programmable button * 7 7 PRESS left i DIAL a Hunt Group number (1-6)
GROUP PICKUP (p. 5-153) PRESS a programmable button 6 6 PRESS left i DIAL a Pickup Group number (1-4) LAST NUMBER REDIAL (p. 5-167) PRESS a programmable button 0 5 PRESS f LOUDSPEAKER PAGING (p. 5-181) PRESS a programmable button 7 0 PRESS left i
MANUAL SIGNALING (p. 5-188) PRESS a programmable button 1 3 PRESS f DIAL the two-digit extension number (to ring extension) or DIAL * plus the two-digit extension number (to voice-signal the extension) (p. 5-190) MESSAGE LIGHT OFF PRESS a programmable button 1 0 PRESS f DIAL (optional) two-digit extension number MESSAGE LIGHT ON (p. 5-192) PRESS a programmable button 0 9 PRESS f DIAL (optional) two-digit extension number PRIVACY (p. 5-222) PRESS a programmable button with lights 0 7 PRESS f (p. 5-224) RECALL PRESS a programmable button 0 3 PRESS f (p. 5-228) RECORD-A-CALL 3.0 PRESS a programmable button 0 4 3 2 PRESS PRESS f
(p. 5-241) SIMULTANEOUS PAGING PRESS a programmable button * 7 0 PRESS left i (p. 5-255) STATION LOCK PRESS a programmable # button 2 1 PRESS f STATION UNLOCK Do not program on a button PRESS f 2 2
(p. 5-258)
(p. 5-270) TOUCH-TONE ENABLE PRESS a programmable button 0 8 PRESS f (p. 5-280) VMS COVER PRESS a programmable button with lights 1 5 PRESS f VOICE INTERRUPT (p. 5-290) ON BUSY TALK-BACK PRESS a programmable button with lights 1 8 PRESS f VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER (p. 5-292) PRESS a programmable button 1 4 PRESS f
(p. 5-237) SAVE NUMBER REDIAL PRESS a programmable button 0 4 PRESS f
2.0 3.0
= = = = =
Factory setting Button with lights required Button with lights recommended PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later PARTNER ACS Revision 3.0 or later
Avaya - Proprietary 22-20
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References System Programming Quick Reference
Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING: PRESS f 0 0 PRESS s PRESS s
TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES: PRESS N or P NOTES: Procedures #399, #609, and #728—shown later in dashed boxes—are skipped when cycling.
TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING: PRESS f 0 0 TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE: DIAL # and three-digit procedure code Example: # 1 0 1 for System Date
System SYSTEM DATE
Lines (p. 5-259)
DIAL #101 DIAL the date in MMDDYY form
SYSTEM DAY
ROTARY DIALING TIMEOUT (p. 5-236) DIAL #108 DIAL 1 = 4 sec 2 = 8 sec ✓ 3 = 12 sec
(p. 5-260) 2.0 or earlier
DIAL #102 DIAL 1 = Sunday ✓ 5 = Thursday 2 = Monday 6 = Friday 3 = Tuesday 7 = Saturday 4 = Wednesday
SYSTEM TIME
TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS: PRESS D or d TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING: PRESS r
(p. 5-268)
DIAL #103 DIAL the time in HHMM 24-hour military format
(p. 5-202) NUMBER OF LINES DIAL #104 DIAL two digits (01–24) for the number of outside lines to be assigned to every extension 3 per ACS processor module & 308EC module 2 per 206 or 200 module ✓ 4 per 400 module ✓
WARNING: Do not use Number of Lines (#104) after initial setup. In Key mode, the Number of Lines procedure will change Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction (#302), Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing to factory settings. To change line assignments without affecting other settings, use Line Assignment (#301). In Hybrid mode, the Number of Lines procedure will change Pool Line Assignment (#207), Pool Extension Assignment (#314), and Pool Access Restriction (#315). Additionally, it changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction (#302), Automatic Line Selection, and Line Ringing. To change pool assignments without affecting other settings, use Pool Line Assignment (#207) and Pool Extension Assignment (#314).
TRANSFER RETURN RINGS (p. 5-273) DIAL #105 DIAL one digit (0–9) for the number of rings before the call returns 0-9 rings 4 rings ✓ 0 rings = no return RECALL TIMER DURATION (p. 5-226) DIAL #107 DIAL two digits (01–80) to set the length of a switchhook flash ✓= 18 (450 msec)
(p. 5-98) DIAL MODE DIAL #201 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = Touch-Tone ✓ 2 = Rotary PRESS n
OUTSIDE CONFERENCE DENIAL (p. 5-209) DIAL #109 DIAL 1 = Allowed ✓ 2 = Disallowed
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER 2.0 (p. 5-28) DELAY DIAL #110 DIAL a ring delay number (0–9) ✓= 2 rings 2.0 AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER BUTTON (p. 5-25) DIAL #111 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button
HOLD DISCONNECT TIME (p. 5-157) DIAL #203 DIAL a system line number DIAL 00 = No Detection 01 = 50 msec 07 = 350 msec 02 = 100 msec 08 = 400 msec 03 = 150 msec 09 = 450 msec 04 = 200 msec 10 = 500 msec 05 = 250 msec 11 = 550 msec 06 = 300 msec 12 = 600 msec PRESS n
DIAL a ring delay number (0–9) 2 rings ✓ 0 rings = answered immediately
DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON (p. 5-99) DIAL #113 2.0 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION (p. 5-206) BUTTON DIAL #114 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button
WAKE UP SERVICE BUTTON (p. 5-294) DIAL #115 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button CALL COVERAGE RINGS (p. 5-50) DIAL #116 DIAL 1-9 2 ✓
2.0 only
to program another line
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER 2.0 LINES (p. 5-30) DIAL #204 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ PRESS n
DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL DELAY 2.0 (p. 5-102) DIAL #112
to program another line
to program another line
DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL LINES (p. 5-104) DIAL #205 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ PRESS n
2.0
to program another line
VMS COVER RINGS DIAL #117 DIAL 1-9 3 ✓
RING ON TRANSFER
GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION (p. 5-143) DIAL #206 DIAL a group number (1–6, 7 for VMS) DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ 3 = VMS Line Cover (only for Hunt Group 7) PRESS n
to program another line
2.0 POOL LINE ASSIGNMENT (p. 5-220) DIAL #207 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = No Pool 2 = Main Pool 880 ✓ 3 = Pool 881 4 = Pool 882 5 = Pool 883
PRESS n
to program another line
LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION (p. 5-177) DIAL #208 DIAL a system line number a system extension number No lines owned by an extension ✓ PRESS n PRESS r
to program another line to unassign ownership
UNIQUE LINE RINGING
3.0
(p. 5-279) DIAL #209 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 ✓ 2-8
2.0 or earlier
BACKUP PROGRAMMING — AUTOMATIC (p. 5-41) DIAL #123 DIAL 1 = Active 2 = Not Active ✓ 3 = Backup Alarm Cleared
(p. 5-235)
BACKUP PROGRAMMING— (p. 5-44) MANUAL
(p. 5-282)
DIAL #119 DIAL 1 = Active ✓ 2 = Not Active
DIAL #124 to begin the backup PRESS e
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER MODE (p. 5-32) DIAL #121 DIAL 1 = Hold ✓ 2 = Disconnect 3 = Ring
2.0
CALLER ID TYPE DIAL #122 DIAL 1 = USA ✓ 2 = Singapore
(p. 5-83)
RESTORE PROGRAMMING (p. 5-232) DIAL # 125 DIAL 1 = MAN. mmddyy ✓ 2 = AUTO. mmddyy PRESS e
to begin the restore
3.0 AUTOMATIC DAYLIGHT/ STANDARD TIMES (p. 5-20) DIAL #126 DIAL 1 = Active ✓ 2 = Not active
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-21
®
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
BTM428J
(p. 5-263)
SYSTEM RESET – PROGRAMMING SAVED
IMPORTANT: Using this procedure disiconnects any active cqalls but retains system settings. Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period. DIAL # 728
Extensions (p. 5-173)
DIAL #301 DIAL a system extension number To remove all existing line assignments, press r before selecting a line. DIAL a line number. DIAL 1 = Assigned ✓ 2 = Not Assigned 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button (to assign the line to that button). If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned, the line moves from the old button to the new button you select. to program another PRESS n line for this extension. To program another extension: PRESS N P , enter a new extension number and repeat above steps.
LINE ACCESS RESTRICTION (p. 5-171) DIAL #302 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = No Restriction ✓ 2 = Outgoing Only 3 = Incoming Only 4 = No Access (line appears on button, but you can use line only to pick up a transferred or held call) To program another extension: P , PRESS N enter a new extension number and repeat above steps.
PRESS n
to program another
extension
AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY (p. 5-21) DIAL #304 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ PRESS n
to program another
extension
(p. 5-6)
DIAL #305 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Active (1 ring) ✓ 2 = Not Active (repeated ringing) PRESS n
EXTERNAL HOTLINE
(p. 5-132)
DIAL #311 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ PRESS n
to program another
extension
to program another
extension
TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION (p. 5-271) DIAL #306 DIAL a system extension number DIAL number of the extension (10–57) to which call should return if not answered Extension transferring call ✓ PRESS n
to program another
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY (p. 5-138) DIAL #307 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓
DISTINCTIVE RING
(p. 5-120)
DIAL #308 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Active 2 = Not Active ✓ to program another
extension
INTERCOM DIAL TONE (p. 5-164) DIAL #309 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Regular ✓ 2 = Machine PRESS n
to program another
extension
AUTOMATIC VMS COVER (p. 5-37) DIAL #310 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ PRESS n
to program another
extension
to program another
extension
Procedures #207, #313, #314 and #315—shown in square dotted boxes—
(p. 5-61)
DIAL #316 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ PRESS n
to program another
extension CALLER ID LOG ANSWERED CALLS (p. 5-68) DIAL #317 2.0 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Active 2 = Not Active ✓ PRESS n
to program another
extension
2.0 DIAL #313 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Pooled ✓all extensions except 10 2 = Key ✓ extension 10 only
to program another
extension
PRESS n
PRESS n
LINE ACCESS MODE (p. 5-169)
extension
PRESS n
VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY (p. 5-288) DIAL #312 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓
CALL WAITING
POOL EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT (p. 5-217) DIAL #314 2.0 DIAL a system extension number To remove all existing pool assignments, press r before selecting a line. DIAL a pool access code (880, 881, 882, or 883) DIAL 1 = Assigned ✓ 880 2 = Not Assigned ✓ 881, 882, 883 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button (auxiliary pools only) to program PRESS n another pool for this extension. To program another extension: , P PRESS N enter a new extension number and repeat above steps.
POOL ACCESS RESTRICTION 2.0 (p. 5-215) DIAL #315 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a pool number (880, 881, 882, or 883) DIAL 1 = No Restriction ✓ 2 = Outgoing Only 3 = Incoming Only 4 = No Access PRESS n to program another pool To program another extension: , P PRESS N enter a new extension number and repeat above steps.
2.0
CALLER ID CALL LOG LINE 2.0 ASSOCIATION (p. 5-70) DIAL #318 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a system line number PRESS n to associate another line with this extension To associate another extension: , P PRESS N enter a new extension number and repeat above steps. 2.0 CALLER ID LOG ALL CALLS (p. 5-79) DIAL #319 DIAL a system extension number
CALL COVERAGE RINGS
3.0
(p. 5-51) DIAL #320 DIAL one digit (1–9) for the number of rings before the call is sent to the covering extension 2 rings ✓
☛
DISPLAY LANGUAGE (p. 5-119) DIAL #303 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = English ✓ 2 = Spanish 3 = French
ABBREVIATED RINGING
For Centralized Telephone Programming, see previous pages.
☛
LINE ASSIGNMENT
VMS COVER RINGS
3.0
(p. 5-283) DIAL #321 DIAL one digit (1–9) for the number of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging system 3 rings ✓
COPY SETTINGS (p. 5-96) DIAL #399 DIAL a source extension number DIAL target extension numbers ✓ = Factory setting = Button with lights required 2.0 = PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later 3.0 = PARTNER ACS Revision 3.0 or later
Avaya - Proprietary 22-22
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING: 0 0 PRESS f PRESS s PRESS s
TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING: 0 0 PRESS f TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE: DIAL # and three-digit procedure code Example: # 1 0 1 for System Date
TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES: or P PRESS N NOTE: Procedures #399, #609, and #728—shown below in dashed boxes—are skipped when cycling.
TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS: or d PRESS D TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING: PRESS r
Dialing Restrictions and Permissions OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION (p. 5-204) DIAL #401 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = No Restriction ✓ 2 = Inside (intercom) Only 3 = Local (intercom and local) Only PRESS n
to program another
extension
(p. 5-269) TOLL CALL PREFIX DIAL #402 DIAL 1 = 0/1 plus Area Code and Number ✓ 2 = Area Code and Number Only SYSTEM PASSWORD (p. 5-261) DIAL #403 DIAL four digits to set the password
DISALLOWED PHONE NUMBER (p. 5-114) LISTS DIAL #404 DIAL a list number (1–8) DIAL a list entry (01–10) To add entry: DIAL the telephone number (up to 12 digits) PRESS e PRESS r to remove a list entry to program another PRESS n list entry To program another list: , P PRESS N enter a new list number and repeat above steps.
DISALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS (p. 5-113) DIAL #405 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a list number (1–8) DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ PRESS n
to assign another list
To program another extension: , P PRESS N enter a new extension number and repeat above steps.
EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBER (p. 5-126) LISTS DIAL #406 DIAL a list entry (01–10) To add entry: DIAL the telephone number (up to 12 digits) PRESS e PRESS r to remove a list entry PRESS n
to program another
list entry
ALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS (p. 5-11) DIAL #407 DIAL a list number (1–8) DIAL a list entry (01–10) To add entry: DIAL the telephone number (up to 12 digits) PRESS e PRESS r to remove a list entry PRESS n to program another list entry To program another list: , P PRESS N enter a new list number and repeat above steps.
ALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS (p. 5-10) DIAL #408 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a list number (1–8) DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ to assign another list PRESS n To program another extension: , P PRESS N enter a new extension number and repeat above steps.
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE LIST (p. 5-140) DIAL #409 DIAL a list entry (01–99) To add entry: DIAL the account code (up to 6 digits) PRESS e PRESS r to remove a list entry PRESS n to program another list entry
STAR CODE DIAL DELAY (p. 5-252) DIAL #410 DIAL 0 = 0 Seconds Delay ✓ 1 = 1 Second Delay 2 = 2 Seconds Delay 3 = 3 Seconds Delay 4 = 4 Seconds Delay 5 = 5 Seconds Delay 6 = Not Active
System Speed Dial Numbers (p. 5-265) To program a number: PRESS f 0 0 to enter programming mode PRESS f DIAL a three-digit code (600–699) DIAL the telephone number—up to 28 digits including special characters (see page 5-250). To "mark" it (to overide restrictions), dial * before the telephone number. To program another number, or to change a number, repeat PRESS f 0 0 to exit programming mode
To remove a number: PRESS f 0 0 to enter programming mode PRESS f DIAL the System Speed Dial number’s code (600–699) PRESS ! To remove another number, repeat PRESS f 0 0 to exit programming mode
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-23
®
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
BTM428J
Auxiliary Equipment
Groups PICKUP GROUP EXTENSIONS (p. 5-213) DIAL #501 DIAL a group number (1–4) DIAL an extension number (10–57) DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group ✓ PRESS n to assign another extension CALLING GROUP EXTENSIONS (p. 5-85) DIAL #502 DIAL a group number (1–4) DIAL an extension number (10–57) DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group ✓ PRESS n to assign another extension NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON (p. 5-197) DIAL #503 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ 3 = Select button then press a programmable button (to assign Night Service to that button) If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned, the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select.
NIGHT SERVICE GROUP EXTENSIONS (p. 5-200) DIAL #504 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group ✓ PRESS n to assign another extension
HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS (p. 5-161) DIAL #505 DIAL a group number 1-6, 7 for VMS 8 for fax detection (Rel. 3.0) DIAL a system extension number (10–49) DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group ✓
(p. 5-284) VMS HUNT DELAY DIAL #506 Release 2.0 and earlier: DIAL 1 = Immediate ✓ 2 = Delayed Release 3.0 and later: DIAL 1 = Day 2 = Night DIAL line number DIAL 0 - 6 2 ✓
VMS HUNT SCHEDULE (p. 5-286) DIAL #507 Release 2.0 and earlier: DIAL 1 = Always ✓ 2 = Day Only 3 = Night Only Release 3.0 and later: DIAL line number DIAL 1 = Always ✓ 2 = Day Only 3 = Night Only
DOORPHONE 1 EXTENSION (p. 5-124) DIAL #604 DIAL any system extension except 10, 11 or the first 2 extensions of any 206 or 308 modules. To remove the doorphone extension: PRESS r DOORPHONE 2 EXTENSION (p. 5-124) DIAL #605 DIAL any system extension except 10, 11 or the first 2 extensions of any 206 or 308 modules. To remove the doorphone extension: PRESS r
PRESS n to assign another extension
FAX MACHINE EXTENSIONS (p. 5-137) DIAL #601 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ to identify another PRESS n extension MUSIC-ON-HOLD DIAL #602 DIAL 1 = Active ✓ 2 = Not Active
(p. 5-194)
(p. 5-159) HOTLINE DIAL #603 DIAL the hotline extension number (not ext. 10 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308 modules) DIAL the alerted extension number (not the hotline) or 7 0 to paging system To remove the hotline and alert: PRESS r
DOORPHONE ALERT (p. 5-123) EXTENSIONS DIAL #606 DIAL an extension number (except a doorphone extension) DIAL 1 = Not an alert ✓ 2 = Doorphone 1 alert 3 = Doorphone 2 alert 4 = Doorphones 1 and 2 PRESS
n to identify another extension (up to 48 alert extensions per doorphone)
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT EXTENSIONS (p. 5-4) DIAL #607 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned
SMDR RECORD TYPE (p. 5-245) DIAL #608 DIAL 1 = All calls ✓ 2 = Outgoing calls only
SMDR TOP OF PAGE DIAL #609
(p. 5-249)
SMDR OUTPUT FORMAT (p. 5-243) DIAL #610 DIAL 1 = 15 digits ✓ 2 = 24 digits SMDR TALK TIME DIAL #611 DIAL 1 = Active 2 = Not Active
(p. 5-247) 2.0
✓
CONTACT CLOSURE GROUP (p. 5-92) DIAL #612 DIAL a group number (1 or 2) DIAL an extension number (10–41) DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group ✓ CONTACT CLOSURE (p. 5-94) OPERATION TYPE DIAL #613 DIAL a Contact Closure (1 or 2) DIAL 1 = 1-Second On 2 = 3-Seconds On ✓ 3 = 5-Seconds On 4 = Toggle MUSIC-ON-HOLD VOLUME (p. 5-196) DIAL #614 DIAL 1 = – ■ + 2 = – ■■ + 3 = – ■■■ + 4 = – ■■■■ +✓ 5 = – ■■■■■ + 6 = – ■■■■■■ + 7 = – ■■■■■■■ +
✓
PRESS n to assign another extension
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION (p. 5-230) 3.0 PASSWORD DIAL #730 No Password (8 dashes display) Active password (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) Password can only be changed at Extension 10 or 11.
✓ = Factory setting = Button with lights required 2.0 3.0
= PARTNER ACS Revision 2.0 or later = PARTNER ACS Revision 3.0 or later
Avaya - Proprietary 22-24
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
PARTNER® ENDEAVOR Programming Quick Reference
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-25
®
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
BTM428J
Avaya - Proprietary 22-26
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
Centralized Telephone Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the Dial Pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE PRESS f 0 0 PRESS s
s
c
DIAL the extension number to be programmed Buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension light up to show the current Line Ringing setting; remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or features
NOTE:
TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE AT THE SAME EXTENSION After you program one feature, continue with the instructions in the box for the next feature TO CHANGE SETTING FOR ANOTHER EXTENSION PRESSc
DIAL the new extension’s number TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO DIAL BUTTON PRESS the programmed button PRESS!
TO END PROGRAMMING MODE PRESSf 0 0
Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display first.
AUTOMATIC LINE SELECTION PRESS* * (p. 5-18) PRESS the line/pool/intercom buttons in the desired order PRESS* * Key Extension: Outside lines left i Pooled Extension: Pool 880 button 1, button 2, left i , right i Pools 881-883, individual lines
EXTENSION NAME DISPLAY PRESS left i (p. 5-98) Enter the character codes for the name (See Table 5-1 “Character Codes” on p. 5-99)
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS (p. 5-166) DIALthe phone number—up to 28 digits PRESSf including special functions (see “Special DIAL a two-digit code Dialing Functions,” p. 5-211) (80-99) AUTO DIALING PRESS a programmable button To program an outside number:
DIAL the phone number—up to 28 digits including special functions (see “Special Dialing Functions,” p. 5-190)
(p. 5-13 ) To program an extension number:
PRESS left i DIAL the extension number (to ring the extension) or * plus the extension number (to voice-signal the extension)
LINE RINGING (p. 5-138) PRESS each line or pool button until the desired ringing option appears in the display • Immediate ring (green steady) Lines • No ring (green fast flutter) Pools • Delayed ring—starts ringing after 20 seconds (green slow flashing)
System Features BACKGROUND MUSIC (p. 5-35) PRESS a programmable button PRESS f 1 9 CALL COVERAGE (p. 5-41) PRESS a programmable button PRESS f 2 0 DIAL (optional) two-digit originating extension number DIAL (optional) two-digit covering extension number CALL FORWARDING/CALL FOLLOW-ME PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-46) PRESSf 1 1 DIAL (optional) two-digit originating extension number DIAL (optional) two-digit destination extension number
CALL PICKUP (p. 5-51) PRESS a programmable button PRESS left i 6 DIAL the two-digit extension number CALLER ID INSPECT (p. 5-56) PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS f 1 7 CALLER ID NAME DISPLAY (p. 5-58) PRESS a programmable button with lights 1 6 PRESS f CONFERENCE DROP (p. 5-64) PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 0 6
DIRECT LINE PICKUP–ACTIVE LINE PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-77) DIAL left i 6 8 DIRECT LINE PICKUP–IDLE LINE PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-79) DIAL left i 8 DO NOT DISTURB (p. 5-89) PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS f 0 1 EXCLUSIVE HOLD PRESS a programmable button PRESS f 0 2
(p. 5-96)
GROUP CALLING—RING/PAGE (p. 5-105) For ringing the group:
PRESS a programmable button PRESS left i 7 DIAL a Calling Group number (1-4) For paging the group:
PRESS a programmable button PRESS left i * 7 DIAL a Calling Group number (1-4)
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-27
®
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
BTM428J
System Features Continued GROUP HUNTING–RING/VOICE SIGNAL For ringing the first available extension:
PRESS a programmable button (p. 5-109) 7 7 PRESS left i DIAL a Hunt Group number (1-7) For voice signaling the first available extension:
PRESS a programmable button PRESS left i * 7 7 DIAL a Hunt Group number (1-6)
GROUP PICKUP (p. 5-113) PRESS a programmable button PRESS left i 6 6 DIAL a Pickup Group number (1-4) LAST NUMBER REDIAL (p. 5-126) PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 0 5
MANUAL SIGNALING (p. 5-145) PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 1 3 DIAL the two-digit extension number (to ring extension) or DIAL * plus the two-digit extension number (to voice-signal the extension)
STATION LOCK (p. 5-195) PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 2 1 TOUCH-TONE ENABLE PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 0 8
(p. 5-210)
MESSAGE LIGHT OFF (p. 5-147) PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 1 0 DIAL (optional) two-digit extension number
VMS COVER (p. 5-219) PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESSf 1 5
MESSAGE LIGHT ON (p. 5-149) PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 0 9 DIAL (optional) two-digit extension number
VOICE INTERRUPT (p. 5-226) ON BUSY TALK-BACK PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESSf 1 8
PRIVACY (p. 5-177) PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESSf 0 7
VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 1 4
(p. 5-228 )
RECALL (p. 5-179) PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 0 3 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL (p. 5-186) PRESS a programmable button PRESSf 0 4
= Factory setting = Button with lights required = Button with lights recommended
Avaya - Proprietary 22-28
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the Dial Pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESSf 0 0 PRESSs PRESSs
TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESSf 0 0 TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE DIAL # and three-digit procedure code Example: # 1 0 1 for System Date
TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESSN or P NOTES: Procedures #399 and #728—shown later in dashed boxes—are skipped when cycling.
System SYSTEM DATE
Lines (p. 5-199)
DIAL #101 DIAL the date in MMDDYY form
SYSTEM DAY
(p. 5-200)
DIAL #102 DIAL 1 = Sunday 5 = Thursday 2 = Monday 6 = Friday 3 = Tuesday 7 = Saturday 4 = Wednesday
SYSTEM TIME
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER BUTTON (p. 5-21) DIAL #111 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button
(p. 5-158)
*See IMPORTANT below DIAL #104 DIAL two digits (01–24) for the number of outside lines to be assigned to every extension 3 per 362 processor module or 362EC expansion module
DIAL #112 (p. 5-71) DIAL a ring delay number (0–9) = 2 rings
DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON DIAL #113 (p. 5-68) DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button
(p. 5-67)
DIAL #205 (p. 5-72) DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned
PRESSn
PRESSn
to program another line
DIAL #203 (p. 5-117) DIAL a system line number DIAL 00 = No Detection 01 = 50 msec 02 = 100 msec 03 = 150 msec 04 = 200 msec 05 = 250 msec 06 = 300 msec 07 = 350 msec 08 = 400 msec 09 = 450 msec 10 = 500 msec 11 = 550 msec 12 = 600 msec PRESSn
DIAL #114 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER LINES (p. 5-26)
WAKE UP SERVICE BUTTON
PRESSn
to program another line
DIAL #204 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned
ROTARY DIALING TIMEOUT DIAL #108 DIAL 1 = 4 sec 2 = 8 sec
(p. 5-185) 3 =12 sec
OUTSIDE CONFERENCE DENIAL DIAL #109 DIAL 1 = Allowed 2 = Disallowed
(p. 5-165)
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER DELAY (p. 5-24) DIAL #110 DIAL a ring delay number (0–9) = 2 rings
VMS COVER RINGS
GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION DIAL #206 (p. 5-103) DIAL a group number (1–6, 7 for VMS) DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = VMS Line Cover (only for Hunt Group 7 ) PRESSn
to program another line
POOL LINE ASSIGNMENT DIAL #207 (p. 5-175) DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = No Pool 2 = Main Pool 880 3 = Pool 881 4 = Pool 882 5 = Pool 883 PRESSn line
to program another
LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION DIAL #208 (p. 5-136) DIAL a system line number DIAL an extension number PRESSn PRESSr
CALL COVERAGE RINGS #116 (p. 5-45) DIAL one digit (1–9) for the number of rings before the call is sent to the covering extension = 2 rings
to program another line
to program another line
DIAL #115 (p. 5-230) DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button
RECALL TIMER DURATION DIAL #107 (p. 5-181) DIAL two digits (01–80) to set the length of a switchhook flash =18 (450 msec)
DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL LINES
DIAL #201 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 = Touch-Tone 2 = Rotary
OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION BUTTON (p. 5-162)
TRANSFER RETURN RINGS DIAL #105 (p. 5-213) DIAL one digit (0–9) for the number of rings before the call returns = 4 rings 0 rings = no return
DIAL MODE
HOLD DISCONNECT TIME DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL DELAY
(p. 5-208)
DIAL #103 DIAL the time in HHMM 24-hour military format
NUMBER OF LINES
TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESSD or d TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING PRESSr
☛
to program another line to unassign ownership
For Centralized Telephone Programming, see previous pages.
(p. 5-221)
DIAL #117 DIAL one digit (1–9) for the number of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging system = 3 rings
RING ON TRANSFER
(p. 5-184)
CALLER ID TYPE
(p. 5-59)
BACKUP PROGRAMMING— MANUAL (p. 5-39)
DIAL #119 DIAL 1 = Active 2 = Not Active
DIAL #122 DIAL 1 = USA 2 = Singapore
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER MODE
BACKUP PROGRAMMING— AUTOMATIC (p. 5-37)
RESTORE PROGRAMMING
DIAL #123 DIAL 1 = Active 2 = Not Active 3 = Backup Alarm Cleared
DIAL #125 (p. 5-182) DIAL 1 = MAN. mmddyy 2 = AUTO. mmddyy PRESSe to begin the restore
DIAL #121 (p. 5-28) DIAL 1 = Hold 2 = Disconnect 3 = Ring a programmable button
DIAL #124 PRESSe to begin the backup
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-29
®
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
BTM428J
SYSTEM RESET – PROGRAMMING SAVED
(p. 5-203)
Using this procedure disconnects any active calls but retains system settings. Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period. DIAL # 728
IMPORTANT:
Extensions LINE ASSIGNMENT
(p. 5-132)
DIAL #301 DIAL a system extension number To remove all existing line assignments, press r before selecting a line. DIAL a line number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = Select Button then press a programmable button (to assign the line to that button) If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned, the line moves from the old button to the new button you select. PRESS n to program another line for this extension. To program another extension: PRESS N P , enter a new extension number, and repeat above steps
LINE ACCESS RESTRICTION #302 (p. 5-130) a system extension number a system line number 1 = No Restriction 2 = Outgoing Only 3 = Incoming Only 4 = No Access (line appears on button, but you can use line only to pick up a transferred or held call) to program another PRESSn line To program another extension: PRESS N P , enter a new extension number, and repeat above steps DIAL DIAL DIAL DIAL
AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY
INTERCOM DIAL TONE (p. 5-123)
POOL ACCESS RESTRICTION
DIAL #304 (p. 5-16) DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESSn to program another extension
DIAL #309 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Regular 2 = Machine to program another PRESSn extension
ABBREVIATED RINGING (p. 5-5)
AUTOMATIC VMS COVER (p. 5-33)
DIAL #305 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Active (1 ring) 2 = Not Active (repeated ringing) to program another PRESSn extension
DIAL #310 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned to program another PRESSn extension
DIAL #315 (p. 5-170) DIAL a system extension number DIAL a pool number (880, 881, 882, or 883) DIAL 1 = No Restriction 2 = Outgoing Only 3 = Incoming Only 4 = No Access to program PRESSn another pool To program another extension: PRESS N P , enter a new extension number, and repeat above steps
EXTERNAL HOTLINE
CALL WAITING
TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION DIAL #306 (p. 5-211) DIAL a system extension number DIAL number of the extension (10–49) to which call should return if not answered Extension transferring call to program another PRESSn extension
DISTINCTIVE RING
(p. 5-88)
DIAL #308 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Active 2 = Not Active to program another PRESSn extension
(p. 5-100)
DIAL #311 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESSn to program another extension
VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY DIAL #312 (p. 5-224) DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESSn to program another extension
LINE ACCESS MODE
(p. 5-52)
DIAL #316 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESSn to program another extension
COPY SETTINGS
(p. 5-65 )
DIAL #399 DIAL a source extension number DIAL target extension numbers
(p. 5-128)
DIAL #313 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Pool all extensions except 10 2 = Key extension 10 only
DISPLAY LANGUAGE (p. 5-87) DIAL #303 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = English 2 = Spanish 3 = French to program another PRESSn extension
POOL EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT
Procedures #207, #313, #314 and #315—shown in square dotted boxes— IMPORTANT: In Key mode, the Number of Lines procedure changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction (#302), Automatic Line Selection, and Line Ringing to factory settings. To change line assignments without affecting other settings, use Line Assignment (#301). In Hybrid mode, the Number of Lines procedure changes Pool Line Assignment (#207), Pool Extension Assignment (#314), and Pool Access Restriction (#315) for existing pools back to factory settings. Additionally, it changes Line Assignment (#301), Line Access Restriction (#302), Automatic Line Selection, and Line Ringing for individual lines back to factory settings. To change pool assignments without affecting other settings, use Pool Line Assignment (#207) and Pool Extension Assignment (#314).
DIAL #314 (p. 5-172) DIAL a system extension number To remove all existing pool assignments, press r before selecting a line. DIAL a pool access code (880, 881, 882, or 883) 880 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 881, 882, 883 3 = Select Button then press a program mable button (auxiliary pools only) to program PRESS n another pool for this extension. To program another extension: PRESS N P , enter a new extension number, and repeat above steps
= Factory setting = Button with lights required
Avaya - Proprietary 22-30
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the Dial Pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESSf 0 0 PRESSs PRESSs
TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESSf 0 0 TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE DIAL # and three-digit procedure code Example: # 1 0 1 for System Date
TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESSN or P NOTE: Procedures #399 and #728—shown later in dashed boxes—are skipped when cycling.
TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESSD or d TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING PRESSr
Dialing Restrictions and Permissions OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION DIAL #401 (p. 5-160) DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = No Restriction 2 = Inside (intercom) Only 3 = Local (intercom and local) Only to program PRESS n another extension TOLL CALL PREFIX (p. 5-209) DIAL #402 DIAL 1 = 0/1 plus Area Code and Number 2 = Area Code and Number Only SYSTEM PASSWORD (p. 5-201) DIAL #403 DIAL four digits to set the password
DISALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS (p. 5-82) DIAL #404 DIAL a list number (1–8) DIAL a list entry (01–10) To add entry: DIAL the telephone number (up to 12 digits) PRESS e PRESSr to remove a list entry to program another PRESSn list entry To program another list: P , PRESS N enter a new list number, and repeat above steps DISALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS DIAL #405 (p. 5-81) DIAL a system extension number DIAL a list number (1–8) DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned ✓ PRESSn to assign another list To program another extension: P , PRESSN enter a new extension number, and repeat above steps
EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBER LIST (p. 5-94) DIAL #406 DIAL a list entry (01–10) To add entry: DIAL the telephone number (up to 12 digits) PRESSe PRESSr to remove a list entry to program another PRESSn list entry
ALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS (p. 5-7) DIAL #407 DIAL a list number (1–8) DIAL a list entry (01–10) To add entry: DIAL the telephone number (up to 12 digits) PRESSe PRESSr to remove a list entry to program another PRESSn list entry To program another list: P , PRESSN enter a new list number, and repeat above steps
ALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS (p. 5-6) DIAL #408 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a list number (1–8) DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESSn to assign another list To program another extension: P , PRESSN enter a new extension number, and repeat above steps STAR CODE DIAL DELAY (p. 5-192) DIAL #410 DIAL 0 = 0 Seconds Delay 1 = 1 Second Delay 2 = 2 Seconds Delay 3 = 3 Seconds Delay 4 = 4 Seconds Delay 5 = 5 Seconds Delay 6 = Not Active
System Speed Dial Numbers (p. 5-205 ) To program a number: PRESSf 0 0 to enter programming mode PRESSf DIAL a three-digit code (600–699) DIAL the telephone number—up to 28 digits including special characters (see page 5-99) To “mark” it (to override restrictions), dial * before the telephone number To program another number, or to change a number, repeat 0 0 to exit programming mode PRESSf
To remove a number: PRESSf 0 0 to enter programming mode PRESSf DIAL the System Speed Dial number’s code (600–699) PRESS! To remove another number, repeat 0 0 to exit PRESSf programming mode
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
22-31
®
PARTNER Access Guide Programming Quick References
BTM428J
Auxiliary Equipment
Groups PICKUP GROUP EXTENSIONS (p. 5-169) DIAL #501 DIAL a group number (1–4) DIAL an extension number (10–49) DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group PRESS n to assign another extension CALLING GROUP EXTENSIONS (p. 5-61) DIAL #502 DIAL a group number (1–4) DIAL an extension number (10–49) DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group PRESSn to assign another extension NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON (p. 5-154) DIAL #503 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = Select button then press a programmable button (to assign Night Service to that button) If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned, the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select.
NIGHT SERVICE GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL #504 (p. 5-157) DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group PRESS n to assign another extension
FAX MACHINE EXTENSIONS (p. 5-102) DIAL #601 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESS n to identify another extension
HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS (p. 5-121) DIAL #505 DIAL a group number (1-6, 7 for VMS) DIAL an extension number (10–49) DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not Assigned to group PRESS n to assign another extension
MUSIC ON HOLD DIAL #602 DIAL 1 = Active 2 = Not Active
VMS HUNT DELAY DIAL #506 DIAL 1 = Immediate 2 = Delayed
(p. 5-222)
VMS HUNT SCHEDULE DIAL #507 DIAL 1 = Always 2 = Day Only 3 = Night Only
(p. 5-223)
HOTLINE DIAL #603
(AA) AUTOMATED ATTENDANT (p. 5-4) EXTENSIONS DIAL #607 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESS n to assign another extension
(p. 5-151)
(p. 5-119)
DIAL the hotline extension number DIAL the alerted extension number (not the hotline) To remove the hotline and alert: PRESS r
MUSIC ON HOLD VOLUME (p. DIAL #614 DIAL 1 = – 2= – 3= – 4= – 5= – 6= – 7= –
5-153) + + + + + + +
DOORPHONE EXTENSION (p. 5-110) DIAL #604 or #605 DIAL an extension on one of the last two ports of the 362 or 362EC module. To remove the doorphone extension: PRESS r (p. 5-91) DOORPHONE ALERT EXTENSIONS DIAL #606 DIAL an extension number (except a doorphone extension) DIAL 1 = Not an alert 2 = Doorphone 1 alert 3 = Doorphone 2 alert 4 = Doorphones 1 and 2 PRESS n to identify another extension (up to 40 alert extensions per doorphone)
= Factory setting = Button with lights required
Avaya - Proprietary 22-32
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Toll Fraud
PARTNER Toll Fraud Overview PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Il & PARTNER Endeavor Communications System The four Systems do not permit trunk-to-trunk transfers, thus reducing the risk of toll fraud. In addition, they allow individual stations to be administered for outward restriction.
ACS, PARTNER Il and Endeavor Communications System An optional Remote Administration Unit provides remote administration for all releases of the PARTNER II, ACS and Endeavor Communications System. Protect the Remote Administration Unit by making sure to assign a password for unattended mode, and once remote administration is not necessary, remove it from unattended mode. Otherwise, a hacker could change the programming remotely, or, if a unit is equipped with diagnostic mode (available in international versions), access a line remotely and place a call.
Voice Messaging Systems PARTNER II R3 and later, PARTNER Plus R3.1 and later, PARTNER ACS and Endeavor support the PARTNER MAIL System. PARTNER II and PARTNER Plus R3.1 and later, PARTNER ACS, and PARTNER Endeavor support the PARTNER MAIL VS System. PARTNER ACS R1.1 or later and Endeavor support the PARTNER Voice Messaging Card. PARTNER II R 3.1 or later, PARTNER Plus R3.1 or later and PARTNER ACS support the PARTNER Messaging System. Voice messaging systems provide a variety of voice messaging applications operating similarly to an electronic answering machine. Callers can leave messages for employees (subscribers) who have voice mailboxes assigned to them. Subscribers can play, forward, save, repeat, and delete the messages in their mailboxes. Many voice messaging systems allow callers to transfer out of voice mailboxes and back into the PBX system. When hackers connect to the voice messaging system, they try to enter digits that connect them to an outside facility. For example, hackers enter a transfer command followed by an outgoing trunk access number for an outside trunk. Most hackers do not realize how they gained access to an outside facility; they only need to know the right combination of digits.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
23-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Toll Fraud
BTM428J
Sometimes hackers are not even looking for an outside facility. They enter a voice messaging system to find unassigned voice mailboxes. When they are successful, they assign the mailboxes to themselves, relatives, and friends, and use them to exchange toll-free messages. Hackers can even use cellular phones to break into voice mailboxes. In addition, unauthorized access to voice messaging systems can allow hackers to access the switch and change administration data.
Protecting the PARTNER Messaging System Security options are discussed in detail in the System Manager’s Quick Reference Guide (#518-100-501). This guide will be available in Q4 of 2001.
Protecting the PARTNER MAIL and PARTNER MAIL VS Systems The PARTNER MAIL and PARTNER MAIL VS Systems provide both automated attendant and voice mail functionality. The automated attendant feature answers incoming calls and routes them to the appropriate department, person, or mailbox. The voice mall feature provides call coverage to voice mailboxes along with a variety of voice messaging features. Unauthorized persons try to locate unused or unprotected mailboxes and use them as drop-off points for their own messages, especially if inbound calls are free (for example, 800 inbound service). Changing Default Passwords To simplify initial setup and allow for immediate operation, either the switch and adjuncts are assigned default administration passwords, or passwords are disabled, depending on the date of installation. Hackers who have obtained copies of customer premises equipment-based and adjunct system documentation circulate the known default passwords to try to gain entry into systems. To date, the vast majority of hacker access to maintenance ports has been through default customer passwords. Be sure to change or void all default passwords to end this opportunity for hackers.
Avaya - Proprietary 23-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Toll Fraud
PARTNER MAIL System •
System administrators: Change your password by means of the Voice Mail Menu. 1. To access this menu, press intercom 7 7 7 or a programmed button. 2. Enter your mailbox number (initially 9 9 9 7) and press #. 3. Enter your password (initially 1 2 3 4) and press #. 4. Press 5 and follow the prompts to change your password.
•
End users: Change your password by means of the Voice Mail Menu. 1. To access this menu, press intercom 7 7 7 or a programmed button. 2. Enter your mailbox number and press #. 3. Enter your password and press #. 4. Press 5 and follow the prompts to change your password.
PARTNER MAIL VS System System administrators: Change your password by means of the Voice Mail Menu. 1. To access this menu, press intercom 7 7 7 or a pre-programmed button. 2. Enter 9 9 #. 3. Enter your password and press #. (The factory-set password is 1 2 3 4.) 4. Press 5 and follow the prompts to change your password. End users: Change your password by means of the Voice Mail Menu. 1. To access this menu, press intercom 7 7 7 or a preprogrammed button 2. Enter your mailbox number and press #. 3. Enter your password and press #. 4. Press 5 and follow the prompts to change your password.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
23-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Toll Fraud
BTM428J
Choosing Passwords Follow the guidelines listed below when choosing passwords. •
Passwords should be as long as allowed.
•
Passwords should be hard to guess and should not contain: -
All the same characters (for example, 1111, xxxx)
-
Sequential characters (for example, 1234, abcd)
-
Character strings that can be associated with you or your business, such as your name, initials, birthday, business name, phone number, or social security number
-
Words and commonly-used names. Many of the dialers used by hackers are programmed to try all of the names from books listing potential baby names. In one documented case, the contents of an entire dictionary were used to try and crack passwords.
•
Passwords should use as great a variety of characters as possible. For example, if both numbers and letters are permitted, the password should contain both.
•
Passwords should be changed regularly, at least on a quarterly basis. Recycling old passwords is not recommended.
Protecting the PARTNER Attendant System To help secure PARTNER Attendant against toll fraud, do the following: •
Administer the lowest valid extension number (Lowest Extension) and the highest valid extension number (Highest Extension) for the range of valid extensions. Transfer attempts to extensions that fall outside the range will be disallowed.
•
Administer the maximum number of digits in the extension to match the dial plan.
•
Change the default system password.
Avaya - Proprietary 23-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Toll Fraud
General Security Measures General security measures can be taken system wide to discourage unauthorized use.
Educating Users Everyone in the company who uses the telephone system is responsible for system security. Users and attendants need to be aware of how to recognize and react to potential hacker activity. Informed people are more likely to cooperate with security measures that often make the system less flexible and more difficult to use. •
Never program passwords or authorization codes onto Auto Dial buttons. Display phones reveal the programmed numbers and internal abusers can use the auto dial buttons to originate unauthorized calls.
•
Discourage the practice of writing down passwords. If a password needs to be written down, keep it in a secure place and never discard it while it is active.
•
Attendants should tell their system manager if they answer a series of calls where there is silence on the other end or the caller hangs up.
•
Users who are assigned voice mailboxes should frequently change personal passwords and should not choose obvious passwords.
•
Advise users with special telephone privileges (such as Remote Access, voice mail outcalling, and call forwarding off-switch) of the potential risks and responsibilities.
•
Be suspicious of any caller who claims to be with the telephone company and wants to check an outside line. Ask for a callback number, hang up, and confirm the caller's identity.
•
Never distribute the office telephone directory to anyone outside the company; be careful when discarding it.
•
Never accept collect phone calls.
•
Never discuss your telephone system's numbering plan with anyone outside the company.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
23-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Toll Fraud
BTM428J
Creating Company Policies As a safeguard against toll fraud, follow the guidelines below. •
Change passwords frequently (at least quarterly). Set password expiration times and tell users when the changes go into effect. Changing passwords routinely on a specific date (such as the first of the month) helps users to remember to do so.
•
Establish well-controlled procedures for resetting passwords.
•
Limit the number of invalid attempts to access a voice mail to five or less.
•
Create a PBX system management policy concerning employee turnover and include these actions: -
Delete all unused voice mailboxes in the voice mail system.
-
If an employee is terminated, immediately delete any voice mailboxes belonging to that employee.
-
If a terminated employee had Remote Access calling privileges and a personal authorization code, remove the authorization code immediately.
-
If barrier codes and/or authorization codes were shared by the terminated employee, these should be changed immediately. Notify the remaining users as well.
Physical Security You should always limit access to the system console and supporting documentation. The following are some recommendations: •
Keep the attendant console and supporting documentation in an office that is secured with a changeable combination lock. Provide the combination only to those individuals having a real need to enter the office.
•
Keep telephone wiring closets and equipment rooms locked.
•
Keep telephone logs and printed reports in locations that only authorized personnel can enter.
•
Design distributed reports so they do not reveal password or trunk access code information.
Avaya - Proprietary 23-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Toll Fraud
Security Tips • Monitor SMDR reports and/or Call Accounting System reports for outgoing calls that might be originated by internal and external abusers. •
For PARTNER MAIL System mailboxes, exercise caution when assigning a Class of Service. -
Assign a Class of Service that provides outcalling privileges (4, 5, 6, or 8) only to those mailboxes requiring these privileges.
-
Assign Classes of Service 1-6, Transfer Permitted, only to mailboxes for which the mailbox number is a real extension on the PARTNER II Communications System. Use Classes of Service 7 to 9, Transfer Not Permitted, for all mailboxes for which there is no corresponding extension on the PARTNER II Communications System.
-
If outcalling is not used, assign system mailboxes (90 to 98, and 9997 to 9999) to Class of Service (COS) 7, 8, and 9.
•
Require employees who have voice mailboxes to use passwords to protect their mailboxes.
•
Require the system administrator and all voice mailbox owners to change their password from the default.
•
Instruct employees not to make a statement, in their recorded greeting, indicating that they will accept collect calls.
•
Have the voice messaging system administrator delete unneeded voice mailboxes from the system immediately.
•
Program the PARTNER II Communications System to: -
Block direct access to outgoing lines and force the use of account codes and/or authorization codes.
-
Assign toll restrictions to individual's phones, especially in public areas.
-
If you do not need to use the Outcalling feature of the PARTNER MAIL System, completely restrict the outward calling capability of its system ports by using Inside Calls Only.
-
If outcalling is required, assign outgoing call restriction local only with the appropriate toll call prefix to ports used for outcalling. Assign applicable allowed and disallowed number lists to the PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER MAIL System ports used for outcalling. Two-port PARTNER MAIL Systems use port 2 for outcalling. Four-port systems use port 4 for outcalling. Outward restrict all other ports.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
23-7
®
PARTNER Access Guide Toll Fraud
BTM428J
Security Measures
Security Goal
Method
Security tool
Steps
Protect Remote Access
Do not use unattended mode
Attended Mode (RAU)
None (Attended mode is system default)
Prevent exit from Voice Messaging system
Restrict who can dial out
Switch Dial restrictions
Use line access restrictions, outgoing call restrictions, allowed lists and disallowed lists
Prevent theft of Assign secure information via Voice passwords Messaging System
Passwords Encourage users to select (PARTNER Plus non-trivial, maximum R3.1 and later, length passwords PARTNER II R3.0 and later; PARTNER ACS)
Prevent unauthorized use of facilities
Switch Dial Restrictions
Restrict who can dial out
Use line access restrictions, outgoing call restrictions, allowed lists, and disallowed lists; assign to VMS hunt group extensions
Avaya - Proprietary 23-8
Issue 6, May 2001
PARTNER Endeavor™ Communications System Installation
518-458-101 Comcode 108339136 Issue 2 August 1998
Copyright © 1998, Lucent Technologies All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A.
Lucent Technologies 518-458-101 Comcode 108339136 Issue 2 August 1998
Notice Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this book is complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A or a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules. For additional information on FCC regulations, see “Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Information” in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide.
Canadian Emissions Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A or the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Industry Canada (IC). For additional IC information, see “IC Notification and Repair Information” in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide. Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la Classe A ou de la Classe B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Industrie Canada. Vous trouverez des renseignements complémitaires dans cette section: “IC Notification and Repair Information” de PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide.
Security Toll fraud, the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, persons other than your company’s employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company’s behalf) can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services. You are responsible for the security of your system. There may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system. You are responsible for programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use. Your system manager should read all documents provided with this product to fully understand the features that can introduce the risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk. Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use. If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance, call the Lucent Technologies National Customer Care Center at 1-800-721-7071.
Trademarks Magic on Hold, MERLIN, MLS-34D, MLS-18D, MLS-12D, MLS-12, MLS-6, PARTNER, PARTNER MAIL, PARTNER MAIL VS, PassageWay, SYSTIMAX, and TransTalk are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies. PARTNER Endeavor is a trademark of Lucent Technologies. Microsoft is a registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. The SoundStation is a registered trademark of Polycom, Inc.
Warranty Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty for this product. Refer to “Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability” in Appendix B of of the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide.
Ordering Information The order number for this book is 518-458-101. To order additional books, call 800-457-1235 in the continental U.S. or 765-361-5353 outside the continental U.S. For information about ordering other system reference materials, replacement parts, accessories, and other compatible equipment, refer to “Product Ordering Information” in Appendix B of the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide.
Support Telephone Number In the continental U.S., Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer hotline 24 hours a day. Call the hotline at 800-721-7071 or your Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer, if you need assistance when programming or using your system. Consultation charges may apply. Outside the continental U.S., contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.
Important Safety Instructions The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be followed when using your telephone equipment: 1. Read and understand all instructions. 2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. 3. Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning. DO NOT use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. 4. This product should be serviced by (or taken to) a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required. 5. DO NOT use this product near water—for example, in a wet basement location. 6. DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. 7. Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. 8. DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. 9. The product is provided with a three-wire grounding type plug. This is a safety feature. DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the power supply cord to building surfaces.
! CAUTION: DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots or openings. They prevent the product from overheating. DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided. DO NOT place the product flat on a surface. The control unit must be wall-mounted.
Additional Safety Instructions for Installation Personnel 1. DO NOT install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. 2. DO NOT install telephone jacks in a wet location, unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. 3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals, unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. 4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. 5. The control unit must be securely wall-mounted.
! CAUTION: If any wiring from the extension jacks is run from the building premises, you must install Lucent Technologies IROB protectors (see “Requirements for Out-of-Building Installations” at the end of this book).
! CAUTION: Use only Lucent Technologies-manufactured PARTNER Endeavor or PARTNER MAIL VS modules in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System.
! CAUTION: Environmental and electrical conditions must meet the requirements as listed in “Specifications” at the end of this book.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Installation
Installation
Overview This guide explains how to install the PARTNER Endeavor™ Communications System. This guide begins with a sample system setup, then shows the components you need to install the system and gives general guidelines to consider before installation. Next, it provides step-by-step instructions for connecting and testing the components for initial installation and upgrades. Finally, it lists important system specifications. You should ensure that your installation meets all electrical and environmental requirements. If your company already has modular jacks for all outside lines and extensions, you may be able to use the existing wiring to install the system hardware and to connect telephones to the system yourself. To have a Lucent Technologies service technician install and customize your system or change existing wiring, call 800-247-7000 (in the continental U.S. only), or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer. After installation, refer to the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide for programming instructions.
A Sample System Setup Figure 1 shows a control unit with one PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module and four 362EC expansion modules. Although your system may differ, this example illustrates the types of equipment you can connect to it.
1
Installation
1. 5-Slot Carrier. The carrier channels power to the system and connects the system modules.
■
PARTNER-CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer. An Intercom Autodialer is connected to the phone to dial extensions and transfer calls to them with one touch and to see which extensions are busy.
■
Standard Touch-Tone Phone. During a power failure, the PARTNER Endeavor-34D phone on extension 10 will not work, but the receptionist can use the standard phone to place calls on line 1.
2. 362EC expansion modules. Each 362EC expansion module has jacks for three lines and eight extensions.
NOTE: A 362EC expansion module can only be used with a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor. 3. PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module. The processor module contains the software that provides the system’s features, and has jacks for three lines and eight extensions. It also has a Music-On-Hold jack. 4. Line Jacks. The top three jacks on the Endeavor and 362EC expansion modules connect to outside telephone lines. 5. Grounding Screw. Attaches a #12 AWG on a #14 AWG solid copper wire to an approved earth ground. 6. Power LED. The power LED lights when the module is receiving power. 7. Extension Jacks. The bottom eight jacks on the modules connect inside wiring for telephones and other telecommunications equipment. The top six station ports support only ETR devices, and the bottom two support both ETR and Tip Ring devices. 8. Network Interface Jacks. These jacks provide access to telephone lines from a local telephone company. Each outside line is connected to the system by plugging one end of the line cord into one of these jacks, and the other end into a line jack in the control unit. 9. MUSIC-ON-HOLD Jack. Lucent Technologies’ Magicon-Hold is connected to this jack to provide customized music and messages for callers on hold. Other types of audio equipment (including a CD player, cassette player or stereo receiver) can be connected using an audio cord with an RCA phono plug (not supplied). For more information, see “Music-On-Hold Audio Source” later in this guide. 10. Extension 10: These devices are connected. ■
PARTNER Endeavor-34D Display Phone. Typically, the receptionist at extension 10 has a PARTNER Endeavor-34D display phone like the one shown here. The display shows the time, dialed numbers, duration of calls, and programming messages.
2
11. Extension 11: PARTNER Endeavor-34D Display Phone. Another PARTNER Endeavor-34D is connected to programming extension 11. You can program the system from this extension, leaving the receptionist at extension 10 free to handle calls. 12. Extension 24: PARTNER Endeavor-6 Phone and Answering Machine. A PARTNER Endeavor-6 phone with standard answering machine is connected to this extension. 13. Extension 25: Fax. With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring, they can be plugged into any port. 14. Extension 14: PARTNER Endeavor-18D Display Phone. This is the doorphone alert extension. When someone presses the doorphone button, this phone signals and the user can press a button on the phone to release the doorlock. 15. Extension 15: A PARTNER Endeavor-6 phone is connected to this extension. 16. Extension 16: Doorphone. A doorphone is installed at the building entrance. When someone presses the button on the doorphone, the designated extensions signal. Extension 14 is the doorphone alert extension. Doorphones should not be connected to ETR-only ports since doorphones rely on receiving a forward disconnect signal to disconnect a call. 17. Extension 17: Fax Machine and Standard Phone. A fax machine and standard phone share this extension. This lets you have the use of another phone when the fax machine is idle. Standard phones and auxiliary equipment can be used only in the bottom two Tip Ring ports (the exception to this is that headphones can be plugged into any port since they do not require a ring). 18. Extension 18: MDW 9030P Pocketphone. This wireless phone is lightweight and portable.
A Sample System Setup
CONTROL UNIT 1
2 5 3
4 4 5 6
6
7 8
1
9
2
18 19 20
3 26 27
X
21
7
28 29
11
S
24 25
12
14 15
34 35
30
N
13
36
14
37
44
38
45
S
31 COMBO
32 COMBO
33
15
9
42
O
COMBO
COMBO
13
12 T E
I
23
11
10
N
22
10
E
43
COMBO
16
39
46
COMBO
17
COMBO
40
47
COMBO
41
COMBO
48 COMBO
49
8
EXTENSIONS
10 Extension 10 POWER RADIO PASS
212 MSG 5
Ext. Intercom
18 Extension 18
Message
Intercom
+ –
Feature
Conf
Mic HFAI
Transfr
Spkr
Hold
1 GHI
ABC
DEF
2
3
JKL
Feat/P
555 1212 ON 6
7
2
1
A
On/Off
B
8
3
4
C
D
Mute
Redial
1
2 ABC
Conf
4 GHI
Trans
7PQRS
3 DEF
5 JKL
6 MNO
8 TUV
9 WXYZ
0OPER
Hold
TransTalk
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
*
0
#
17 Extension 17
11 Extension 11
Ext. Intercom
14 Extension 14
Message
Intercom
+ –
Feature
Conf
Mic HFAI
Transfr
Spkr
Hold
ABC
1 GHI
2 JKL
DEF
3 MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
*
0
# Ext. Intercom
+ –
15 Extension 15 Ext.
12 Extension 24
Message
Intercom
Feature
Conf
Mic HFAI
Transfr
Spkr
Hold
ABC
1 GHI
2 JKL
DEF
3 MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
*
0
#
Message
+ –
Transfr
ABC
1 GHI
Intercom
Intercom
Ext.
Message
+ –
1 GHI
Feature
Spkr
Conf
Mic HFAI
Transfr
Hold
ABC
DEF
2 JKL
2 JKL
DEF
3 MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
*
0
#
13 Extension 25
3 MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
*
0
# PUSH
16 Extension 16
Figure 1. Sample System Setup
3
Installation
Required Parts You may have multiple system component packages; Figure 2 shows the package contents. Check your packages to be sure you have the parts shown here (if not, call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide).
PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Processor Module
AC Power Cord AAA Alkaline Batteries
MUSIC ON HOLD
COMBO
COMBO
Endeavor Processor Module
#8-15 x 11/2" Phillips® Sheet Metal Screws
7-foot Line Cords
Battery Door Cover
5-Slot Carrier
2-Slot Carrier #4 x 3/4" Panhead Sheet Metal Screws
PART NER Plus
2-Slot Carrier Cover
#8-15 x 31/2" Phillips Panhead Screw
362EC Module
7-foot Line Cords COMBO
COMBO COMBO
5-Slot Carrier
362EC Module
Figure 2. Required Parts NOTE: The Backup/Restore PC Card is optional for the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor and it can be purchased separately.
4
Installation Guidelines
For a 5-Slot Carrier, you will need to obtain four #12 screws of the appropriate type for the wall and weight of the control unit (a control unit with four 362EC expansion modules and a processor module weighs approximately 31 pounds or 14 kilograms). The weight of other configurations may vary slightly. In addition, order the following, if needed, before installation: ■
Modular telephone cords to connect the extension jacks in the control unit to the modular connecting blocks for extensions in the equipment room.
■
Short telephone cords or wall plates to wall mount PARTNER Endeavor-model phones.
■
355A/355AF adapter.
Refer to “Product Ordering Information” in Appendix B of the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide for ordering instructions. The PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module and the 362EC expansion modules support the Caller ID feature. These modules are required to provide Caller ID information on system display phones. You must subscribe to Caller ID service from your local telephone company (if it is available), and connect any lines associated with this service to the line jacks on the 362 processor module or the 362EC expansion module.
NOTE: A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 and/or 11. If you have any 34-button phones in the system, you must use a 34-button display phone to program, since an 18-button phone cannot be used to program a 34-button phone.
Installation Guidelines Telephones and Devices You can connect the following telephones and devices to the system: ■
PARTNER Endeavor-model, MDC 9000, and TransTalk® 9000-series System Phones. System phones require at least two-pair wiring and are compatible with Lucent Technologies 4-pair SYSTIMAX® wiring.
■
Call Assistant Intercom Autodialers with Busy Indication (PARTNER-CA48 for PARTNER Endeavor-model). You can connect an Intercom Autodialer to the system phones at extensions 10 or 11. The Intercom Autodialer connects to the system phone using an adapter that is shipped with the autodialer.
5
Installation
NOTE: With the exception of headphones, standard phones and auxiliary equipment work only on Tip Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring, they can be plugged into any port. ■
Industry-Standard Devices. Industry-standard devices (including standard phones) require one-pair mounting cords; Lucent Technologies D2R mounting cords are recommended. — Standard Phones. Connect standard touch-tone or rotary dial phones to the system. You can connect a standard phone either alone or combined with a system phone. For more information, see ‘‘Combination Extensions’’ on page 7. Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion module. Standard phones, however, will ring only on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports. — Power Failure Operation. During a power failure, system phones will not work because they require power to operate. If you connect a standard phone to the first extension on the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, however, users can place and answer outside calls on the first line. — Hotlines. A hotline extension should be connected to a standard phone, rather than a system telephone, but it can ring any type of phone. Standard phones can be used to make calls when plugged into any port of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion module. Standard phones, however, will ring only on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports. For the message-waiting capability, you must connect standard phones with LED-compatible message-waiting lights to a PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or the 362EC expansion modules. This message-waiting capability does not work with standard phones with neon-type message-waiting lights. — Auxiliary Equipment. There are a variety of ways to set up fax machines, modems, and answering machines to work with the system. See Chapter 4 in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide for advice on using this equipment. To connect a telephone and a standard device on the same extension, see ‘‘Combination Extensions’’ on page 7. With the exception of headphones, auxiliary equipment works only on Tip Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring, they can be plugged into any port.
6
Installation Guidelines
— Caller ID Device. A standard Caller ID device may be installed with the PARTNER system. This arrangement will give a user Caller ID information on a single outside line. If a user desires to use a standard Caller ID device on another line, another Caller ID device must be installed for that line. Note: The Caller ID device must be connected to the network line before the line is connected to the PARTNER processor module. The PARTNER system does not pass Caller ID information through to a station port. If the Caller ID device is to be located next to a PARTNER telephone, an additional wire pair will be needed to extend the line connection to the location where the PARTNER telephone is installed. To install a Caller ID device for Line 1, do the following: 1. Remove the line 1 cord from the PARTNER line 1 jack on the processor module and install a 267A2 bridging adapter into the line 1 jack. 2. Plug the line 1 cord (that was disconnected in step 1) into one of the jacks on the bridging adapter. 3. Plug the line 1 extended cord (the cord corresponding to the additional wire pair running to the location by the PARTNER telephone) into the other jack on the bridging adapter. 4. At the location where the Caller ID device is being installed, plug the other end of the line 1 extended cord into the Caller ID device. If the device has 2 jacks, plug the cord into the jack labeled LINE. 5. Plug in the power cord (if one exists) for the Caller ID device. ■
Doorphones. Doorphones should not be connected to an ETR-only port since doorphones rely on receiving a forward disconnect signal to disconnect a call. Connect doorphones to T/R ports, which are the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion module.
■
Voice Messaging Systems. The system supports the following voice messaging systems: — PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card. For more information on using this voice messaging system, see the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Installation, Programming, and Use guide. — PARTNER MAIL VS® System. This device resides in the control unit. — PARTNER MAIL® System. This device connects to the system through either 2, 4, or 6 extension jacks. Connect to the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or any 362EC expansion module.
7
Installation
■
In-Range Out-of-Building Protectors. To prevent damage from lightning, installing phones or other standard devices (such as a doorphone) in a location other than the building where the control unit is installed requires Lucent Technologies In-Range Out-of-Building (IROB) protectors. (IROBs must be installed by a qualified technician.) With the exception of headphones, standard phones and auxiliary equipment work only on Tip Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring, they can be plugged into any port.
Combination Extensions You can connect a standard device (such as a standard phone or an answering machine) so that it is on an extension by itself, or so that it shares an extension with another piece of equipment (either another standard device or a system phone). An extension with two devices connected to it is called a combination extension. (If you combine a standard phone and a system phone on one extension, you may want to turn off the standard phone’s ringer during normal use.)
NOTE: Standard phones, combination extensions, and auxiliary equipment work only on Tip Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or 362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring, they can be plugged into any port. You cannot install two system phones on the same extension. The combined REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) of two devices on one extension cannot exceed 2.0. (The REN for a system phone is 0.0.)
NOTE: The Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer is not regarded as a standard device. This means you can connect a standard device to a system phone that also has an Intercom Autodialer installed. PARTNER Endeavor-model system phones have a built-in auxiliary jack so you can connect a standard device directly to the phone without using a bridging adapter (see “Using a Direct Connection” below). If your phone does not have a built-in auxiliary jack or if you want to connect two standard devices together, you must use a Lucent Technologies 267F2 Bridging Adapter (see “Using a Bridging Adapter” below).
8
Installation Guidelines
Using a Direct Connection Figure 3 shows how to connect a standard device directly to a system phone, using the phone’s built-in auxiliary jack. (Figure 3 is for illustration purposes only; the placement of the jacks on your phone may differ.
System Phone
Plug line into jack labeled LINE
Plug standard device into jack labeled AUX
Figure 3. Combination Extension Using Direct Connection
Using a Bridging Adapter Figure 4 shows how to connect a system phone and a standard device or two standard devices using a Lucent Technologies 267F2 Bridging Adapter. This adapter can be ordered separately.
Lucent Technologies 267F2 Adapter Standard Device Only System Phone or Standard Device Wall Jack Figure 4. Combination Extension Using Bridging Adapter
9
Installation
Installation Procedures Before installing the system, be sure you read the safety instructions in the front of this guide. The PARTNER Endeavor Communications System can be installed in one of three configurations: ■
Stand-alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module or 362EC expansion module.
■
2-Slot Carrier, which can hold up to two modules.
■
5-Slot Carrier, which can hold up to five modules and includes a cover.
The stand-alone processor module or a carrier and its modules are referred to as the control unit. The control unit must always be wall-mounted. See the following sections for wall-mounting instructions.
Wall-Mounting a Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module Install the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of a properly grounded wall outlet (not controlled by a switch) and the network interface jacks. Use the following procedure to wall-mount the module:
1
a. Hold the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module against the wall with the line and extension jacks facing left. b. Leave at least 1 foot (0.3 meters) clearance at the top, front, and right side, and at least 2 feet (0.6 meter) at the bottom and left side. This allows you to access the jacks or expand the system with another module, and ensures adequate ventilation.
10
Installation Procedures
2
a. Insert one of the #8 sheet metal screws into the screw hole at the top of the module. b. If you are not installing a second module, insert the other #8 sheet metal screw into the screw hole at the bottom of the module. If you are installing a second module, do not screw in the bottom screw at this time. c. Tighten the screw or screws until the mounting tracks are snug against the wall. There must be a 3/8” (1 cm) gap between the wall and the rest of the module. Do not overtighten the screw or screws or the module will warp and fail to operate.
3
COMBO
COMBO
a. Label the line and extension jacks as shown. b. If you are installing a two-module system, continue with “Wall-Mounting a 2-Slot Carrier and Modules;” otherwise continue with “Inserting Batteries in the PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module.”
MUSIC ON HOLD
Wall-Mounting a 2-Slot Carrier and Modules To wall-mount a 2-Slot Carrier, first follow the instructions in “Wall-Mounting a Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module.”
NOTE: To add a second module, the Endeavor processor module must already be mounted on the wall. If it is not, refer to “Wall-Mounting a Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module” on the previous page for instructions. Before starting, disconnect the power cord from the power jack on the carrier. Then follow the instructions below.
11
Installation
You can install a 362EC expansion module or PARTNER MAIL VS module as the second module, using the following steps:
1
2 3
Remove the clear plastic protector from the connector on the right side of the new module by grasping the tabs on the ends of the protector and lifting. If you are upgrading from a stand-alone system, also remove the protector from the wall-mounted Endeavor processor module.
Remove the #8 sheet metal screw or screws from the bottom of the wall-mounted module or modules.
a. Slide the second module off the PARTNER Endeavor module and put it aside. b. Slide the new module onto the PARTNER Endeavor module, making sure the mounting tracks interlock, as shown in the side view.
! CAUTION: Do not force the module. If it does not insert easily, remove the module, clear any obstruction, and reinsert it.
4
a. Attach the 2-Slot Carrier to the top right side of the two modules. b. Fasten the carrier to the modules using the two #4 screws included with the carrier.
12
Installation Procedures
5
6
Insert the 3-1/2” #8 screw into the bottom of the modules. Tighten it until the mounting tracks of the PARTNER Endeavor module are flush against the wall with a 3/8” (1cm.) gap between the wall and the rest of the PARTNER Endeavor module. Do not overtighten or the module will warp.
Label the lines and extensions.
362EC Module
MUSIC ON HOLD
Combo
7
Combo
Continue with “Inserting Batteries in the PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module.”
13
Installation
Wall-Mounting a 5-Slot Carrier and Modules Install the 5-Slot Carrier within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of a properly grounded wall outlet (not controlled by a switch) and the network interface jacks. In addition, when you mount the carrier on the wall, leave at least 1 foot (0.3 meter) of clearance at the top and sides, and two feet (0.6 meter) at the front and bottom to ensure proper ventilation.
NOTE: The location of each module within the carrier is important; place them as instructed in the following procedure. Use the following procedure to wall-mount the carrier and module:
1
a. Hold the 5-Slot Carrier against the wall. b. Using the four screw keyholes in the carrier as a template, mark screw locations on the wall. c. If you are mounting the carrier on plywood, start four #12 screws supplied with the carrier, leaving the screw heads extending approximately 1/4 inch (0.64 cm) from the wall. If you are mounting on drywall, use wall anchors, which must be purchased separately.
2
14
Before installing any modules, make sure the clear plastic protector has been removed from the connector area on the rear of each module. To remove the protector, grasp the tabs on the ends of the protector and lift.
Carrier
"
1 4
Installation Procedures
3
a. Verify that the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module is in the center slot of the carrier. b. Align the module carefully in the appropriate slot. Push slowly but firmly in the center of the module until the connectors on the module lock into place, and the module is attached to the rear of the carrier.
COMBO
COMBO
c. Place the modules in the carrier from left to right. If adding the PARTNER MAIL VS module, make sure it is in the last slot.
! CAUTION: Do not force the module. If it does not insert easily, remove the module, clear any obstruction, and reinsert it.
4
COMBO COMBO COMBO COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
Label the line and extension jacks. 362EC Module
362EC Module
ECS Proc.
362EC Module
362EC Module
PFT
Line Jacks
4
7
1
10
13
5 6
8 9
2 3
11 12
14 15
18
26
10
34
42
19 20
27 28
11 12
35 36
43 44
21
29
13
37
45
22
30
14
38
46
23
31
15
39
47
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
Line Jacks
MUSIC ON HOLD
PFT
Extension Jacks
5
Extension Jacks
Continue with “Inserting Batteries in the PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module.”
15
Installation
Inserting Batteries in the PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module The PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module uses two user-replaceable, AAA-size standard alkaline batteries to guard against the loss of system programming in case of a power failure. These batteries will retain the system programming for 45 days to six months, depending on the freshness of the batteries. It is recommended that you replace the batteries with fresh ones every year.
! CAUTION: If this is a new installation, you need to install batteries. Batteries and battery cover are packed separately in the processor box. If you are replacing batteries, the old batteries must be removed with the power on or the system’s memory will be lost. Use the following procedure to replace the batteries:
1
a. Attach one end of a #12 AWG or #14 AWG solid copper wire to the grounding screw on the primary processor module. Note that the length of the wire must not exceed 35 feet (7.6 meters). b. Route the wire through the hook on the front of the module. c. Attach the other end of the wire to the approved earth ground, such as building steel or cold water pipe.
16
MUSIC ON HOLD
COMBO
COMBO
Installation Procedures
2
Locate the battery compartment at the bottom of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, below the extension jacks. COMBO
Battery Compartment
COMBO
Locking Latch
3
Push gently on the battery icon (the locking latch) and slide the battery icon up to cover the plus icon; this unlocks the battery assembly.
Locked Position
Unlocked Position
4
Remove the battery assembly by gently pulling the tab at the bottom of the battery compartment cover.
Tab
17
Installation
5
Insert two new AAA-size standard alkaline batteries into the metal battery clips by pushing them straight in, placing the negative (–) end of one battery into the bottom clip and the positive (+) end of the other battery into the top clip.
Push to insert
6
7
8
With the locking latch in the unlocked position (battery icon and “minus” icon visible), slide the battery assembly into the processor module along the battery guides on the inside of the battery compartment.
Make sure the battery assembly is pushed in far enough that the edges of the assembly slip behind the plastic housing of the processor module.
Pressing lightly on the battery icon on the front of the battery assembly, slide the locking latch downward to secure the assembly in place. The “plus” icon and the battery icon should now be visible on the front of the battery assembly. This is the locked position.
Tab
Locking Latch
Unlocked Position
Locked Position
18
Installation Procedures
Using the PC Card and Powering Up the System
! CAUTION: Batteries must be installed before powering down the system.
NOTE: The system must be powered down before you insert or remove a PC Card. Use the following procedure when using the PARTNER Endeavor PC Upgrade Card and when powering up the system for the first time:
1
If you are installing or upgrading to a 5-Slot Carrier system, you must install a PARTNER Endeavor PC Upgrade Card. Insert the card.
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
2
a. If you have a stand-alone or a 2-Slot Carrier configuration, skip to Step 2b. If you have a 5-Slot Carrier, turn the carrier’s On/Off switch to the “On” position, then go to Step 2c. b. Press the power cord firmly into the power jack on the 2-Slot Carrier or stand-alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module until it locks into place. (See the illustrations on this page for the location of the power jack for each type of configuration.)
19
Installation
c. Plug the other end of the power cord into a properly grounded three-prong wall outlet not controlled by a switch. If you have a stand-alone or 2-Slot Carrier system, go to Step 4.
3
4
If you installed the upgrade card, the bicolor (red/green) power LED on the processor flashes green and red alternately as the system upgrades. When the upgrade has completed (in about 20 seconds), the power LED becomes steady green. Dial Feature 59 at a display set to verify a successful upgrade. (If no display set is available, wait 30 seconds after the LED becomes steady green.)
Check all green lights on the fronts of the modules. a. If a single light is out, power down the system, reseat the module, then power up the system. b. If multiple lights are out, power down the control unit, reseat the left-most module that has a light out, then power up the system. c. If the lights are still out, call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide.
5
20
Power down the system. If you are upgrading, then go to Step 6. If you have a stand-alone or 2-Slot Carrier system, go to the procedure for “Connecting Lines and Extensions.”
Installation Procedures
6
If you installed or upgraded to a 5-Slot Carrier, remove the one-time-use software upgrade card.
NOTE: You may also want to install other available PC cards. Backup/Restore, Automatic System Answer/Direct Extension Dial and PARTNER Voice Messaging all require the use of a PC card. If you plan to use any of these features, see the installation instructions that came with the card.
7
Repower the system, then continue with the procedure for “Connecting Lines and Extensions” below.
Connecting Lines and Extensions If extensions are not wired to any modular jacks, call a qualified service technician. Use the following procedure to connect lines and extensions:
1
a. Test for a dial tone at the network interface jacks before connecting outside lines to the control unit. For the test, connect a standard phone to the first network interface jack. b. Lift the handset and listen for a dial tone. (If there is no dial tone, contact your local telephone company before continuing.)
555-1343 555-1344 555-1345 555-1346 Network Interface Jacks
c. Repeat for each network interface jack.
21
Installation
2
a. Connect line cords to the line jacks on the Endeavor processor module. Start at the top with the line jacks on the processor module, and then move to the leftmost 362EC expansion module. Fill each module before moving to the next module to the right.
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
b. Route each cord through the hook on the front of the module.
3
Connect the free end of each line cord to the appropriate network interface jack.
13
55
5
47
3 -1
5
55
8
4 13
5-
55
9
4 13
-
5 55
4
Test the lines—plug a system phone into extension jack 10. Press the line buttons for each outside line and listen for a dial tone.
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
NOTE: Standard phones and auxiliary equipment work only on Tip Ring ports (the bottom two ports of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor or
22
Installation Procedures
362EC expansion module). Because headphones do not require a ring, they can be plugged into any port.
5
a. Connect modular telephone cords to the extension jacks, starting at the top extension jack on the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module. When that module is full, move to the leftmost 362EC expansion module. Fill each module before moving on to the next module to the right.
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
b. Route each cord through the hook on the front of the module. c. Connect the free end of each modular telephone cord to the modular wall jacks for system extensions. d. Gather the line and extension cords hanging below the hooks of the first two modules and twist-tie or wire-wrap them. Repeat for the remaining cords. For the 5-Slot Carrier, place each bundle of wires in the indentations cut out of the bottom edge of the carrier.
23
Installation
6
If you have a stand-alone or a 2-Slot Carrier, go to Step 6e. If you have a 5-Slot Carrier configuration, install the cover as follows: a. Make sure all modules are seated properly. The cover will not fit if the modules are not seated properly. b. To cover the modules, grasp the upper edges of the cover and hold it squarely over the control unit. It is important to install the cover to keep the modules dust-free and the system working efficiently. c. Place the cover over the modules and make sure it fits firmly in place. d. Insert the #6 screw into the tab on the lower front of the cover. Tighten the screw. e. Continue with “Connecting and Testing Telephones.”
! CAUTION: Do not place anything on top of the cover to ensure proper ventilation.
24
Installation Procedures
Connecting and Testing Telephones
1
To connect a phone, plug the modular telephone mounting cord into a modular wall jack or directly into a module extension jack. (If you are connecting a standard phone and its mounting cord is loose, try a Lucent Technologies D2R mounting cord instead.)
1 2 3 Ext. Intercom
+ –
Mic
To install two phones (or other devices) on a single extension jack, see “Combination Extensions” earlier in this guide.
Message
Intercom
Feature
Conf
Transfr
HFAI Spkr
Hold
ABC
1 GHI
2 JKL
DEF
3 MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
*
0
#
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
NOTE: Standard telephones only work on Tip Ring ports, which are the bottom two ports of the processor or 362EC expansion module.
2
Test the telephone for proper operation. To test the power and lights on a system phone: a. While the phone is idle, press and hold the # button for five seconds. b. Before releasing the # button, lift the handset. All lights should light, the ringer should sound, and (on system display phones only) a test pattern should appear on the display. (If not, call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide.) c. Replace the handset; the phone is now in normal operating mode.
NOTE: You can purchase telephone wall-mount kits separately. See Appendix B in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide for ordering information.
25
Installation
Music-On-Hold Audio Source The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law. Accordingly, in order for the performance of that music to be lawful, it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives. You can purchase a Magic-On-Hold system from Lucent Technologies (800-446-5366), which includes the required license for the first year. This license must be renewed annually.
1
Insert an RCA phono plug into the Music-On-Hold jack on the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module (located near the middle of the processor, below the line jacks).
-
-
COMBO
2 3
26
COMBO
Route the cord as you did for line and extension cords, then connect the other end of the cord to the audio source.
Place a call on hold and listen. If you do not hear music at any setting, refer to Music-On-Hold (#602) and Music-On-Hold Volume (#614) in Chapter 5 of the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide.
Installation Procedures
Connecting a PARTNER-CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer The PARTNER-CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer is shipped with an adapter, a D8W line cord, a power cord, a power unit, and a button-labeling sheet.
NOTE: The PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialer can be wall-mounted to work next to a wall-mounted system phone. See the instructions provided with the Autodialer.
1 2
Plug the adapter into the wall jack. Wall Jack
Power Outlet
a. Plug one end of the D8W line cord into the J1 jack on the adapter. b. Plug the other end of the D8W line cord into the IN jack on the bottom of the autodialer. Ext. Intercom
+ –
3
Message
Intercom
Feature
Conf
Mic HFAI
Transfr
Spkr
Hold
ABC
1 GHI
2 JKL
DEF
3
IN
OUT
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
7
8
9
*
0
#
a. Plug the blue-tinted connector (labeled D8AC) of the power cord into the jack on the power unit.
! CAUTION: Use only the power unit supplied with the PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialer. b. Plug the other end (clear tinted) of the power cord into the J2 jack on the adapter. c. Plug the power unit into an electrical outlet.
4
Plug the phone’s modular telephone cord (LINE jack) into the OUT jack on the bottom of the autodialer.
27
Installation
5
a. Arrange the autodialer on the desk next to the phone. b. Remove the plastic cover from the autodialer and label the button sheet with employee names. Place the button sheet on the autodialer, then carefully replace the plastic cover.
Inte
rco
m Inte
rco
m
Ext. Fea ture Con f
Mic HFA I Spk r
Me
1
ssa
ge
ABC
Tra nsf r
2
GHI
4
DEF
3
JKL PQR
Hol d
7
5
S
MNO
6
TUV
8
*
WXY
9
0
Z
#
NOTE: If you unplug the system phone that is connected to an autodialer, you must reset the autodialer. To do so, unplug the D8W line cord (connected to the IN jack on the bottom of the autodialer) from the J1 jack on the adapter, then plug it back in.
Equipment Upgrades Replacing System Modules This procedure depends on your configuration:
28
If you have a...
See...
Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module configuration
“Replacing a Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module”
2-Slot Carrier configuration
“Replacing Modules in a 2-Slot Carrier”
5-Slot Carrier configuration
“Replacing or Adding Modules in a 5-Slot Carrier”
Equipment Upgrades
Replacing a Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module
! ! WARNING: Before starting, verify that you have batteries in the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module. Disconnect the power cord from the power jack on the processor module. For an illustration showing the location of the power jack, see “Using the PC Card and Powering Up the System” earlier in this guide.
NOTE: You may want to backup your system before replacing a processor module. To backup the system, see “Backup Programming – Manual” in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide.
1
2 3
Check the slack in the wires. If there is not enough slack to remove the module without pulling the line and extension cords free, label and disconnect the wires before continuing.
Remove the screws at the top and bottom of the module, and remove the module from the wall.
Follow the instructions in Steps 1 through 3, “Wall-Mounting a Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module” earlier in this guide. COMBO
COMBO
4
5
Connect the line and extension cords one at a time, making sure to place the correct cords into their corresponding jacks on the new module. (See “Connecting Lines and Extensions” earlier in this guide.)
Reconnect the power cord.
29
Installation
Replacing Modules in a 2-Slot Carrier
! ! WARNING: Before starting, verify that you have batteries installed in the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, and then disconnect the power cord from the power jack on the carrier. For an illustration showing the location of the power jack, see “Using the PC Card and Powering Up the System” earlier in this guide.
NOTE: You may want to back up your system before replacing a processor module. To back up the system, see “Backup Programming – Manual” in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide.
1
2 3
30
Check the slack in the wires. If there is not enough slack to remove the modules without pulling the line and extension cords free, label and disconnect the wires before continuing.
Remove the long screw at the bottom of the modules.
Remove the screws that attach the carrier to the modules.
Equipment Upgrades
4
5
Pull the carrier to the right to remove it.
a. Slide the top module to the left to disengage its interlocking mounting tracks from the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module. b. If you are replacing the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module, skip to Step 7. If you are replacing the top module, continue with Step 6. c. Remove the two #4 screws holding the carrier in place, and gently pull the carrier off the modules. d. Mount the new module by following Steps 3 through 6 in “Wall-Mounting a 2-Slot Carrier and Modules” earlier in this guide. Then skip to Step 8 below.
31
Installation
6
a. Remove the screw at the top of the PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module and remove the module from the wall. b. Mount the new PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module by following the instructions in “Wall-Mounting a Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module” earlier in this guide. c. Remount the top module by following steps 3 through 6 in “Wall-Mounting a 2-Slot Carrier and Modules” earlier in this guide. Then continue with Step 8 below.
7
8
32
Connect the line and extension cords one at a time, making sure to place the correct cords into their corresponding jacks on the new module. (See “Connecting Lines and Extensions” earlier in this guide.)
Reconnect the power cord.
COMBO
COMBO
Equipment Upgrades
Replacing or Adding Modules in a 5-Slot Carrier
! ! WARNING: Before starting, verify that you have batteries installed in the processor. Then, move the On/Off switch to “off,” and unplug the power cord. Lastly, disconnect the power cord from the wall jack on the carrier.
NOTE: You may want to back up your system before replacing a processor module. To back up the system, see “Backup Programming – Manual” in the PARTNER Endeavor Communications System Programming and Use guide.
1
a. Loosen the screw on the lower front of the carrier’s cover. Then place one hand on the handle on the lower front and the other hand on top of the cover. b. Gently pull the cover up and away from the carrier.
2
Before installing a module, make sure the clear plastic protector has been removed from the connector area on the rear of the module. To remove the protector, grasp the tabs on the ends of the protector and lift.
33
Installation
3
If you are simply adding a new module, skip to Step 3c. a. Check the slack in the wires. If there is not enough slack to remove the module without pulling the line and extension cords free, label and disconnect the wires before continuing with Step 3b. b. Place one hand on top of the module. With the other hand, grip the plastic bracket on the bottom front of the module, and pull out the old module. c. To add a new module or to insert the replacement, push slowly but firmly in the center of the module until the module locks into place and is attached to the rear of the carrier.
! CAUTION: Do not force the module. If the module does not insert easily, remove it, clear any obstruction, and reinsert it.
4
a. Connect the line and extension cords one at a time, making sure to place the correct cords into their corresponding jacks on the new module. (See “Connecting Lines and Extensions” earlier in this guide.) b. Reconnect the power cord. c. Move the carrier’s On/Off switch to the “On” position.
34
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
COMBO
Equipment Upgrades
5
Check that all green lights on the fronts of the modules are lit: a. If a single light is out, power down the control unit, reseat the module, then power up the control unit. b. If multiple lights are out, power down the control unit, reseat the leftmost module that has a light out, then power up the control unit. c. If the lights are still out, call for support as instructed on the inside front cover of this guide.
6
a. Make sure all modules are seated properly. The cover will not fit if the modules are not seated properly. b. To replace the cover, grasp it by its upper edges and hold it squarely over the control unit. c. Place the cover over the modules and make sure it fits firmly in place. d. Tighten the screw on the lower front of the cover.
Using PC Card for Upgrades and Special Features You can buy the following PC cards to upgrade your system and to acquire additional features, such as: ■
Backup and Restore PC Card
■
PARTNER Endeavor PC Upgrade Card
■
Automatic System Answer/Direct Extension Dial PC Card
■
PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card
See the installation instructions that came with the card to insert or remove a PC card.
35
Installation
Specifications Capacities System ●
●
●
●
40 extensions via extension jacks on one PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module plus four 362EC expansion modules 1 audio source via MusicOn-Hold jack on PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module (RCA phono plug required) 2 doorphones, using two extension jacks 1 voice messaging system – PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card, which uses a slot in the 2- or 5-Slot Carrier, or PARTNER MAIL, which connects to either 2, 4, or 6 extension jacks
Module
Extension Jack
PARTNER Endeavor 362 Processor Module
●
● ● ●
●
3 outside lines 8 extensions 2 touch-tone receivers when used in a stand-alone system, 0 touch-tone receivers when used with a 362EC expansion module 1 power-failure transfer extension
NOTE: The two devices combined on an extension jack can be a system phone with a standard device, or two standard devices.
362EC Expansion Module ● ● ●
3 outside lines 8 extensions 6 touch-tone receivers ●
DO NOT connect two system phones to the same extension jack. If a device lists two RENs, use the higher number when adding up the RENs.
●
No more than one system phone per jack
NOTE: Doorphones and PARTNER MAIL can only be used on the bottom two ports of the processor or 362EC expansion module.
36
Maximum two devices per extension jack, total REN on jack not to exceed 2.0 [System phone REN is 0.0 (zero)]
For programming, a system display phone must be connected to extension 10 and 11.
Specifications
Dimensions and Weights (approx.) ●
Processor Module
11" (D) x 17" (H) x 1.5" (W) or 27.9 x 43.2 x 3.8 cm
4.5 lbs or 2 kg
●
362EC Expansion Module
11" (D) x 17" (H) x 1.5" (W) or 27.9 x 43.2 x 3.8 cm
4.5 lbs or 2 kg
●
2-Slot Carrier
2" (D) x 9.75" (H) x 5.5" (W) or 5.1 x 24.8 x14 cm
1.0 lbs or.46 kg
●
5-Slot Carrier
12" (D) x 19" (H) x 11" (W) or 30.5 x 48.3 x 27.9 cm
5.5 lbs or 2.5 kg
●
PARTNER Endeavor-34D Phone
9.8" (D) x 3.75" (H) x 9.3" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 23.6 cm
2.7 lbs or 1.2 kg
●
PARTNER Endeavor-18D Phone
9.8" (D) x 3.75" (H) x 7.9" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 20.1 cm
2.4 lbs or 1.1 kg
●
PARTNER Endeavor-18 Phone
9.8" (D) x 3.75" (H) x 7.9" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 20.1 cm
2.3 lbs or 1.0 kg
●
PARTNER Endeavor-6 Phone
9.8" (D) x 3.75" (H) x 6.1" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 15.5 cm
1.9 lbs or .9 kg
●
PARTNER-CA48 Autodialer
9.8" (D) x 3.75" (H) x 6.1" (W) or 24.9 x 9.5 x 15.5 cm
1.5 lbs or 0.7 kg
37
Installation
Other Specifications Specifications
Description
Switch Fabric
●
Full digital, non-blocking
Electrical
●
35 watts (120 BTUs/hr) per PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module during normal power consumption 45 watts (154 BTUs/hr) per PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module during maximum power consumption 30 watts (105 BTUs/hr) per 362EC expansion module during normal power consumption 40 watts (140 BTUs/hr) per 362EC expansion module during maximum power consumption 45 days to 6 months memory backup with 2 AAA-size standard alkaline batteries (IEC LR03)
●
●
●
●
Processor Module
● ● ● ●
68306 16 Mhz processor 256Kbyte RAM 512Kbyte FLASH ROM Custom VLSI DSP ASIC—16bit, 52 Mhz — VLSI = Very Large Scale Integration — DSP = Digital Signal Processor — ASIC = Application Specific Integrated Circuit
Extension Jack (PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor and 362EC expansion module) Music-On-Hold Jack
● ● ●
● ●
Ringing voltage: +55VRMS Balanced ringing within a trapezoidal wave shaping 38- to 42-volt talk battery Ringing frequency: 20 HZ
Accepts 2 volts at 50 Kohms maximum input 0 – 18 dB attenuation
(continued)
38
Specifications
Specifications
Description
Environmental Requirements– Control Unit
● ●
● ● ●
Mount on a wall at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) from the floor (wall-mounting required) Locate within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not controlled by a switch, using supplied 7-foot (2.1-meter) cords Operating temperature 32° to + 104°F (0° to + 40°C), not in direct sunlight Humidity 15%-90%, noncondensing For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules, provide the following minimum clearance around the control unit: — 5-Slot Carrier: 1 foot (0.3 meter) clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet (0.6 meter) at the front and bottom — 2-Slot Carrier or Stand-Alone PARTNER Endeavor 362 processor module: 1 foot (0.3 meter) clearance at the front, top and right side, and 2 feet (0.6 meter) at the bottom and left side
Electrical Requirements– Control Unit
●
Locate in an area free of excess moisture, corrosive gases, dust, and chemicals
●
90 –130 VAC, 50–60 Hz, 3-prong outlet separate ground, separately fused at 15 amps Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1459:
●
A. An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors, except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes, is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system. B. The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment. C. The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type, and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment. Requirements for Out-ofBuilding Installations
●
Installation of a telephone or other standard (tip/ring) device in another building requires the following In-Range Out-Of-Building (IROB) protectors to protect the control unit and device from electrical surges: — System phone: two Lucent Technologies IROB protectors. — Standard phone: one Lucent Technologies IROB protector plus one carbon block protector.
Wiring
●
●
● ●
System phones: Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX® Bulk Nonplenum (DIW) cable, Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX Bulk Plenum (HALAR/HALAR) cable, or at least 2-pair (4-wire) star (“home run” not “loop”) Other standard telecommunications equipment (single-line phones, fax machines, answering machines, etc.): 1-pair (2-wire) mounting cords (Lucent Technologies D2R mounting cords recommended) Bridging adapter: Lucent Technologies 267F2 Range: 1,000 feet (305 meters) for system phones; 3,000 feet (915 meters) for standard devices
(continued)
39
Installation
Specifications
Description
Safety Requirements
● ●
U.S.: Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Canada: Meets CSA C22.2, 225
Government Approvals and Local Phone Company Information
●
U.S.: FCC Part 68 Key System registration: FCC #AS5USA-61630-KF-E FCC Part 68 Pooling and Hybrid System registration number: FCC #AS5USA-21213-MF3 Class A: 5-Slot Configuration 2-Slot Configuration with 362EC or PARTNER MAIL VS Class B: PARTNER Endeavor Stand-Alone Configuration REN (outside line jack): 0.9A per line jack Jack type: RJ11C Loop start lines
●
Canada: IC CP01, Issue 7 IC registration number (Canada): See the label on the side of the control unit. IC CS03, Issues 6 & 7 Load Number = 7 Loop start lines
40
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System System Planner
518-456-161 Comcode 700018005 Issue 3 May 2001
0 Copyright 2001 Avaya Inc. All Rights Reserved Printed in USA
Document 518-456-161 Comcode 700018005 Issue 3 May 2001
Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This system is Class B compliant in some configurations. For additional FCC information, see the PARTNER Customer Support Document.
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada. Le Présent Appareil Nomérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la class A préscrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le Industrie Canada.
Preventing Toll Fraud “Toll fraud” is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or working on your company’s behalf). Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that, if toll fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services. The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment rests with you — an Avaya Inc. system administrator, your telecommunications peers, and your managers. Avaya Inc. does not warrant that this product or any of its networked equipment is either immune from or will prevent either unauthorized or malicious intrusions. Avaya Inc. will not be responsible for any charges, losses, or damages that result from such intrusions. For important information regarding your system and toll fraud, see the PARTNER Customer Support Document.
Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support assistance, call the Avaya Customer Care Center at 1 800 628-2888.
Warranty Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to the “Limited Use Software License Agreement” card provided with your package. For additional warranty information, see the PARTNER Customer Support Document.
Trademarks PARTNER, PARTNER MAIL VS, PARTNER MAIL, MLS-34D, MLS-18D, MLS-12D, MLS-12, MLS-6, MDC 9000, MDW 9000, MDW 9010 MDW 9030P, and SYSTIMAX are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Ordering Information Call:
Avaya Publications Center Voice 1 800 457-1235 Fax 1 800 457-1764
Write:
Avaya Publications Center 2855 N. Franklin Road Indianapolis, IN 46219-1385
Order:
Avaya Publications Center Document No. 518-456-161 Comcode: 700018005 Issue 3, May, 2001
International Voice 317 322-6791 International Fax 317 322-6699
For additional documents, refer to the PARTNER Customer Support Document.
Customer Support If you need assistance when programming or using your system, contact your local Authorized Dealer or call the Avaya Customer Care Center at 1 800 628-2888. Consultation charges may apply.
Obtaining Products See “Obtaining Products” in the PARTNER Customer Support Document.
Avaya Web Page For related documents, go to www.avaya.com/support.
Heritage Statement Intellectual property related to this product (including trademarks) and registered to Lucent Technologies Inc. has been transferred or licensed to Avaya Inc. Any reference within the text to Lucent Technologies Inc. or Lucent should be interpreted as reference to Avaya Inc. The exception is cross references to books published prior to May 1, 2001, which may retain their original Lucent titles. Avaya Inc., formed as a result of Lucent's planned restructuring, designs, builds, and delivers voice, converged voice and data, customer-relationship management, messaging, multiservice networking, and structured cabling products and services. Avaya Labs is the research and development arm for the company.
Important Safety Instructions The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be followed when using your telephone equipment. 1. Read and understand all instructions. 2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. 3. Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning. DO NOT use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. 4. This product should be serviced by (or taken to) a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required. 5. DO NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement location. 6. DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. 7. Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. 8. DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
CAUTION: DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots or openings; they prevent the product from overheating. DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided. DO NOT place the product flat on a surface. The control unit must be wall-mounted.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
0 We'd like your opinion . . . We welcome your feedback on this document. Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our documentation.
PARTNER® Advanced Communciations System System Planner Issue 3, May 2001 518-456-161, Comcode 700018005 1. Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas: Excellent Good Ease of Finding Information Clarity Completeness Accuracy Organization Appearance Examples Illustrations Overall Satisfaction
Fair
Poor
...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ......
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document: Improve the overview/introduction
Make it more concise
Improve the table of contents
Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Improve the organization
Add more troubleshooting information
Add more figures
Make it less technical
Add more examples
Add more/better quick reference aids
Add more details
Improve the index
Please add details about your major concerns. ___________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ 3. What did you like most about this document? ____________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ 4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet. _____________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following: Name: ____________________________________ Telephone Number: ( ____ ) _________________ Company/Organization: _________________________
Date: ______________________________
Address: __________________________________________________________________________
You may FAX your response to 908 953-6912. Thank you.
Internet Security-Related Issues
0
There are certain security risks associated with using the 1600 DSL module due to its Internet connections. Appendix A provides a Security Notification Checklist. As the authorized installer, you should review this information with your customer to ensure all security requirements are understood. Then complete the Security Notification and Checklist with the customer.
General Information
0
The purpose of these planning forms is to facilitate the installation of your system. The authorized installer will use these forms to configure your new PARTNER system to your specifications. By filling in the appropriate information and selecting the preferred options and features in advance, you will help to quickly get your system up and running. As you become more familiar with your PARTNER system you may change or enhance the system to get the most out of the system's many features and capabilities. The Table of Contents on the following page provides an overview of the forms included in this planner. All new customers are required to complete Forms A, B, and C. However, the remaining forms can be used to plan additional features that are optional in your PARTNER system. As you complete these forms, please refer to the instructions for each form for additional guidance. Several forms in this Planner require a printer setting of 1200 dots per inch (dpi). Lower dpi settings will cause the image resolution on some of the forms to be unclear.
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Table of Contents
0
Form
Required
Form A–Customer Information Form B–System Configuration: Lines Form C–Extension Settings Form C1–Extension Settings Worksheet Form C–Extension Settings: Feature Descriptions Form D–Auxiliary Equipment Form E–System Configuration: Default Settings Forms F1-F5: System Configuration: Lists Form F1–System Speed Dial Form F2a–Disallowed Lists Form F2b–Allowed Lists Form F3–Hunt Groups Form F4–Forced Account Code Form F5–Customized Extensions/Pool Access Restrictions 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist
ALL ALL ALL
Appendix A: Security Notification and Checklist
If you are attaching auxiliary equipment. If you wish to change certain system defaults. If you are setting system speed dials, using disallowed/ allowed lists, using hunt groups, using forced account codes, pooling lines, etc.
Page No. 1 3 6 8 11—14 15 17 19 20 23 24 26 28 30—31 33 41
Table of Contents TOC - i
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System 0
Table of Contents TOC - ii
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form A–Customer Information
0
CUSTOMER BILLING NAME:
BILLING PHONE NUMBER:
CUSTOMER CONTACT:
CONTACT PHONE NUMBER:
PERSON TO BE TRAINED:
TRAINEE PHONE NUMBER:
SALES PERSON/ACCT EXEC:
SALES/AE PHONE NUMBER:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACTOR PHONE NUMBER:
(only required if new construction) INSTALLATION ADDRESS: INSTALLATION DUE DATE: NOTES TO INSTALLER: FEATURES OF INTEREST: (list in order of priority) SERVICE VERIFICATION:
Provide the name of the telephone service representative who verified your service and the date the service was verified. This is not required for all installations. See next page for details.
VERIFIER NAME:
DATE VERIFIED:
INSTALLER NAME:
DATE OF INSTALLATION:
Form A–Customer Information 1
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form A: Instructions for Customer Information
Service Verification
0
0
In almost all cases, the default telephone service provided by your local Phone Company will be appropriate for the PARTNER system. However, if you are switching telephone systems from a competitor's system to a PARTNER system, or if this is the first time telephone service is being established at this site, you will need to verify that your local phone company is providing you with default telephone service (Loop Start) or the installation of your PARTNER system may not be completed on the expected due date. Please provide the person's name and the date they verified default phone service in the “Service Verification” space provided on the previous page.
Form A: Instructions for Customer Information 2
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form B–System Configuration: Lines Who is the customer contact responsible for the layout of the system?
LINE NO. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
DESIRED TELEPHONE NUMBERS
ANSWERING OPTION1
CALLER ID SERVICE
OTHER SUBSCRIPTION SERVICES
0
Name: ___________________
Telephone: __________________
If the line is a personal or dedicated line fill in the following OR EQUIPMENT CALL NAME OF LINE OWNER
COVERAGE
EXTENSION NUMBER
1. AA, DXD, ASA, Hunt, VMS-AA, VMS-MAIL, LIVE, AUX. See back for details.
Form B–System Configuration: Lines 3
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form B: Instructions for System Configuration: Lines
0
COLUMN 2: DESIRED TELEPHONE NUMBERS: Write in the telephone numbers assigned to each line. Please list the lines that will be used by multiple extensions first, then list dedicated and/ or personal lines. COLUMN 3: ANSWERING OPTION In this space, write in the abbreviation from the list below that indicates how incoming calls to each line will be answered. In most cases, some form of automated answering option will be selected. NOTE: To avoid confusing caller, it is recommended that only one type of automated answer option be used to handle incoming calls throughout the system. Automated Answer Options: AA
Automated Attendant
DXD
Direct Extension Dialing
ASA
Automatic System Answer
Hunt
Hunt Group
VMS-AA
Automated Attendant Service of PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS Voicemail on a personal line
VMS-MAIL
Automated system answers and routes calls. Must be purchased separately. Allows caller to dial extensions without waiting for the receptionist. Available with ACS R2.0 or later. Plays a recorded message then either places the call on hold, disconnects the call or continues to ring available extensions. Available with ACS R2.0 or later. Sends calls simultaneously to a group of extensions. Up to 4 calling groups can be programmed in the system. This is system-wide voicemail service. If the receptionist does not answer an incoming call, VMS-AA lets the caller select an extension or route. The PARTNER MAIL, PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card must be purchased separately.
Other Options: LIVE
Human Operator
AUX
Auxiliary Equipment
If all calls to a specific line will always be answered by a human operator, write in LIVE. If all calls will always be answered by a piece of auxiliary equipment, such as a fax machine, write in AUX.
COLUMN 4 & 5: CALLER ID AND OTHER SUBSCRIPTION SERVICES Check the box if Caller ID Service is activated on this line. In the next column, write in any other telephone subscription services (ordered from your local telephone company) that are active on this line (i.e., repeat call service).
Form B: Instructions for System Configuration: Lines 4
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System 0 COLUMN 6: Write in the owner (or assigned auxiliary equipment) for the personal or dedicated line. COLUMN 7: Check the box if you wish the owner of the personal or individual line to have the ability to activate Call Coverage for that line. COLUMN 8: Write in the extension number of the owner of the personal or individual line.
Form B: Instructions for System Configuration: Lines 5
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form C–Extension Settings
0
Note: See Form C1 to enter character codes for Ext. Display. LINES ASSIGNED EXT. EXT
OWNER
DISPLAY up to 20
PHONE SET TYPE
Forced
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Form C–Extension Settings 6
Acct
Distinctive Abbrev. Intermed Delayed No Ring
10
CHANGE DEFAULT SETTINGS
with Ringing Options
Lang
Ring
Ringing
Privacy
Code
Call
Voice
Coverage Interrupt Rings
on Busy
BUTTON FEATURES
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form C–Extension Settings (Continued)
0 LINES ASSIGNED
EXT. EXT
OWNER
DISPLAY up to 20
PHONE SET TYPE
CHANGE DEFAULT SETTINGS
with Ringing Options
Forced Distinctive Abbrev. Intermed Delayed No Ring
Lang
Ring
Ringing
Acct Privacy
Code
Call
Voice
Coverage Interrupt Rings
on Busy
BUTTON FEATURES
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Form C–Extension Settings (Continued) 7
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form C1–Extension Settings Worksheet
0
May be used if Ext. Display is checked on Form C. Ext. Jack No.
Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed–See Table at Right
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Form C1–Extension Settings Worksheet 8
Character Codes Letters: A = 21 N = 62 B = 22 O = 63 C = 23 P = 71 D = 31 Q = 72 E = 32 R = 73 F = 33 S = 74 G = 41 T = 81 H = 42 U = 82 I = 43 V = 83 J = 51 W = 91 K = 52 X = 92 L = 53 Y = 93 M = 61 Z = 94 Numbers: blank = 11 0 = 00 5 = 50 1 = 10 6 = 60 2 = 20 7 = 70 3 = 30 8 = 80 4 = 40 9 = 90
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form C1–Extension Settings Worksheet (Continued)
Ext. Jack No. 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
0
Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed–See Table at Right
Character Codes Letters: A = 21 N = 62 B = 22 O = 63 C = 23 P = 71 D = 31 Q = 72 E = 32 R = 73 F = 33 S = 74 G = 41 T = 81 H = 42 U = 82 I = 43 V = 83 J = 51 W = 91 K = 52 X = 92 L = 53 Y = 93 M = 61 Z = 94 Numbers: blank = 11 0 = 00 5 = 50 1 = 10 6 = 60 2 = 20 7 = 70 3 = 30 8 = 80 4 = 40 9 = 90
Form C1–Extension Settings Worksheet (Continued) 9
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form C: Instructions for Extensions Settings
0
COLUMN 5 — LINES ASSIGNED WITH RINGING OPTIONS List the lines (or pool code for a pool of lines, if appropriate) that you would like assigned to each extension. For each line you enter, you have the option of listing it as an immediate ringing line, a delayed ringing line, or a no ring line. The default option for lines is immediate ringing. (For pools, the default option is no ringing). NOTE: Any line not listed will be removed from that extension and will not be accessible from that extension. COLUMN 6 — CHANGE DEFAULT SETTINGS Language: Default = English. If you wish to display messages in a different language, write in the language. This is relevant only for extensions with display phones. Distinctive Ring: Default = Active. By default, outside, intercom, and transferred calls each have their own ringing pattern. To change the default so that all calls ring the same, write “NA” (Not Active) in this column. Abbreviated Ringing: Default = 1 ring. When a phone is in use, a new call will ring once. The line button light will continue to flash until the call is answered. Privacy: Default = Not Activated. By default, any user sharing a line can join calls at another extension (Privacy is Not Assigned). If all calls are to be private, write “A” (Assigned) in this column. Always use this feature for Fax and modem extensions. Forced Acct Code: Default = Not Activated. If a user should be required to enter an account code before placing an outside call, write “A” (Activated) in this column. Coverage Rings: For calls going to a covering extension the Default = 2 rings. For calls going to a voicemail box the Default = 3 rings. You can choose between 1 to 9 rings. Enter the number of rings desired before a call is sent to the covering extension/or voicemail box. Can be set per extension for ACS 3.0 or later. Can only be set system wide for earlier releases. Voice Interrupt on Busy: Default = Not Activated. To identify an extension as being eligible for Voice Interrupt on Busy calls, write “A” (Activated) in this column. COLUMN 7 — BUTTON FEATURES In the space provided for each extension, list the features (by the feature numbers indicated) that should be pre-programmed onto the buttons on the telephone set. The number of available buttons varies from set type to set type. A complete description of the available button features is included on the following page.
Form C: Instructions for Extensions Settings 10
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form C–Extension Settings: Feature Descriptions
0
0
Feature Descriptions # 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Automatic System (ACS R2.0 or later only) Turns Automatic System Answer on and off. When the feature Answer is on, a call that is not answered by the receptionist is answered by the system; the system plays a brief message, then places the call on hold, continues to ring all extensions that have the line, or disconnects the call. To use Automatic System Answer, extension 10 must be programmed with an ASA button. Direct Extension (ACS R2.0 or later only) Turns Direct Extension Dial on and off. When the feature is on, Dial a call that is not answered by the receptionist is answered by the system; the system plays a brief message, then lets the caller dial an extension number or wait for the receptionist. To use Direct Extension Dialing, extension 10 must be programmed with a DXD button. Night Service Turns Night Service on and off. Phones in the Night Service Group ring immediately when the feature is active, regardless of normal ringing. To use Night Service, extension 10 must be programmed with a Night Service button. Night Service Group extensions should be identified on Form F5. Outgoing Call Allows the user at extension 10 to change the outgoing call restriction for a particular Restriction extension. An Auto Dial button with lights must be programmed for each extension to be changed. Wake Up Service Allows the user at extension 10 to schedule an intercom call to a target extension at a designated time. If Music-On-Hold (#602) is active, music is played when the phone is answered; otherwise, nothing is heard. Fax Management Transfers calls to the fax machine at the designated extension with one touch. The lights show when the fax is busy or when it is having trouble and not answering-for example, when it is out of paper. Call Screening (R3.0 or later only and you must have a voice messaging system and an MLS or PARTNER system phone) Allows the user to listen to a caller leaving a message in the user's mailbox. Once the voice mail system has answered the call, the call screening begins. While the call is being screened, the user is connected to the call in a listen only mode on the speakerphone. This feature can be programmed for any extension. This feature must be assigned by Centralized Programming from either Extension 10 or Extension 11.
Ext. 10 Only
Button Light Required
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Button Light Recommended
●
●
Form C–Extension Settings: Feature Descriptions 11
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
0
Feature Descriptions–(Continued) # 8
9
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17
18
FEATURE Caller ID Inspect
Caller ID Logging
DESCRIPTION When a user at a display phone is already on a call, this feature shows Caller ID information for another line (if Caller ID information is available on that line) without disconnecting the current call or putting it on hold. When the feature is active, the button light is on. (ACS R2.0 or later only) Users at a display phone can access a Caller ID log to ascertain caller's phone numbers automatically. When a user has logged calls, the word CALLS displays.
Caller ID Name Display
When a user at a display phone is on a call on a line that has Caller ID information available, this feature lets the user switch between the caller's phone number (the default display) and the caller's name (if available). When the feature is active- indicating that the caller's name should be displayed-the button light is on. Do Not Disturb Prevents calls from ringing at the extension. When the feature is active, the button light is on. Intercom calls get a busy signal, and outside callers hear ringing. Use only if someone else answers the extension's outside calls. If VMS Cover and Do Not Disturb are both active, intercom, transferred, and outside calls on owned lines go directly to the extension's voice mailbox. If Call Coverage and Do Not Disturb are both active, intercom, transferred, and outside calls on lines assigned ownership go directly to the covering extension. Transfer Return type calls will ring a phone with Do Not Disturb active. Privacy Lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn Privacy on and off, preventing or allowing users to join calls at the user’s extension as needed. Record-A-Call This feature applies only to systems that have PMVS (R5.0 or later) equipped with four ports, and an MLS or PARTNER system phone. This feature is not available on tip/ring phones. VMS Cover This feature only applies if you have a voice messaging system. It defines the number of times a call rings before it is sent to a user’s voice mailbox. Voice Interrupt on This feature is available only on system phones. This feature lets you program a button that is used Busy Talk-Back to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call while the user is active on another call. Intercom Auto Places a ringing intercom call to an extension, or transfers a call. If on a button with lights, the lights Dialing-Ring show calling activity at the destination extension. Intercom Auto Places a voice-signaled intercom call to the extension's phone speaker, or transfers a call with a Dialing-Voice voice-signaled announcement. If on a button with lights, the lights show calling activity at the Signal destination extension. Manual Signaling - Beeps the designated extension. If the user presses i first, pressing the button places a ringing intercom call to the extension, or transfers a call. If on a button with lights, the lights show Ring calling activity at the destination extension.
Form C–Extension Settings: Feature Descriptions 12
Ext. 10 Only
Button Light Required
Button Light Recommended
●
●
●
●
● ● ● ● ● ●
●
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
0
Feature Descriptions–(Continued) # 19
20
21 22
23
24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35
FEATURE
Ext. 10 Only
DESCRIPTION
Manual Signaling - Beeps the designated extension. If the user presses i first, pressing the button places a Voice voice-signaled intercom call to the extension, or transfers a call with a voice-signaled announcement. If on a button with lights, the lights show calling activity at the destination extension. Account Code Allows the user to enter an account code for a call by pressing the button, entering up to 16 digits Entry for the account code, then pressing the button again. If on a button with lights, the lights show when the feature is in use. Background Music Turns background music on and off at the speaker of an idle system phone. If on a button with lights, the lights show when the feature is in use. Call Coverage (ACS R2.0 or later only) Directs all intercom, transferred, and outside calls on lines assigned ownership to the designated extension. You may program originating and covering extension numbers on the button. If on a button with lights, the lights show when the feature is in use. Call Forwarding Forwards all calls to the designated extension. Unless Do Not Disturb is on, phone beeps once each time a call is forwarded. You may program originating and destination extension numbers on the button. If on a button with lights, the lights show when the feature is in use. Contact Closure 1 Allows user to activate Contact Closure 1. User must belong to Contact Closure Group. See Form D. Contact Closure 2 Allows user to activate Contact Closure 2. User must belong to Contact Closure Group. See Form D. Call Park Parks a call at your extension so it can be picked up from any other extension. Call Pickup Picks up a ringing, held, or parked call at the designated extension. Conference Drop Drops the last outside party added to a conference call. Direct Line Pickup Allows the user to access a ringing, active or held call on a line that is not assigned to the extension. Direct Line Pickup is subject to Line Access Restrictions. Exclusive Hold This feature is available only on system phones. This feature prevents other extensions from picking up outside calls placed on hold at a specific extension with a system phone. Group Calling Allows users to ring, page, or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the extensions in any one of Ring/Page four Calling Groups. Group Hunt Ring/ Lets you distribute call volume among extensions in a group, to off-load call activity from a single Signal user. Group Pickup Allows user at any extension in the system to answer any outside, intercom, or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group (where G is a Pickup Group number from 1 — 4). Intercom Autodial Lets telephone system place intercom calls with a single touch, by pressing a programmed button.
Button Light Required
Button Light Recommended
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
Form C–Extension Settings: Feature Descriptions 13
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
0
Feature Descriptions–(Continued) # 36 37
38 39 40 41 42
43 44 45 46
47
FEATURE
Button Light Required
Button Light Recommended
Last Number Redial Manual Signaling
Form C–Extension Settings: Feature Descriptions 14
DESCRIPTION
Redials the last outside number dialed (maximum 28 digits). This feature is useful for immediately redialing a busy number. This feature applies only to PARTNER and MLS-model phones. This feature lets you program a button on your PARTNER or MLS-model phone that you can use to signal a predetermined coworker’s extension. Message Light On Turns on the message light at a specified extension (where XX is a system extension number). Message Light Off Turns off the message light at a specified extension (where XX is a system extension number). Recall Causes the system to send a timed switchhook flash over the telephone line to recall a new dial tone or to access a PBX, central office, or Centrex feature, such as Call Waiting. Save Number This feature is available only on system phones. This feature saves into temporary memory the Redial last outside number (up to 28 digits) dialed from an extension with a system phone. Simultaneous Accesses the loudspeaker paging system, if you have one connected to the system through the Paging PAGE jack on the primary processor module, and all of the idle system phones with speakers assigned to Calling Group 1. Station Lock This feature is available only on system and standard touch-tone phones. This feature lets users enter a four-digit code on their telephone dialpad to lock their extension. Touch-tone Enable This feature is available only on system phones. This feature lets a system phone user send touch-tone signals on an outside call over a rotary line. Voice Mail This feature is available only if you have a voice messaging system. It is available only on system Message phones. Lets callers leave voice mail messages to called extension. Voice Mail Box This feature is available only if you have a voice messaging system. It is available only on system Transfer phones. This feature lets a system phone user transfer a caller directly to a specific extension’s voice mailbox, in order for a caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension. Auto Dial Buttons Places a call to an outside telephone number. Outside telephone numbers can be up to 28 digits. If a dial-out code is required to dial outside numbers (for example, on PBX or Centrex lines), include it in the stored number followed by pauses, if necessary. Write in Numbers here:
Ext. 10 Only
●
●
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form D–Auxiliary Equipment
0
Please check the box next to any auxiliary equipment you have attached to your phone or phone system. System vs. Line/Extension based Auxiliary Equipment System
Extension
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Battery Backup Music-on-Hold Call Waiting Extra Alert Modem Specialty Handset
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Y
Fax Machine
Y Y Y
External Hotline
ASA/DXD Card Hotline Electrical surge protector (IROB) Credit Card Scanner
Answering Machine Passageway Software
Headset
Y
Contact Closure 1 (i.e., a door lock)
Specify operation type
1 second on ______ 5 seconds on ______
3 seconds on (default) _______ Toggle
Y
Contact Closure 2
Specify operation type
1 second on ______ 5 seconds on ______
3 seconds on (default) _______ Toggle
Y
Call Reporting (SMDR)
Specify operation type
Report type: Report all calls or outgoing calls only? Output format: How many digits should appear (up to 24)? Talk time: Should the duration of each call appear?
Y
Loudspeaker paging
Number of zones:
Specify the Line or Extension that the equipment is connected to: AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
LINE #
DEDICATED YES/NO
EXTENSION #
HUNT GROUP
PRIVACY ON/OFF
Form D–Auxiliary Equipment 15
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form D: Instructions for Auxiliary Equipment
0
The following settings may be useful for auxiliary equipment: For a dedicated line (such as a Fax line, see Form B), assign the line to the equipment extension and remove it from other extensions. To prevent other extensions from interrupting calls, write “A” (Assigned) in the Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) column. In general, do not assign auxiliary equipment extensions to a Pickup Group, Calling Group, Hunt Group, or Night Service Group.
If DXD is checked, specify the following: Direct Extension Dial Delay (#112)-By default, a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default _____. Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback (I 892)-message of up to 48 seconds that caller hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature. Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11: DXD: (PARTNER ACS R2.0 or later only)
If ASA is checked, specify the following: Automatic System Answer Delay (#110)-By default, a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default _____. Automatic System Answer Mode (#121)-By default, ASA calls are put on hold after the greeting plays. Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected: Ring Disconnect ASA Record/Playback (I 891)-message of up to 65 seconds that caller hears when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature. Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11:
Description of each equipment with default settings and recommended program options. Battery Backup: This is required in some countries because power can be lost several times a day. It is not typically used in the United States. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply. Used as protection in the event of occasional power losses.
Form D: Instructions for Auxiliary Equipment 16
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form E–System Configuration: Default Settings
0
For many features, your PARTNER system is pre-programmed with a default setting. In the table below, either confirm the default setting (see backside of page for details on these) or write in the preferred setting.
1.
How many lines are assigned to each extension?
2.
If you wish to use a password for Night Service and dialing restrictions, write the 4-digit password.
3.
While a call is being transferred which of the following would you like the caller to hear? Circle one.
Ringing
4.
How many times should a transferred call ring before it is sent to the transfer return extension?
Transfer Return Rings: _____
5.
Would you prefer that the music-on-hold jack be activated or de-activated?
6.
The PARTNER system will automatically calculate daylight savings, unless you specifiy NO.
YES: _____
7.
If any of your lines will not be “Touch-Tone” lines, write in the telephone number of each rotary line?
Rotary Lines:
8.
If any of your lines will be pooled together, circle POOL. Otherwise, if all your lines will operate independently circle KEY. If you circled POOL, see Form F5 for more details.
KEY
Lines 31 (R4) Silence
Music
NO: _____
POOL
Form E–System Configuration: Default Settings 17
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form E: Instructions for System Configuration: Default Settings
0
QUESTION 1: LINES PER EXTENSION: For the PARTNER ACS processor or 308EC module, the default setting assigns 3 lines to each extension. For the 206 module, the default setting assigns 2 lines to each extension. For the 400 module, the default setting assigns 4 lines to each extension. For the 1600 DSL module, the default setting assigns 31 lines to each extension (R4). QUESTION 2: SYSTEM PASSWORD: The default setting is “No Password.” If a password is desired, this password will be required to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. QUESTION 4: RINGS BEFORE THE TRANSFER RETURNS: By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before it goes to the transfer return extension. If preferred setting is different than 4, write in the preferred number of rings. (Options are 1 through 9). QUESTION 8: POOL VS. KEY Most PARTNER customers operate their lines in KEY mode. This mode works well for customers with a minimum number of incoming lines (i.e., less than 5). In Key mode, the selected lines will show up as distinct buttons on each user's phone. The user can view the buttons to determine which lines are in use, and which are open before initiating a call. In HYBRID mode, some of the lines are pooled together. This pooling is transparent to the user. For instance if 3 lines are pooled under the company's main number, up to 3 users can select the button marked with that number before the pool is busy. This mode is appropriate for companies requiring a lot of lines. If you wrote POOL in this box, see Form F5. Pooling is only available for PARTNER ACS R2.0 or later. By default, the system is configured for KEY mode.
Form E: Instructions for System Configuration: Default Settings 18
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Forms F1-F5: System Configuration: Lists
0
In this form, you need to create five different tables. One for each of the following: ■
System Speed Dial
■
Disallowed and Allowed Lists
■
Hunt Groups
■
Forced Account Code
■
Customized Extensions/Pool Access Restrictions
Forms F1-F5: System Configuration: Lists 19
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F1–System Speed Dial
0
Optional for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additional instructions, see next page. To Dial: On system phones, press f + 3—digit code. On standard phones, press # + 3—digit code while receiving intercom dial tone. Code Name/Company *1 Telephone No.2 Code Name/Company *1 Telephone No.2 Code Name/Company *1 Telephone No.2 600 634 668 601 635 669 602 636 670 603 637 671 604 638 672 605 639 673 606 640 674 607 641 675 608 642 676 609 643 677 610 644 678 611 645 679 612 646 680 613 647 681 614 648 682 615 649 683 616 650 684 617 651 685 618 652 686 619 653 687 620 654 688 621 655 689 622 656 690 623 657 691 624 658 692 625 659 693 626 660 694 627 661 695 628 662 696 629 663 697 630 664 698 631 665 699 632 666 633 667 1. You can dial System Speed Dial numbers that are marked with * at any time, regardless of dialing restrictions placed on your extension. System Speed Dial numbers are programmed by the System Manager (report problems and suggested revisions to your System Manager).
2. Telephone number can be up to 28 digits, including 0—9, *, #, and special dialing functions.
Form F1–System Speed Dial 20
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F1: System Speed Dial Supplemental Instructions
0
With System Speed Dialing, a user can dial a stored number by pressing four buttons: the f button (# on a standard phone) followed by a 3-digit code. Storing a telephone number as a Speed Dial number lets users dial more quickly. Other kinds of numbers–such as account codes and other dialing sequences–also can be stored as Speed Dial numbers. The system allows up to 100 System Speed Dial numbers that everyone on the system can use, as well as up to 20 Personal Speed Dial numbers for each extension (for the personal use of the extension user). Please have the System Speed Dial Numbers form filled out when the technician arrives to install the system. After installation, photocopy this form and distribute a copy to everyone using the system. Users should keep this form near their phones for reference when placing calls.
General Guidelines
0
Each System Speed Dial number is assigned a 3-digit code from 600-699. For example, suppose employees frequently call Acme Supplies and Acme’s telephone number is stored for code 620. To call Acme, a user simply dials f 6 2 0. If Acme moves, or the phone number changes, program the new telephone number and users still dial f 6 2 0 to reach Acme. Record the following information for each System Speed Dial number:
Name/Company
0
Write the name of the person or company to which the number belongs. For other types of numbers, such as account codes, enter a description of the number.
* Column (Marked System Speed Dial Numbers)
0
If users should be able to call a particular System Speed Dial number, regardless of any dialing restrictions placed on their extensions, “mark” the number so it can be dialed at all times. Mark the number by placing a check mark in this column, and by pressing * before the number when storing it. For marked numbers, the stored number does not appear on a display phone when a user dials the Speed Dial code. Account codes cannot be marked.
Form F1: System Speed Dial Supplemental Instructions 21
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Telephone Number
0
Write the number exactly as it should be dialed. Numbers can be up to 28 digits, including the digits 0—9, *, #, and the special dialing functions discussed next. To store a telephone number, include the dial-out code, toll-call prefix, and area code (if needed), along with the number.
Form F1: System Speed Dial Supplemental Instructions 22
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F2a–Disallowed Lists
0
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404)
List 1
Required only if Disallowed List Assignment (#405) is specified on Form F5. Write the telephone numbers that users are prevented from dialing. List 3 List 4 List 5 List 6
List 2
List 7
List 8
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1. Telephone Number can be up to 12 characters, including 0—9, * and #. Write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).
Form F2a–Disallowed Lists 23
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F2b–Allowed Lists
0
Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407)
List 1 Entry Telephone No.1
List 2 Entry Telephone No.1
Required only if Allowed List Assignment (#408) is specified on Form F5. Write the telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of assigned restrictions. List 3 List 4 List 5 List 6 Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
Entry Telephone No.1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 08 10 1. Telephone Number can be up to 12 characters, including 0—9, * and #. Write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).
Form F2b–Allowed Lists 24
List 7
Entry Telephone No.1
List 8 Entry Telephone No.1
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F2a & F2b: Instructions for Creating Disallowed and Allowed Lists
0
Use this form to specify lists of Disallowed and Allowed telephone numbers. You can create up to 8 lists each of Disallowed and Allowed telephone numbers. Each list can have up to 10 numbers. 1. Under the List number, write a name for the list (for example, “Suppliers”). 2. In the “Telephone No.” column, write the entries for the list. You can specify complete telephone numbers or categories of numbers. ■
To specify a complete number, write it exactly as it would be dialed, including (if needed) a dial-out code, toll-call prefix, and area code.
■
To specify a category, provide one or more entries to describe an entire class of calls (such as an area code or local exchange). Preventing calls to a category may require more than one entry, to allow for different ways of dialing a number (see “Examples of Disallowed List Entries” below).
After a list has been created, it can be assigned to an extension (see Form C).
0
Disallowed Phone Number Lists (#404)
With Disallowed lists, you can prevent users from dialing specific telephone numbers or categories (for example, calls to 976 exchanges for prerecorded messages such as horoscopes, and calls to 900 area code “chat lines”). Examples of Disallowed List Entries: •
Preventing Calls to 976 Exchange Numbers
•
Preventing Calls to 900 Area Code
•
Preventing International (011) Calls
•
Preventing Use of a Specific Local Telephone Company Feature Consisting of a * and Two or Three Digits.
Allowed Phone Number Lists (#407)
0
Allowed telephone numbers are exceptions to restrictions. For example, you might put 976 numbers on a Disallowed list, but allow dialing of 9761212 for weather reports. Or you might restrict an extension to local dialing only, but assign an Allowed List to permit the user to call specific customers or suppliers.
Form F2a & F2b: Instructions for Creating Disallowed and Allowed Lists 25
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F3–Hunt Groups
0
Hunt Group Extensions (#505)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Form F3–Hunt Groups 26
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Group 8 (Fax Detection)
Group 7 (Voice Mail)
Group 6
Group 5
Group 4
Group 3
Group 2
Group 1
Ext. Jack No.
Group 8 (Fax Detection)
Assign Extensions to Hunt Groups
Group 7 (Voice Mail)
Group 6
Group 5
Group 4
Group 3
Group 2
Group 1
Ext. Jack No.
Assign Extensions to Hunt Groups
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F3: Instructions for Identifying Hunt Group Assignments
0
To assign extensions to any of the following groups (each extension can be in one or more groups), write the group number or place a check mark in the appropriate columns.
Hunt Group Extensions 1—6 (#505)
0
Calls can ring or be transferred to the first non-busy extension in a Hunt Group. A call rings at an extension in a Hunt Group three times; if it is not answered, it hunts to the next non-busy extension, continuing until someone answers or the caller hangs up. (If you voice signal a Hunt Group, only the first extension is signaled; the call does not keep hunting if there is no answer.) Incoming calls on specific lines can be directed to a Hunt Group using Group Call Distribution (#206). Do not put PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions in Hunt Groups 1—6.
VMS Only (Hunt Group 7)
0
For extensions where PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS is connected, check this box to assign the extension to Hunt Group 7. For PARTNER Voice Messaging, extensions 78 and 79 need to be assigned to Hunt Group 7. The system recognizes any extensions assigned to Hunt Group 7 as Voice Mail Service (VMS– PARTNER MAIL, PARTNER MAIL VS, or PARTNER Voice Messaging) extensions. Do not assign any extensions other than VMS extensions to Hunt Group 7. Also, do not assign PARTNER MAIL, PARTNER MAIL VS, or PARTNER Voice Messaging extensions to any other Hunt Groups, to any Calling or Pickup Groups, or to the Night Service Group.
Fax Only (Hunt Group 8)
0
Hunt Group 8 is used only for fax detection and transfer. Do not assign any extension other than fax extension to Hunt Group 8.
Form F3: Instructions for Identifying Hunt Group Assignments 27
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F4–Forced Account Code
0 Forced Account Code List (#409)
1
Entry Account Code (up to 6 digits)
Write Description
Entry Account Code (up to 6 digits)1
Write Description
Entry Account Code (up to 6 digits)1
01
34
67
02
35
68
03
36
69
04
37
70
05
38
71
06
39
72
07
40
73
08
41
74
09
42
75
10
43
76
11
44
77
12
45
78
13
46
79
14
47
80
15
48
81
16
49
82
17
50
83
18
51
84
19
52
85
20
53
86
21
54
87
22
55
88
23
56
89
24
57
90
25
58
91
26
59
92
27
60
93
28
61
94
29
62
95
30
63
96
31
64
97
32
65
98
33
66
99
1. Valid entries are 0—9; Write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).
Form F4–Forced Account Code 28
Write Description
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F4: Instructions for Forced Account Codes
Forced Account Code List (#409)
0
0
If an extension has been designated for Forced Account Code Entry (#307) on Form F4, the user must dial an account code before an outside telephone number can be dialed. Account codes, each up to 16 digits in length, can be used to associate telephone calls with a particular department or client. Account codes print on SMDR call reports and on reports generated by call accounting packages. If Forced Account Code Verification is desired, entries must be made in the Forced Account Code List (#409). When the system verifies an account code, it compares only the first six digits of the user-entered account code to the entries in the Forced Account Code List. For a match to be successful, the user must dial at least the account code’s associated list entry, even though the user can dial up to 16 digits for an account code. Wildcard entries are allowed on this list. (R3.0 or later only) Users can dial “911” without entering an account code.
Form F4: Instructions for Forced Account Codes 29
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F5–Customized Extensions/Pool Access Restrictions
10
Line Access Mode (#313)
List Individual lines (#301) for Pooled Extensions
24
34
P4
NA4
K
ALL
Immediate
4 lines
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
Form F5–Customized Extensions/Pool Access Restrictions 30
Delayed
No Ring Line/Pools3
4 pools Not Assigned
OUT only
IN only
NO Access
NR4
1-8
1-8
1-4
1-4
NA4
NA4
1-6
7
8
NA4
NA4
Night Service Group Extensions (#504)
VMS Cover Rings (#321)
NA4
FAX Only
Call Coverage Rings (#320)
NA4
VMS Only
Voice Interrupt on Busy (#312)
A4
Hunt Group Extensions (#505)
Automatic VMS Cover (#310)
NA4
Calling Page Group Extensions (#502)
Distinctive Ringing (#308)
A4
Pickup Group Extensions (#501)
Forced Acct. Code Entry (#307)
NA4
Write line numbers or pool access codes for Line Access Restriction (#302) or Pool Access Restriction (#315)
Allowed List Assignment (#408)
Abbreviated Ringing (#305)
E4
Write line numbers or pool access codes in each column to show desired Line Ringing options.
Identify Group Assignments
Disallowed List Assignment (#405)
Auto Exit Privacy (#304)
Hybr Hybrid Mode Only
Identify Restrictions/Permissions if different from default
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401)
Identify Line Ringing (CTP) Option if different from default
Display Language (#303)
Ext. Jack No.
Identify Extension Settings if different from default
0
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F5–Customized Extensions/Pool Access Restrictions (Continued)
Line Access Mode (#313)
List Individual lines (#301) for Pooled Extensions
24
34
P4
NA4
Immediate
4 lines
Delayed
No Ring Line/Pools3
4 pools Not Assigned
OUT only
IN only
NO Access
NR4
1-8
1-8
1-4
1-4
NA4
NA4
1-6
7
8
NA4
NA4
Night Service Group Extensions (#504)
VMS Cover Rings (#321)
NA4
FAX Only
Call Coverage Rings (#320)
NA4
VMS Only
Voice Interrupt on Busy (#312)
A4
Hunt Group Extensions (#505)
Automatic VMS Cover (#310)
NA4
Calling Page Group Extensions (#502)
Distinctive Ringing (#308)
A4
Pickup Group Extensions (#501)
Forced Acct. Code Entry (#307)
NA4
Write line numbers or pool access codes for Line Access Restriction (#302) or Pool Access Restriction (#315)
Allowed List Assignment (#408)
Abbreviated Ringing (#305)
E4
Write line numbers or pool access codes in each column to show desired Line Ringing options.
Identify Group Assignments
Disallowed List Assignment (#405)
Auto Exit Privacy (#304)
Hybr Hybrid Mode Only
Identify Restrictions/Permissions if different from default
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401)
Identify Line Ringing (CTP) Option if different from default
Display Language (#303)
Ext. Jack No.
Identify Extension Settings if different from default
0
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 78 79
Form F5–Customized Extensions/Pool Access Restrictions (Continued) 31
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Form F5: Instructions for Pool Access Restrictions
Pool Access Restriction (#315)
0
0
By default, access to all lines and pools is set to No Restriction. To change the default, write the line numbers or pool access codes in the appropriate columns, as follows: Outgoing only—User can place outside calls and receive only transferred calls on specified line or pool. Incoming only—User cannot place outside calls but can receive calls on specified line or pool. No Access—User cannot place or receive outside calls on specified line or pool (but can receive transferred calls, pick up calls on hold, or join calls in Key mode and on key extensions in Hybrid mode). NOTE: Pool Access Restriction for key extensions in Hybrid mode is set to No Access. Pooling and Hybrid mode are available only if you are using PARTNER ACS R2.0 or later.
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401)
0
Write “IN” or “LOC” to indicate restrictions for all outgoing calls on all lines at that extension, as follows: IN—User can make only intercom calls to other system extensions. LOC—User can make only intercom and local outside calls (no calls that require a “0” or “1” prefix). Any available outside lines can still be used to dial numbers on an Allowed Phone Number List assigned to the extension, numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List, or Marked System Speed Dial numbers.
Form F5: Instructions for Pool Access Restrictions 32
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist
0
Use this job aid to help you collect, organize and record the settings necessary for a PARTNER installation that includes the 1600 DSL module. Always double-check this data before allowing this document to be used to program the module. ■
There is a worksheet at the end of this document that you can use for settings that will not fit in the table.
■
All sample IP addresses used are in the private domain. In most cases, public addresses are required.
Customer: ___________________________________ Contact: ____________________________________ Sales person: ________________________________ Installer: ____________________________________ ISP contact: _________________________________ SDSL contact:________________________________ SDSL tech support contact: _____________________
Required Information
Phone: _______________________ Phone: _______________________ Phone: _______________________ Phone: _______________________ Phone: _______________________ Phone: _______________________
Notes
Sample values
When service will be available at the customer site.
4-10-01 AM
Email: ___________________________ Email: ___________________________ Email: ___________________________ Email: ___________________________ Email: ___________________________ Email: ___________________________
Enter values for current installation
1. SDSL settings
SDSL activation date1
NOTE: The SDSL provider should verify SDSL signal at the customer demarcation point.
Voice Gateway1
The manufacturer connecting the SDSL calls to the PSTN.
Lucent PathStar, Copper Com, Jetstream , Tollbridge
Jitter delay1
In most cases, the defaults for this setting are appropriate. If voice quality is poor, use the sample values shown.
Frame Relay = 17msec; ATM = 6msec
DSLAM1
The manufacturer of the SDSL voice and data stream multiplexer.
Lucent Stinger, Copper Mountain
1. Obtained from SDSL provider 2. Obtained from ISP 3. Obtained from customer/LAN VAR
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist 33
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Required Information
Notes
Sample values
The transport protocol: ATM or Frame Relay.
ATM, Frame Relay
2. Custom DSLAM settings
If your SDSL provider uses a DSLAM not included on the list at right, you must obtain and program the information in this section to complete the configuration.
Lucent Stinger Nokia Copper Mountain Paradyne AccessLan
Set SDSL speed automatically1
Allows the 1600 DSL to automatically match the current SDSL speed. Always try the highest speed first.
Set SDSL Speed to Auto Cycle (Nokia); Set SDSL Speed to Auto Sense (Copper Mountain); SDSL Sync Delay (Lucent)
Conexant AutoBaud Mode1
Certain DSLAMs use this mode to negotiate line speed.
Enable/Disable
Manual SDSL speed1
The static data rate for the SDSL line.
A value divisible by 8 Kb between 144 Kbps and 2320 Kbps
Set Data to FRAMED mode (Nokia)1
Leave at default value (Y) unless instructed otherwise by the service provider.
Y or N
SDSL Interface Mode (Bit Order)1
Copper Mountain DSLAM uses “Magnitude, Sign.” All others use “Sign, Magnitude.”
“Magnitude, Sign”; “Sign, Magnitude”
3. Frame Relay PVC settings
Obtain these permanent virtual circuit settings if your SDSL provider uses the Frame Relay protocol. Remember that separate PVC settings are required for the voice and data connections.
DLCI number1
Identifies the logical channel established over the Frame Relay/SDSL connection. There is one DLCI for data and one for voice. The SDSL provider should give you two numbers.
45, 46
The manner in which headers are assigned to packets. Differentiates between voice calls and data.
Proprietary Voice DLCI, RFC 1490
Datalink
protocol1
Encapsulation1
1. Obtained from SDSL provider 2. Obtained from ISP 3. Obtained from customer/LAN VAR
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist 34
Enter values for current installation
Voice: Data:
Voice: Data:
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Required Information
Transmit/Receive
CIR1
FRF.12 End-to-End Fragmentation1 Fragment
Size1
Notes
Sample values
Enter values for current installation
The Committed Information Rate (CIR) to and from the provider. Default values may be used unless instructed by provider. Value should be the same for both voice and data PVCs. There are three values associated with CIR: • Committed Burst Size (Bc) • Circuit throughput • Excess Burst Size (Be) Leave each of these settings at default values unless instructed otherwise by the service provider. Leave this setting at the default value unless instructed otherwise by the service provider.
Enabled or Disabled
Leave this setting at the default value unless instructed otherwise by the service provider.
100-1600
Voice: Data: Voice: Data:
4. ATM PVC Settings
Obtain these permanent virtual circuit settings if your SDSL provider uses the ATM protocol. Remember that separate PVC settings are required for the voice and data connections.
VPI1
Unique Virtual Port Identifier value assigned to each ATM connection
32, 33
Unique Virtual Circuit Identifier value assigned to each ATM connection.
34, 35
The manner in which headers are assigned to packets. Differentiates between voice calls and data. This does not default automatically. It must be set manually.
Proprietary Voice, RFC 1483
Voice: Proprietary Voice
The manner in which bits are handled in the PVC. Differentiates between voice calls and data. Defaults automatically to UBR for PVCs using proprietary voice encapsulation.
CBR, UBR
Voice: CBR
VCI1 Encapsulation1
Service Category1
Voice: Data: Voice: Data:
Data: RFC 1483
Data: UBR
1. Obtained from SDSL provider 2. Obtained from ISP 3. Obtained from customer/LAN VAR
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist 35
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Required Information
Notes
Sample values
5. VoIP settings
Obtain these settings if your SDSL provider uses VoIP with the Lucent PathStar or other VoIP voice gateway. These settings are in addition to the required ATM or Frame Relay settings.
IP address of Notified Entity1
IP address of the VoIP gateway
192.168.32.2
IP address for MGCP signaling1
Media Gateway Control Protocol. This is the IP address of the voice PVC on the 1600 DSL; used for signal control.
192.168.32.3
TOS byte value1
Leave at 7 unless specified by SDSL provider.
1-7
IP address for RTP signaling1
Real Time Protocol. This is also the IP address of the voice PVC on the 1600 DSL; used for controlling the voice PVC .
192.168.32.3
TOS byte value1
Leave at 7 unless specified by SDSL provider.
1-7
6. IP Router Settings
IP router settings apply to the data PVC only.
SDSL (WAN) port address2
The public address that external routers use to find the 1600 DSL module. Select the data PVC when configuring.
192.168.32.40
WAN port subnet mask2
Required regardless of transport protocol.
255.255.255.0
Normal/High priority2
Sets the priority of the data port; leave at normal for data PVC; set to high if using MGCP voice (VoIP).
Normal/High
Default route (gateway) IP address2
IP address of the ISP. The address to which the router sends packets it otherwise does not know how to route.
192.168.32.2
NOTE: The netmask for the default route does not require a manual setting. The netmask is determined automatically.
10/100BaseT Ethernet address3
Address for the LAN port of the 1600 DSL module.
1. Obtained from SDSL provider 2. Obtained from ISP 3. Obtained from customer/LAN VAR
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist 36
192.168.32.2
Enter values for current installation
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Required Information
Notes
Sample values
10/100BaseT Ethernet subnet mask3
Specifies the size of the network to which the LAN port is connected.
255.255.255.0
User ID3
Restricts access to the 1600 DSL at the User level. Case-sensitive. Up to 17 alphanumeric characters.
myID
User password3
Restricts access to the 1600 DSL at the User level. Case-sensitive. Up to 17 alphanumeric characters.
mypassword
NetMan password3
Restricts access to the 1600 DSL at the network manager level (all functions). Case-sensitive. Up to 17 alphanumeric characters.
mypassword
DHCP3
Specify whether the DHCP feature of the 1600 DSL should be turned on.
E (to enable); D (to disable)
Physical Port for DHCP Server (gateway server address)3
If 1600 DSL module is the DHCP server, enter the IP address of the LAN port.
192.168.32.17
DHCP Lease time3
Duration of dynamically assigned IP addresses.
28800 seconds
DNS server address2
Optional.
192.168.35.1
Enter values for current installation
NOTE: The netmask for the DNS server does not require a manual setting. The netmask is determined automatically.
High IP Address for range pool (Address pool end address)3
Last address in a range of dynamically assigned IP addresses.
192.168.32.127
Low IP Address for range pool (Address pool start address)3
First address in a range of dynamically assigned IP addresses.
192.168.32.65
Domain name3
The name for a manageable group of computers.
xyzcorp.com
1. Obtained from SDSL provider 2. Obtained from ISP 3. Obtained from customer/LAN VAR
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist 37
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Required Information
Notes
Sample values
Enter values for current installation
Static Binding IP address3
Links a host to an address using MAC number.
192.168.32.33 00:c0:d5:d4:da:2c
See worksheet (if necessary)
NAT3
Allows multiple LAN hosts to access the Internet behind one public IP address.
E (to enable); D (to disable)
Actions to be permitted or denied3
Enter rules via the IP Filtering Configuration menu.
Permit HTTP,Deny PING
IP-based servers supported by customer3
Obtain IP addresses for all servers that require external access.
Email 198.168.34.53 Web 198.168.121.13
Activate RIP3
Optional; Only for more complex networks.
Version 1 Broadcast; Version 2 Broadcast; Version 2 Multicast
Static routing table entries3
Only used if other routers exist on the network.
9. Bridging settings
Bridging is a rare configuration that allows the 1600 DSL to support older, in-place LAN protocols, such as AppleTalk. Bridging directs information by hardware MAC address rather than IP address.
7. Packet filtering needs See worksheet (if necessary)
8. Routing requirements
Bridge Aging Timer3 Spanning Tree: Enabled3 Spanning Tree: Port Priority3 Spanning Tree: Hello Time3 1. Obtained from SDSL provider 2. Obtained from ISP 3. Obtained from customer/LAN VAR
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist 38
See worksheet (if necessary)
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Required Information
Notes
Sample values
Enter values for current installation
Spanning Tree: Max Age3 Spanning Tree: Forward Delay3 Spanning Tree: Path Cost3 1. Obtained from SDSL provider 2. Obtained from ISP 3. Obtained from customer/LAN VAR
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist 39
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Worksheet for extended values Use the following space to note values that will not fit in the Planning Checklist table. For example, NAT addresses, firewall considerations, routing values, etc.
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module Planning Checklist 40
0
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Appendix A: Security Notification and Checklist
I.
0
SECURITY NOTIFICATION DOCUMENT AVAYA Inc.
0
_______________________________________________________________
0 0
Introduction
The PARTNER ACS 1600 DSL module adds the ability to make Internet connections to your business. Internet connections pose inherent risks. This notification, and the associated checklist, are intended to help business owners recognize and minimize those risks. There are three separate areas of concern to be considered: the ability of an unknown internet user to access your data, the need to control access to router configuration tables, and the need to store router configuration values for recovery from a catastrophic failure. Those three areas of concern are addressed in the checklist. 0
II. Roles and Responsibilities The purchase of a converged communications system is a complicated process involving many phases including vendor selection, equipment selection, design, ordering, implementation, and systems assurance testing. Throughout each of these phases, customers, manufacturers, and service providers each have specific roles and responsibilities. As a manufacturer, Avaya Inc. acknowledges the following responsibilities: •
Develop a system that can provide robust barriers against fraudulent entry.
•
Provide information to customers and service providers about the default state of various points of entry. When appropriate, these entry points will be defaulted to a secure state.
•
Provide clear warnings in product documentation, and address security issues in training classes and training materials.
The service provider must accept the following responsibilities: •
Educate the customer/purchaser on security risks in specific products and applications.
•
Educate the customer/purchaser on available methods for minimizing risks, and costs associated with implementing those solutions when appropriate.
Appendix A: Security Notification and Checklist 41
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
•
Implement customer applications in a manner that is as secure as possible, or with appropriate warnings to customers who choose to accept less than recommended security.
•
Avoid introducing any new risks when providing maintenance or other support.
The customer must accept the following responsibilities: •
Provide the overall data network design. This might be done via expertise on the customer payroll, or might be contracted.
•
Decide on the degree of security to be implemented in every application. This includes filtering and other barriers associated with data networking.
•
Verify that the system being installed is consistent with your requirements.
•
Monitor various components of your data network for abnormal or suspicious operations.
Customer Information: Company Name: Customer Contact's Name: Customer Contact Signature-Date:
Service Provider (Installation) Information: Company Name: Consultant/Installer Name: Consultant/Installer Signature-Date:
Appendix A: Security Notification and Checklist 42
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
PARTNER® ACS 1600 DSL Module — Security Checklist
N/A
0
System Administration Router Password changed from default. Confirm switch password is secure (covered on another check list).
Y/N
Notes
Data Network Access Security Need for filters has been reviewed and appropriate work contracted/performed. Need for a firewall application such as “ChoiceNet” has been reviewed and appropriate work contracted/performed.
Y/N
N/A
Notes The 1600 DSL module, or the Internet Service Provider, might provide filtering.
Router Configuration Storage Router configuration tables have been stored outside the router (a “backup”) for recovery from a catastrophic failure. Note location of stored tables in “Notes” at right.
Y/N
N/A
Notes
Provides double security when pass-thru used.
Appendix A: Security Notification and Checklist 43
PARTNER® Advanced Communications System
Appendix A: Security Notification and Checklist 44
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
Glossary 200E Module: The 200E module is an optional module for PARTNER Systems. Each 200E module can have up to two Central Office (CO) lines and no extensions. 206 Module: The Basic PARTNER Control unit. A 206 Module acts as both the processor for a small PARTNER System and a line/station port for small PARTNER. Each 206 module can have up to two Central Office (CO) lines and six extensions. One power failure jack. 206E Module: Each 206E module can have up to two Central Office (CO) lines and six extensions. At least 206E (or one 206) is required in every PARTNER Plus and PARTNER II System. Cannot stand alone as a Baby PARTNER (requires a 206 module with the “processor brains” to act as a Baby PARTNER. Contains one power failure jack. 206EC Module: Same as 206E module but with Caller ID. 267F2 Bridging Adapter: The piece of equipment used on PARTNER Systems to join devices to the same extension jack so that they share the same extension number. 308EC Module: Line/station module compatible only with PARTNER ACS R2.0 and later. Supports Caller ID. 362 Processor Module: The PARTNER ACS processor module will be modified for PARTNER Endeavor, and will be called a 362 processor module. It will be able to operate only on the PARTNER Endeavor product. 362EC Module: The PARTNER 308EC module will be modified for PARTNER Endeavor, and will be called a 362ED module. It will be able to operate only on the PARTNER Endeavor product. 308 Processor Module: Three loop start lines, capable of handling Caller ID: The PARTNER ACS Processor (308 module) comes equipped with standard Caller ID capability, all the customer has to do is subscribe to Caller ID service from their local operating company. Not many of our competitors support Caller ID service on at least 3 lines without additional equipment. 400E Module: The 400 module is an optional module for PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II Systems. Each 400 module can have up to four Central Office (CO) lines and no extensions. 400EC Module: Same as 400 module but with Caller ID.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-1
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
A Account code: A code of up to 16 digits that is associated with incoming or outgoing telephone calls. Entry of an account code may be optional or forced. If entered, an account code appears on the call record for a call. See also Call report, Forced Account Code Entry, and Forced Account Code List. ASA: See Automatic System Answer. Attendant: The "operator" or “receptionist” of a phone system. Typically, the first person to answer an incoming call. The Attendant position is extension 10 on PARTNER and extension 10 or 11 on PARTNER Plus R3.0, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II. Attenuation: The reduction of the strength of a signal over distance. Auto Dial button: A programmable telephone button that lets you dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button. An Auto Dial button can be used to store a feature code, a phone number, or an account code so that it can be dialed with one touch. See also Programmable button. Automated Attendant Service: A voice messaging system feature that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement. See also PARTNER Attendant and Voice messaging system (VMS). Automatic System Answer: A system feature that causes incoming calls to be answered by the system if the receptionist cannot answer within a specified number of rings. The system plays a brief message and places the call on hold. Auxiliary Equipment: Optional telecommunications equipment that connects to PARTNER Systems to enhance the functionality of the system (e.g. answering machines, modems, external alerts). Sometimes called adjunct equipment.
B Background Music A feature that provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user's work area. (Background Music plays the pre-recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source.) Backplane: The piece of equipment on a PARTNER II, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor or PARTNER Plus that houses the station/line modules and processor module. The backplane also channels the power to the system and is often referred to as the Carrier.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-2
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
B (continued) Battery Backup Apparatus (BBA): The PARTNER Communications System Battery Backup Apparatus (BBA) is a low-cost battery backup system that provides power to a PARTNER System in the event of a power failure. Blocking: Occurs when a telephone call cannot be completed because the telephone system is handling too many calls. Blocking can result when too many calls are placed at the same time or when too many T/R devices are in use simultaneously. Busy Lamp Field (BLF): A device with many small lights in rows showing which extensions are busy, free, on hold, etc. Each light corresponds to an extension. The busy lamp field usually sits next to the attendant’s console. The benefit of having a busy lamp field is that the operator doesn’t have to dial the number to determine the extension’s status. This saves the attendant time in handling incoming calls and gives the caller better service. In PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II Systems, the busy lamp field is combined with a DSS (Direct Station Select) and is called the CA24 or CA48 Call Assistant. Next to each light on the busy lamp field there is a button that the operator can push. It will dial the associated extension or automatically transfer calls to the extension.
C Call Accounting System: A complete system usually consisting of a computer, a magnetic storage device (floppy or hard disk), software, and cables for connection to the telephone system. Call Accounting Systems are used to record information about telephone calls, organize that information in various ways and, upon command, print formatted reports. Call Accounting Systems use Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) data (see below) which records information about each call including the originating extension, the dialed number (local or long distance), which circuit was used for the call, when the call started, and how long it lasted. Call Answer Service: A voice messaging system feature that lets callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or transfer themselves to another extension. Call Assistant: See Intercom Autodialer (MLS-CA24, PARTNER-CA48). Call Coverage: A feature that lets users send their intercom and transferred calls and calls on outside lines assigned ownership to a covering extension when they are unable to answer calls.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-3
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
C (continued) Call Forwarding: A feature which can be programmed at any PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor or PARTNER II extension to allow calls to one extension to be automatically transferred to another extension. Call Pickup Group: When extensions are part of a Call Pickup Group, a user at one extension can pickup a call ringing at any other extension in the group. Call Record: A line of information on a call report that includes data fields such as call type, date, time called/caller number, and call duration. See also Account code and Call report. Call Report: A page of information that begins with a header and lists incoming and outgoing calls to and from your business on a call-by-call basis. See also Call Record and Call Reporting. Call Reporting: A feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting is also referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR. Call Waiting: A feature that lets standard phone users receive notification of a second incoming call when they are busy on a call. The user can then press the switchhook to put the first call on hold and answer the second call. Caller ID: A feature that displays an incoming caller’s number (or name) on a system display phone. To get Caller ID, you must subscribe to the service (if it is available) from your local phone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules. Caller ID Inspect: A feature that allows you to view incoming Caller ID or Calling Party information on other lines while active on a call, without placing the call on hold or hanging up. Caller ID Logging: A feature in PARTNER ACS which stores Caller ID information whether a call was answered or not. Caller ID Name/Number: A feature that allows you to toggle between a caller’s Caller ID name and Caller ID number. Calling Group: A group of extensions that ring simultaneously by dialing a group calling code. See also Hunt Group. Calling restriction: A feature that lets you control telephone use at specific extensions.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-4
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
C (continued) Carrier: Plastic housing, made up of a backplane and cover, which holds system modules. The configuration consists of at least the primary carrier and can be expanded to include the expansion carrier. Carrier 2-Slot: One PARTNER Endeavor processor module, one PMVS module (Total = 3 lines, 8 extensions) Carrier 5-Slot: One PARTNER Endeavor processor module, four 362EC modules (Total = 15 lines, 40 extensions) Central Office (CO) Line: A telephone line provided by the local telephone company. Most CO lines are loop start. Centralized Telephone Programming: The ability on PARTNER Systems to customize or program any extension in the system from extension 10 (or 11 on PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS and PARTNER II). Combination Extension: An extension that has two devices connected to it. Combination extensions can connect two standard devices or a standard device and a system phone, but not two system phones. Conference Call: Connecting multiple internal or external callers on the same phone conversation. PARTNER = three callers; PARTNER Plus/ACS/II/Endeavor = 5 callers Contact Closure: The system can drive an optional Contact Closure Adjunct with two Contact Closures to operate auxiliary devices such as electronic door locks. You can assign one or more extensions to a Contact Closure Group for each of these Contact Closures. Control Unit: The central component in PARTNER Systems. On PARTNER, the 206 and 200 modules and module connector make up the Control Unit. On PARTNER Plus, the Control Unit consists of 206, 200 and 400 modules, a Processor Module, backplane, and cover. On PARTNER ACS, the 308 module is both the Control Unit and a line/station card. On the PARTNER Endeavor, the 362 is both the Control Unit and a line/station card. The PARTNER II System can have an added Expansion Carrier to hold another Processor Module and more modules. Credit Card Verification Terminal: A special piece of equipment used by businesses to approve credit card purchases. Credit card verification terminals can be standalone devices or bridged with phones using the 267F2 adapter.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-5
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
D DGC Group: See Group Call Distribution and Hunt Group. Dial-Code Features: PARTNER System features that can be accessed by entering a feature code on the telephone dialpad by pressing a preprogrammed number or by pressing a preprogrammed AutoDial button. Dial Tone: The sound you hear when you pick up a telephone connected to a CO line. Dial tone is a signal from the local telephone company signifying it is prepared to accept a number from a caller. PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II also provide an Intercom Dial Tone which users hear when they pick up a phone and press an intercom button. Intercom Dial Tone is generated by the PARTNER System, not the Telephone Central Office. Direct Extension Dial: A feature that enables outside callers to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly, without waiting for the receptionist to transfer the call. Doorphone: Doorphones can be used with PARTNER Systems to notify selected “alert” extensions that somebody is at the door. They are usually small flush-mounted units located outdoors next to the front or back of a business. They have a button like a doorbell, and a speaker and microphone to allow the visitor to converse with the person who answers the phone. Do Not Disturb: A feature that prevents incoming calls from ringing at an extension. See also Send All Calls. DXD: See Direct Extension Dialing.
E Enhanced Tip/Ring: Enhanced Tip/Ring (ETR) refers to the simultaneous operation (bridging) of a PARTNER System telephone and a tip/ring telephone (or a tip/ring device such as an answering machine or modem). ETR allows the key telephone system user to connect adjunct devices without any special adapters or dedicated lines. Enhanced Tip/Ring Limited (PARTNER Only): ETR Ports (top six) on the PARTNER Endeavor are not the same as on PARTNER ACS; they are limited. You can hook up an analog device (credit card machine), however, it is only outgoing and it will not ring. The BOTTOM TWO ports are just like any other ACS ports. Exclusive Hold: This privacy feature assures that a call on hold cannot be picked up at another extension. Only the extension that put the call on hold can take it off hold.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-6
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
E (continued) Expansion carrier: The component that can be connected to the primary carrier to expand the system’s line and extension capacity. See also Primary carrier. Expansion processor module: The main module of the expansion carrier, which must be installed in the center slot of the expansion carrier. This Lucent Technologies module extends the primary carrier’s management capabilities to the 206 and 400 modules installed in the expansion carrier. See also Primary processor module. Extension: An endpoint in the system (numbered 10-57 in a PARTNER II System) that connects telephones or standard devices, which can be dialed using the intercom button. See also Programming extension. Extension Hunt Group: A series of extensions organized in such a way that if a call is transferred to the group and an extension is busy, the next extension is selected or hunts until a free extension is found. Often this arrangement is used in sales or customer service departments to ensure that calls are answered promptly. Extension jack: The location on 206 modules that allows you to connect extension wiring to the control unit for phones or other telecommunications devices. Extension Name Display: A feature that lets users assign a name to their extension. The name appears along with the extension number on system display phones when users make an intercom call, group call, or transfer a call. Extension Number: The number assigned to each extension jack on a 206 module. Extension numbers run consecutively from 10 through 57 (for a two-carrier configuration) and are used for intercom calling. Extension Programming: A method of telephone programming that lets users program their own extensions from their system phones. See also Centralized Telephone Programming. External Alerts: Optional bells, horns, or flashing lights that supplement the normal telephone ring. External Hotline: A standard phone that is programmed to dial a predetermined outside number when a user lifts the handset. See also Hotline phone.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-7
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
F Facsimile Equipment: Facsimile or “fax” equipment allows hard copy (written, typed or drawn material) to be sent through the public telephone system and reproduced at another fax machine. Fax Management button: A system phone button with lights that is programmed with the extension number of a fax machine. A user can monitor the lights next to this button to determine when the fax machine is in use, available, or not answering. Feature Button: A button on a PARTNER telephone. The feature button is used to activate system features and to program the PARTNER System. Feature phone: An industry-standard phone that includes programmable buttons or other built-in features. Fixed Features: Standard features on PARTNER Systems that come preprogrammed from the factory and cannot be changed. Forced Account Code Entry: A system setting that forces users at specified extensions to enter an account code before making a call. See also Account code and Forced Account Code List. Forced Account Code List: An optional list of account codes that the system checks when a user enters a forced account code. If the forced account code entered by the user is on the list (valid), the user gets access to an outside line; if not, the user is denied access.
G Group Call Distribution: A system setting that automatically directs incoming calls on specific lines to a Hunt Group. See also Hunt Group and VMS Hunt Group.
H Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI): When this feature is on, a voice-signaled intercom call will automatically turn on the speakerphone at the called party’s extension. The called party will hear a beep and then the caller’s voice. If you leave the microphone on all the time, you can start talking as soon as you hear the caller’s voice. When HFAI is on, you do not need to use the handset to answer intercom calls. Headsets: A headset is a combination earphone and microphone worn on the head for private, hands-free conversations. The headset can be used in place of a handset.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-8
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
H (continued) Hold Button: When depressed, the Hold Button allows you to temporarily leave a phone call, without disconnecting it. You can return to the call at any time, sometimes from other extensions. (See Exclusive Hold.) Hold Reminder Tone: If a call is on hold for over one minute the telephone beeps to remind the user that the call is still on hold. Home Run Wiring: A method of wiring a phone system where the individual cables run from each phone directly back to the central switching equipment. Home run wiring is also known as “star” wiring because every wire radiates out from the center phone equipment. Hotline phone: A standard phone at an extension set to ring another extension automatically when the handset is lifted. See also External Hotline. Hunt Group: A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred calls in roundrobin fashion. Calls to the Hunt Group are directed to the first available extension in the group, with the extension that answered most recently being the last one in the hunt order. See also Calling Group and VMS Hunt Group. Hybrid Mode: A system mode in which outside lines are grouped together in pools. To access outside lines, users press pool buttons that are assigned to their phone or enter the pool access code. In this mode, users do not know which lines they are using to make and receive calls. See also Key Mode and System Mode.
I ICLID: See Caller ID. Industry Standard Device: Tip/Ring devices that are manufactured to conform with the industry standard. In other words, non-proprietary devices that can be connected directly to the local network. Intercom: A feature that allows you to dial another extension in your telephone system without having to go through the local network. Intercom Autodialer (MLS-CA24; PARTNER CA48): An auxiliary device that can be connected to the system phones at extensions 10 and 11. The device has Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in the system, which can be used for dialing, transferring calls to extensions with one touch or manual signaling.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-9
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
I (continued) Intercom Auto Dial button: A button that is programmed to ring or page another extension whenever the button is pressed. The button can be used to call the extension or to transfer a call to the extension with one touch; the lights next to the button also show calling activity for the extension.
Intercom call: A call that is made to another system extension. IROB Unit (In-Range-Out of Building Unit): IROBS are used to protect the PARTNER System control units and extensions located in separate buildings from lighting, power surges, etc.
J Jacks: An interface device used to connect CO lines and telephones to a telephone system.
K Key Extension: An extension that has line buttons but not pool buttons. See also Key Mode and Pooled extension. Key Mode: A system mode in which outside lines are assigned one per line button. To access outside lines, users press line buttons or enter a Direct Line Pickup code. Key Telephone System: A telephone system in which the telephones have multiple buttons permitting the user to select outgoing or incoming central office phone lines directly. With a key system you don’t have to dial 9 to get an outside line as you do with a Private Branch Exchange (PBX). Lucent Technologies PARTNER Systems are key telephone systems.
L Last Number Redial: A feature that enables you to touch one button to automatically dial the last number you just dialed. Line: The transmission path between your control unit and the local phone company’s central office, used for incoming and outgoing calls.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-10
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
L (continued) Line button: A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific line for making calls. See also Key Extension and Pooled extension. Line hunting: See Group Call Distribution. Line jack: The location on 206 and 400 modules that allows you to connect outside lines to the control unit. Line Number: The number assigned to each line jack on a 206 or 400 module. Line numbers run consecutively from 01 through 24 (for a two-carrier configuration). Assigned top to bottom, left to right. Line Reserve: A system feature that lets you reserve a busy line or pool (by pressing the busy line or pool button without lifting the handset) so your phone beeps when the line or pool becomes free. Local Loop: The pair of wires that connect the telephone company’s Central Office to the subscriber’s telephone. Loop Start Lines: The most common type of telephone line provided by local telephone companies to residential users and businesses with a key telephone system. Loop Start lines use “loop signaling” which distinguishes them from other kinds of lines such as Ground Start lines and Tie lines used with PBXs. Loudspeaker Paging System Equipment that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker from a system extension. Any Lucent Technologies paging system can be connected to the PAGE jack on the primary processor module in the control unit. See also Simultaneous Paging.
M Manual Signaling: A feature that lets a user signal an extension by pressing a programmed button. The phone at the target extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed. Alternatively, the Manual Signaling button can be used to ring or voice signal the target extension. See also Intercom Auto Dial button. MDC 9000 Telephones: See System phones. Discontinued August, 1995 MDW 9000 Telephones: See System phones. Wireless Series.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-11
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
M (continued) MLS-CA24: See Intercom Autodialer. Modem: A telecommunication device that converts a computer’s digital signal to the telephone network’s analog signal and then reconverts it on the receiving end. A modem is essential for sending data over analog telephone lines. Module Connector: A device used on a Basic PARTNER System to join the PARTNER Control Unit (i.e. a 206 module) with a 206 or 200 module. This is the method used to expand a PARTNER System to its maximum line and station capacity. Music On Hold: A source of music or customized message (i.e. Magic On Hold) that callers can hear when placed on hold. Available on all PARTNER Systems. PARTNER also provides Tones On Hold, which is a simple tone reminder to callers that they are on hold.
N Network interface jack: A jack, generally located in the equipment room, that provides access to an outside line coming into the building from the local telephone company. A line cord from the network interface jack to a line jack on a 206 or 400 module connects the line to the system. Night Service: A feature that can be programmed on PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II that allows incoming calls during certain hours to be routed to and answered at designated extensions. It also prevents unauthorized off-hours calls from being placed. Non-Blocking: A system is considered non-blocking if all callers can be switched through the system even during the busiest time of day. When a system is classified as non-blocking it means that even at full capacity, all extensions are able to make Intercom or CO calls – provided a CO line is available. Non-Squared Line Assignment: Individual lines can be programmed by the system manager to appear only on certain multi-button sets within the system. In a Squared System, all lines appear on all sets.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-12
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
O Off-Hook: When the handset is lifted from its cradle, it is off-hook. Off-Premises Range Extender (OPRE): Allows the connection of standard touch-tone phones beyond 3000 feet on the same continuous property or off-premises with an OL13C circuit from the local telephone company. On-Hook: When the phone handset is resting in its cradle. On-Hook Dialing: Allows a caller to place a call without lifting the handset, using the speakerphone. After dialing, the caller can listen to the progress of the call over the phone’s built-in speaker.
P Paging Equipment: Optional loudspeaker equipment used to make announcements. On the PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II Systems, the port or interface for paging is located on the processor module. PARTNER Attendant: An optional call routing device that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement. PARTNER-CA48 Intercom Autodialer: See Intercom Autodialer (PARTNER-CA48). PARTNER MAIL: A voice mail system that answers calls, routes calls and takes messages. It provides more functionality and capacity than PARTNER MAIL VS. PARTNER MAIL VS: A voice mail system that answers calls, routes calls and takes messages. It is smaller and less expensive than PARTNER MAIL. PARTNER Reporter: PARTNER Reporter is a Windows-based software tool that allows customers to create reports to help manage telephone facilities and track business effectiveness. PARTNER Reporter is similar to PARTNER CAS for Windows, but without the Costing capability. PassageWay Direct Connection: A software application that links a customer’s PC and PARTNER System with an easy-to-use Windows interface to provide better business communications capabilities. Password: A four-digit code assigned by the system manager that users can enter from an MLS- or PARTNER model phone to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. See also Night Service.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-13
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
P (continued) PBX (Private Branch Exchange): A private phone system allowing communication within a business and between the business and the outside world. Key systems share the business communications marketplace with private branch exchange (PBX) systems. A PBX differs from a key system in that the PBX switches a call from a central answering point to the individual telephone set requested by the caller. In other words, incoming calls ring at an operator or attendant telephone, and then are sent to the designated party. Incoming lines are not normally assigned to individual phone sets. A user wishing to make an outgoing call has to “request” a trunk from a pool by dialing an access code. Internal extensions can be dialed directly. Pickup Group: A group of extensions for which calls to any extension in the group can be picked up, from any extension in the system, by dialing a group pickup code. Pool: A group of outside lines used for making and receiving calls on pooled extensions. A pool typically contains lines of a similar type or purpose (WATS, FX, etc.) and is identified by a pool access code. The system supports four pools: a main pool and three auxiliary pools. See also Pool Access Code, Pooled extension, and Hybrid mode. Pool Access Code: A three-digit code used to access outside lines in a specific pool. The main pool and each auxiliary pool are known to the system as 880, 881, 882, and 883, respectively. Users can either dial the pool access code or press a pool button representing one of the pools to make a call. Pool button: A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific pool for making calls. See also Pooled extension. Pooled extension: An extension in Hybrid mode that has pool buttons or pool and line buttons. See also Hybrid mode and Key Extension. Pooled Operation: See Hybrid Mode. Power Failure Transfer: PARTNER Systems are designed to allow single-line sets to be used during power failures to make and receive calls. Telephones used for this purpose must be connected to the first extension jack on a 206 Module. Primary Carrier: The required component of the Lucent Technologies control unit that contains the primary processor module and 206 modules and/or 400 modules. See also Expansion carrier.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-14
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
P (continued) Primary Processor Module: This Lucent Technologies module, which is always installed in the center slot of the primary carrier, manages the components of the control unit. See also Expansion processor module. Privacy: This feature ensures that once a caller “seizes” a line, no other user can access that same line even though it appears on his/her telephone set. Privacy is often used for lines that have fax machines or modems to prevent transmissions from being interrupted. Privacy can be activated by a button or administered via the Automatic Extension Privacy feature. Processor Module: The Processor Module contains the software that gives PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II their features. The Processor Module also contains jacks for connecting paging, music-on-hold devices and SMDR (PARTNER Plus R3.0 and later, PARTNER ACS and all PARTNER releases of PARTNER II support SMDR). The Processor Module is housed in a plastic case and always occupies the middle slot of the backplane. Programmable: The ability to change a feature, function or the extension assigned to a telephone without rewiring. Programmable button: A telephone button that does not have a line or pool assigned; it can be set up to dial a number or access a feature. Programmable Features: Features that can be changed by the customer to suit individual needs. Some programmable features can be changed system wide while others can be programmed differently for each extension. Programming Extension: An extension from which you can program the system; this can be either extension 10 or 11. Proprietary Device: A telephone or other device that is designed to work with a specific system, and requires a special interface to connect to the public telephone network. For example, system phones are proprietary devices that can be used only with the control unit described in this guide. See also Industry-standard device.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-15
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
R RAU (Remote Administration Unit): An auxiliary device that lets you perform system programming from a remote location. Recall Button: Used to get dial tone or to transfer calls on a key system, which is installed behind a PBX. Remote Maintenance Device (RMD): A modem used to provide remote maintenance for PARTNER MAIL. It connects to a 206 Module. Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): A Ringer Equivalence Number is comprised of 2 digits followed by an alpha character. The REN is the amount of electrical power needed to activate a device’s ringer. The REN is used by the operating company to ensure that the device is compatible with the network. RJ11: One of the network interfaces used by the telephone company to terminate the central office lines. An RJ11 jack accommodates one line.
S Send All Calls: Lets you send calls immediately to Call Coverage or to the voice messaging system. Simultaneous Paging: A feature that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker and all idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1. See also Loudspeaker Paging. SMDR (Station Message Detail Reporting): A feature of a telephone system which allows the system to collect and record information on incoming and outgoing phone calls – who made them, where they went, what time of day they were placed, how long they took, etc. This feature is used in conjunction with Call Accounting Systems. Speed Dialing: A feature that makes it possible to store certain telephone numbers and dial them automatically by pressing a few digits. All PARTNER Systems offer System Speed Dial Numbers, which can be dialed by any user in the system. PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor and PARTNER II also offer Personal Speed Dial Numbers which are programmed by individual users at their own telephones for personal use only. Squared Line Assignment: All lines appear on all telephones in the system.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-16
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
S (continued) Standard phone: An industry-standard touch-tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home. Some standard phones include special feature buttons for frequency used calling functions. See also Feature phone and Industry-standard device. Station: Another word for extension. Subscriber: (1) On a voice messaging system, a user who has a mailbox in the system. (2) A user who has access to an outside line with special features, such as Caller ID. Switch Hook: The moveable piece on a telephone set that is depressed when the handset is resting in its cradle and pops up when the handset is lifted. System Mode: One of two operating modes, Key or Hybrid, which determines how users access outside lines from their phones. The system mode is determined by a hardware setting in the processor module for PARTNER II R4 and later; for PARTNER ACS R2 and later and Endeavor the mode is password activated. See also Key Mode and Hybrid Mode. System Password: A four-digit code that users can enter from system phones to turn Night Service on and off and to override certain dialing restrictions. System phones: The Lucent Technologies telephones that are specifically designed for use with PARTNER Systems. Models include the MLS-34D, MLS-18D, MLS-12D, MLS-12, MLS-6, PARTNER-6, PARTNER-18, PARTNER-18D, PARTNER-34D, ENDEAVOR-6, ENDEAVOR-18, ENDEAVOR-18D, ENDEAVOR-34D, MLC-6, MDC 9000, and MDW 9000 phones. System Planner: A document used to configure and program a PARTNER Plus, PARTNER ACS, PARTNER Endeavor or PARTNER II System. System Programming: The programming performed by the system manager from the attendant position that customizes the system and all of the phones in the system. System programming determines common functionality as well as how individual phones in the system will function and interact with each other.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-17
®
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
BTM428J
T Telephone Programming: Customizes extensions to meet the needs of individual users, including the assignment of features to programmable buttons. Telephone Programming can be done either centrally or from the user’s own extension. See also Centralized Telephone Programming and Extension Programming. Tip/Ring Device: An industry standard telecommunication device such as an answering machine that can plug directly into the telephone network without special adapters or other interfaces. Touch Tone Receiver: Dual Tone Multiple Frequency (DTMF) is a signaling method that encodes digits as audible multi-frequency tones. Each 206 and 200 module in a PARTNER System has one DTMF Receiver that allows PARTNER Systems to receive digits dialed from tip/ring devices (e.g. single-line sets, answering machines, etc.). The 400 module has two DTMF Receivers. Transfer: A system feature that provides the ability to move a call from one extension to another. Trunk: A communication path between two points, one of them usually being a telephone company switch. A term used for CO lines on PBXs – not usually on key systems. Twisted Pair: Two wires twisted around each other to reduce interference between one wire and the other. Several sets of twisted pair wires may be enclosed in a single cable. Twisted pair is the normal cabling used between a telephone Central Office and residential and small business customers. Two-Wire Circuit: A transmission circuit composed of two wires (twisted pair) used to both send and receive information. In contrast, a four wire circuit consists of two wire pairs. One pair is used to send; one pair is to receive. All long distance circuits are four wire. A four wire circuit delivers better reception but costs more. All local loop circuits – those coming from a Class 5 Central Office to the subscriber's phone system – are two wire, unless you specifically ask for a four-wire circuit.
U Uninterruptible Power Supply: An auxiliary power unit for a telephone system that will provide continuous power for a given period of time in the event of a power outage.
Avaya - Proprietary 26-18
Issue 6, May 2001
®
BTM428J
PARTNER Access Guide Glossary
V VMS Hunt Group: Hunt Group 7, reserved by the system to identity extensions that are associated with the voice messaging system hardware. See also Group Call Distribution and Hunt Group. Voice Interrupt On Busy: A special intercom call that lets a user interrupt then speak to another user who is busy on a call. See also Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back. Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk-Back: A feature that lets the recipient of a voice interrupt on busy call respond to the originator of that call. See also Voice Interrupt On Busy. Voice Mail: A voice messaging system feature that lets users retrieve messages and record greetings. Voice Mail coverage: A voice messaging system feature that provides Call Answer Service when a call is not answered by a covered extension. See also Call Answer Service. Voice Mailbox: A storage area for greetings and messages in a voice messaging system. Voice Messaging system (VMS): Can answer outside calls, play general message and take messages (in PARTNER ACS provided by a PC card.)
W Wake Up Service: A special application feature that lets the receptionist at extension 10 schedule wake up or reminder calls for specific extensions.
Avaya - Proprietary Issue 6, May 2001
26-19
